JP2021171476A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably changing a luminous region.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 10 includes a third illumination part 303, and a light radiation device 607 for applying light toward a back side of the third illumination part 303, can change a front face of the third illumination part 303 for receiving light radiated from the light radiation device 607 to a different position, and includes a control mechanism 608 for executing first control in which light radiated from the light radiation device 607 allows the front face of the third illumination part 303 positioned in a first position to emit light as a first luminous region 605 when the front face of the third illumination part 303 is positioned in the first position, and for executing second control in which light radiated from the light radiation device 607 allows the front face of the third illumination part 303 positioned in a second position to emit light as a second luminous region 606 when the front face of the third illumination part 303 is positioned in the second position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, there are pachinko machines and slot machines as typical examples of game machines. Some gaming machines of this type include, for example, decorative parts having a light emitting region (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

See JP-A-2012-100905 (pages 4-8, 3-8))

However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, there is a problem that it is difficult to appropriately change the light emitting region.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the light emitting region.

The present invention has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.
That is, the invention according to claim 1 is
Decorative members arranged on the front side of the game machine body,
In a gaming machine provided with an irradiation means for irradiating light toward the back surface side of the decorative member.
The gaming machine can shift a predetermined surface of the decorative member that receives the light emitted from the irradiation means to a different position.
When the predetermined surface is located at the first position, the light emitted from the irradiation means executes the first control of emitting the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region. When the predetermined surface is located at the second position, a second control is executed in which the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region. It is characterized by being provided with a control means for performing.

[Action / Effect] According to the invention of claim 1, the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the light emitting region.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 1 of this invention. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the pachinko machine, and is the figure which shows the state which attached the illumination cover by the AA cross section of FIG. It is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and is the figure which shows the state which attached the illumination cover by the BB cross section of FIG. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a hold display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. (A) is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table, and (b) is a special figure 2 big hit lottery table. This is a table for selecting a variable pattern of the main decorative pattern. (A) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot normal reach and the off-normal reach, and (b) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot super reach and the off-target super reach. (A) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot super reach and the out-of-order super reach, and (b) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot super reach and the off-the-shelf super reach. This is a table for determining the ending effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows 1st symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the next game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process for look-ahead. It is a flowchart which shows the launch control process. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball lending control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting effect processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the decision button input monitoring and effect processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the selection button input monitoring and effect processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect execution management process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead variation pattern designation command reception processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing mode (big hit) display setting processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display mode setting process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the next game state display mode setting process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the switching process such as a display mode by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol string variation display processing by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the specific operation screen display process by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot opening round display processing by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot ending display processing by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability / support state transition display processing by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the low probability / support state transition display processing by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the specific operation period notification processing by a display control device. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the specific operation period in the 3rd symbol display device. It is a figure explaining the display mode during a specific operation period in the high-speed fluctuation of a main decorative symbol. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the specific operation period after the reach establishment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display mode during a specific operation period after the establishment of reach following FIG. 53. It is a figure explaining the display mode when the decision button is left pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the display mode when a decision button and a selection button are pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation. (A) is the special figure 1 big hit lottery table of the second embodiment, and (b) is the special figure 2 big hit lottery table. This is a table for setting the ending effect pattern. (A) is the special figure 1 big hit lottery table of the third embodiment, and (b) is the special figure 2 big hit lottery table. This is a table for setting the ending effect pattern. (A1) to (a3) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the end-of-term proximity information of the specific operation period in the fourth embodiment, and (b1) to (b3) are different displays from (a1) to (a3). It is a figure explaining an aspect. (A1) to (a3) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the next game state proximity information in the fifth embodiment, and (b1) to (b3) are display modes different from (a1) to (a3). It is a figure explaining. (A) to (e) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the next game state proximity information of the sixth embodiment. (A) to (f) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the next game state proximity information of the seventh embodiment. (A) to (f) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the next game state proximity information of the eighth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 9. FIG. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 10. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 11. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period in the jackpot round game of Example 12. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period in the reach display effect of Example 13. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period in the reach display effect of Example 14. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 15. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 16. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 17. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 18. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period in the reach display effect of Example 19. It is a figure explaining the display mode different from FIG. 76 in the specific operation period during the reach display effect. (A) is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table in Example 20, and (b) is a special figure 2 big hit lottery table. FIG. 1 is a table for selecting a main decorative symbol variation pattern according to a special figure 20 of the twenty embodiment. It is a table for determining the ending effect pattern of Example 20. It is a figure explaining the display mode from the reach display effect to the jackpot round display effect. FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an auxiliary effect determination process by the display control device 45 of the twenty-first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart explaining the one-shot notification lottery process by the display control device 45, and (b) is a flowchart explaining the one-shot notification display process by the display control device 45. (A) and (b) are diagrams for explaining an ending effect pattern determination table. It is a figure explaining the display mode from the reach display effect to the jackpot ending display effect. It is a figure explaining the ending effect pattern determination table in Example 22. It is a figure explaining another display mode of a jackpot ending display effect. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 23 in the state where the illumination cover of the size different from FIG. 1 is attached. It is the right side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 88, and is the figure which shows the state which the illumination cover of a different size is attached in the CC cross section. It is the left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 88, and is the figure which shows the state which the illumination cover of a different size is attached in the DD cross section. (A) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the adjustment of the light emitting region when the illumination covers of different sizes are attached. (A) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the adjustment of the light emitting region in Example 24. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 25. It is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 93, and is the view which shows the state in which the illumination cover is attached in the EE cross section. It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the illumination covers of different sizes attached. It is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 95, and is the view which shows the state which the illumination cover of a different size is attached in the FF cross section. (A) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the adjustment of the light emitting region when the illumination covers of different sizes are attached. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a sub-control device. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 26. It is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 99, and is the view which shows the state in which the illumination cover is attached in the GG cross section. It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the illumination covers having different light emitting regions attached. It is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 101, and is the view which shows the state which the illumination cover of a different size is attached in the HH cross section. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a sub-control device. It is a front view of the game board of Example 27. It is the II cross-sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 104, and is the figure which shows the adjustment of the light emitting area of the movable illumination part. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the movable illumination part protrudes. It is a JJ cross-sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 106, and is the figure which shows the adjustment of the light emitting area of the movable illumination part. It is a figure which shows the adjustment of the light emitting region of the movable illumination part of Example 28. It is a front view of the game board of Example 29. It is a KK cross-sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 109, and is the figure which shows the adjustment of the light emitting area of the movable illumination part. It is a KK cross-sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 109, and is the figure which shows the adjustment of the light emitting area in the state which the movable illumination part protrudes. It is a front view of the game board of Example 30. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL of the game board shown in FIG. 112, showing the adjustment of the light emitting region of the movable illumination portion. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the movable illumination part protrudes. It is the MM cross-sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 114, and is the figure which shows the adjustment of the light emitting area of the movable illumination part. (A) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the mounting direction of the illumination cover and the separate illumination cover of the thirty-first embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams for explaining before and after the change of the light emitting region of the illumination cover of Example 32. (A) and (b) are diagrams for explaining before and after the change of the light emitting region of the third illumination cover of the third embodiment.

The present specification also discloses the following inventions relating to gaming machines and the problems to be solved by the inventions.

<First task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, when the gaming state shifts from a predetermined gaming state such as a jackpot round gaming state to the next gaming state, a jackpot ending effect of displaying a jackpot ending image on a display device is used. There is a gaming machine that executes a display effect at the time of transition. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-230281 (pages 28 to 29, FIGS. 9, 10)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, this transition display effect is included in the predetermined gaming state when this effect is started, but in the conventional gaming machine, this transition display effect is included in the next gaming state. May be mistaken for. In this case, the player may start a necessary operation (for example, an operation of launching a game ball) in the next game state even though the ending effect is being produced. In that case, various disadvantages may occur by misidentifying that the current game state in which the transition display effect is being executed is the next gaming state. For example, in the case of shifting to the support gaming state after the jackpot round gaming state, if the game ball is fired before the transition to the support gaming state, the benefit of the support gaming state will not be received and it will be a waste ball. It is a problem that it becomes.
The invention according to the following (A1) has been made in view of such circumstances, and reduces the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current game state in which the transition display effect is being executed is the next gaming state. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can be played.
The invention according to the following (A1) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(A1) When the gaming state shifts from a predetermined gaming state (for example, a jackpot round gaming state) to the next gaming state (for example, a support gaming state), a predetermined timing (for example, the end of the final round) at the end of the predetermined gaming state From (after) to the start timing of the next gaming state (for example, the start timing of the support gaming state), an execution means for executing a transition display effect (for example, a jackpot ending effect) for displaying a predetermined image on the display means, and
Non-arrival suggestion information that suggests to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect (for example, right-handed information during ending 44k described later, next gaming state proximity information). A gaming machine provided with a notification means for notifying a player of 44l, ending countdown information 44v).

According to the gaming machine described in (A1), when the gaming state shifts from the predetermined gaming state to the next gaming state, the next gaming state starts from a predetermined timing at the end of the predetermined gaming state. Until the timing, the execution means executes the transition display effect of displaying a predetermined image on the display means. During the execution of the transition display effect, the notification means notifies the player of non-arrival suggestion information suggesting to the player that the start timing of the second gaming state has not arrived. As a result, the player recognizes that the current game state in which the transition display effect is being executed is the predetermined gaming state, in other words, the current game state in which the transition display effect is being executed is not yet in the next gaming state. It becomes easier to do. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current game state in which the display effect at the time of transition is being executed is the next gaming state.

(A2) In the gaming machine according to (A1) above,
The predetermined gaming state is a first gaming state (for example, a jackpot round gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
The next gaming state is an advantageous gaming state different from the first gaming state, and it is possible to acquire another advantageous gaming value in a situation where the player is operating the operating means. Including the second gaming state (for example, high probability / support state, low probability / support state)
The non-arrival suggestion information is advantageous game state non-arrival suggestion information (for example, during the ending described later) that suggests to the player that the start timing of the second gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. A gaming machine characterized by including right-handed information 44k, next game state proximity information 44l, and ending countdown information 44v).

According to the gaming machine described in (A2), the next gaming state (second gaming state) that shifts from the predetermined gaming state (first gaming state) is an advantageous gaming state different from the first gaming state. This includes a gaming state in which another advantageous gaming value can be obtained in a situation where the player is operating the operating means. Therefore, the player can easily operate the operation means for acquiring another advantageous game value based on the misunderstanding that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the second game state. Is performed during the first game state, so that another advantageous game value cannot be obtained. However, during the execution of the transition display effect, the advantageous game state non-arrival suggestion information that suggests to the player that the start timing of the second game state has not arrived is notified, so that the transition display effect is executed. It is difficult to misunderstand that the current state of the game is the second game state. Further, since it is possible to suppress the operation of the operating means by misunderstanding that the other advantageous game value can be obtained, it is possible to reduce the waste of the operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the second gaming state.

(A3) In the gaming machine described in (A2) above,
The first game state is 1 from the opening state to the closed state of the specific ball entry means based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means triggered by the entry into the ball entry means. It is a round game state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times.
The transition display effect is from a predetermined timing after the time when the specific ball-entry means is closed in the final round of the round gaming state to the start timing of the next gaming state (start timing of the support gaming state). , A gaming machine characterized in that it is an effect at the end of a round gaming state in which a predetermined image is displayed on a display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (A3), the first gaming state is based on the fact that the result of the lottery by the lottery means triggered by the entry into the ball entry means is the specific result. This is a round gaming state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times, with one round from the opening state to the closing state. The transition display effect is a round game in which a predetermined image is displayed on the display means from a predetermined timing after the specific ball entry means is closed in the final round of the round game state to the start timing of the next game state. It is a production at the end of the state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current game state in which the effect at the end of the round game state is being executed is the next game state.

(A4) In the gaming machine according to (A3) above,
A variable ball-entry means that changes between an open state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to enter, and the variable ball-entry means that triggers a lottery by the lottery means.
It is provided with an actuating ball-entry means for the game ball to enter, and the actuating ball-entry means for which the ball entry triggers an actuating lottery to operate the variable ball-entry means.
The second gaming state is a support gaming state in which the result of the actuating lottery based on the entry of the actuating ball entry means is likely to be a specific result of operating the variable ball entry means.
The gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous gaming state non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the support gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (A4) above, the variable ball entry means is a ball entry means that changes between an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. Is the trigger for the lottery by the lottery means. The actuated ball entry means is a ball entry means into which a game ball enters, and the entry of the ball triggers an actuating lottery for operating the variable ball entry means. The second gaming state is a support gaming state in which the result of the actuated lottery based on the entry of the actuating ball entry means tends to be a specific result of operating the variable ball entry means. The advantageous gaming state non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the support gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. As a result, the player accidentally launches the game ball during the transition display effect before the transition to the support game state in order to allow the game ball to enter the operating ball entry means quickly in the support game state. It is easy to get rid of. In this regard, by seeing the information suggesting that the advantageous gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect, the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the support gaming state is reduced. be able to.

(A5) In the gaming machine according to (A3) above,
The second gaming state is a high-probability gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the specific result is higher than that in the normal gaming state.
The gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous gaming state non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the high-probability gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. ..

According to the gaming machine described in (A5), the second gaming state is a high-probability gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be a specific result is higher than that in the normal gaming state. The advantageous gaming state non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the high-probability gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current state in which the display effect at the time of transition is being executed is a high-probability gaming state.

(A6) In the gaming machine according to (A4) above,
In the second gaming state, the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be a specific result and the probability that the result of the actuation lottery by the actuating lottery means will be a specific result will be higher than in the normal gaming state. The advantageous gaming state non-arrival suggestion information, which is a stochastic gaming state, suggests to the player that the start timing of the supported high-probability gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine described in (A6) above, in the second gaming state, the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be a specific result and the probability that the result of the operation lottery by the actuated lottery means will be a specific result are usually. It is a specific high-probability gaming state that is higher than the gaming state of. The advantageous gaming state non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the supported high-probability gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current state in which the display effect at the time of transition is being executed is the supported high-probability gaming state.

(A7) In the gaming machine according to (A1) above,
The transition display effect is one in which a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination.
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the type of the specific result.
The non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived until the timing at which the plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the predetermined combination. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A7), in the transition display effect, a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination depending on the type of the specific result. Therefore, conventionally, if the player misunderstands that the end timing of the display time of a certain image in the transition display effect is the end timing of a series of transition display effects, the display time of the subsequent image is displayed. There is a risk of being disadvantaged by misunderstanding that the game has been moved to the next game state. However, in the present invention, the non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived until the timing when the plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the predetermined combination. .. As a result, it is suggested that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived by the non-arrival suggestion information until the timing when the plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the predetermined combination during the transition display effect. Therefore, the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantages is reduced.

(A8) In the gaming machine according to (A7) above,
The transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from the plurality of types of images.
A gaming machine characterized in that the combination pattern differs depending on the type of the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (A8), the transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns in which predetermined images are combined from a plurality of types of images, and the combination pattern is a type of a specific gaming state. It is possible to show the player a combination of images that is preferable for the player according to the type of the specific gaming state as a display effect at the time of transition.

(A9) In the gaming machine according to (A8) above,
The transition display effect according to the specific game state of a predetermined type has a predetermined combination pattern in which the plurality of types of images are combined in a predetermined combination.
In the transition display effect according to the specific gaming state of another type, another combination pattern is configured by reducing one or more of the plurality of types of images included in the predetermined combination pattern. A gaming machine characterized by being able to play.

According to the gaming machine described in (A9), the transition display effect according to a predetermined type of specific gaming state has a predetermined combination pattern in which a plurality of types of images are combined in a predetermined combination, and is different. In the transition display effect according to the specific gaming state of the type, another combination pattern is configured by reducing one or a plurality of images among the plurality of types of images included in the predetermined combination pattern. As a result, for the gaming machine, the processing load when determining the transition display effect according to the type of the specific gaming state is reduced. Further, since the combination pattern of the transition display effect is determined for each type of the specific game state, it becomes easy to provide the player with the transition display effect associated with the type of the specific game state.

(A10) In the gaming machine according to (A1) above,
The transition display effect is one in which a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination.
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination depending on the type of the identification information variation display effect corresponding to the specific result.
The non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived until the timing at which the plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the predetermined combination. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A10), in the transition display effect, a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the identification information variation display effect corresponding to the specific result. As a result, the same specific result as the specific result that generates a certain type of specific game state is obtained, but when the type of the identification information variation display effect up to the specific result is different, the same transition display effect is displayed. The disadvantages caused by this can be reduced. In addition, during the transition display effect, it is suggested that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived by the non-arrival suggestion information until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. Even when the same specific result is displayed but different display effects at the time of transition are displayed, the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantage is reduced.

(A11) In the gaming machine according to (A9) above,
The transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from the plurality of types of images.
A gaming machine characterized in that the combination pattern differs depending on the length of time during which the identification information variation display effect is performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A11), the transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images, and the combination pattern is an identification information variation display effect. It is possible to show the player a combination of images preferable to the player as the transition display effect according to the length of the time of the identification information variation display effect.

(A12) In the gaming machine according to (A9) above,
The transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from the plurality of types of images.
A gaming machine characterized in that the combination pattern differs depending on the degree of expectation that the specific result will occur in the identification information variation display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (A12), the transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images, and the combination pattern is an identification information variation display effect. By differently depending on the degree of expectation that a specific result will occur in the above, it is possible to show the player a combination of images that is preferable for the player according to the degree of expectation that a specific result will occur in the identification information variation display effect as a display effect at the time of transition. can.

(A13) In the gaming machine according to (A9) above,
The transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from the plurality of types of images.
The combination pattern is different depending on the number of times the identification information variation display effect is executed from the previous occurrence of the specific gaming state to the next occurrence of the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (A13), the transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns in which predetermined images are combined from a plurality of types of images, and the combination pattern is the previous specific gaming state. Is different depending on the number of times the identification information variation display effect is executed from the occurrence of the occurrence to the next occurrence of the specific gaming state, so that the specific gaming state occurs next after the previous specific gaming state occurs. It is possible to show the player a combination of images preferable to the player as a transition display effect according to the number of times the identification information variation display effect is executed.

(A14) In the gaming machine according to (A1) above,
In the combination pattern, the result of the lottery by the lottery means that triggers the entry into the ball entry means becomes a specific result, or the result of the lottery by the lottery means that triggers the entry into the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized in that the combination of the plurality of types of images in the transition display effect differs depending on whether a specific result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine described in (A14) above, in the combination pattern, the result of the lottery by the lottery means that triggers the entry into the ball entry means becomes a specific result, or the combination pattern is triggered by the entry into the variable ball entry means. The combination of a plurality of types of images in the transition display effect differs depending on whether the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result. As a result, it is possible to show the player a combination of images that is preferable for the player according to the difference in the opportunity of the lottery as a display effect at the time of transition.

(A15) In the gaming machine according to (A3) above,
The non-arrival suggestion information is a gaming machine that suggests to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived immediately after the end of the final round in the round gaming state. ..

According to the gaming machine described in (A15), the non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived immediately after the end of the final round in the round gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused as a result of misidentifying that the game is shifting to the next gaming state immediately after the end of the final round in the round gaming state.

(A16) In the gaming machine according to (A3) above,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived at the same time as the execution of the transition display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (A16), it is suggested to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived at the same time as the execution of the transition display effect. It is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused as a result of misidentifying that the game is shifting to the next gaming state at the same time as the execution of.

(A17) In the gaming machine according to (A3) above,
The non-arrival suggestion information tells the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived after the predetermined time has elapsed from the execution of the transition display effect during the execution of the transition display effect. A gaming machine characterized by being suggestive.

According to the gaming machine described in (A17), the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived after a predetermined time has elapsed from the execution of the transition display effect during the execution of the transition display effect. Since it is a suggestion to the player, it occurs as a result of misunderstanding that the transition display effect is being executed, but the transition to the next game state is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the execution of the transition display effect. Profit can be reduced.

(A18) The game state shifts from a predetermined state (for example, a jackpot round game state, a self-character selection state of a confrontation type reach development effect) to the next state (for example, a support game state, a confrontation execution state of a confrontation type reach development effect). In the case, from the predetermined timing of the predetermined state (for example, after the end of the final round, the selection of the own character is started) to the predetermined timing of the next state (for example, the start timing of the support game state, the confrontation start timing of the confrontation type reach development effect). ), And an execution means for executing a transition display effect (for example, a jackpot ending effect, a confrontation type reach development effect, a self-character selection effect) that displays a predetermined image on the display means.
Non-arrival suggestion information that suggests to the player that the start timing of the next state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect (for example, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period, the ending right-handed information 44k, A gaming machine provided with a notification means for notifying a player of next game state proximity information 44l and ending countdown information 44v).

According to the gaming machine described in (A18), the gaming state is changed from a predetermined state (for example, a jackpot round gaming state, a state in which the player character can be selected for the confrontation type reach development effect) to the next state (for example, a support gaming state, a confrontation type). When shifting to the reach development effect confrontation execution state), the predetermined timing of the predetermined state (for example, after the end of the final round, the start of selecting the own character) is changed to the predetermined timing of the next state (for example, the start of the support gaming state). An execution means for executing a transition display effect (for example, a jackpot ending effect, a confrontation type reach development effect) that displays a predetermined image on the display means until the timing (confrontation start timing of the confrontation type reach development effect), and a transition display effect. Non-arrival suggestion information that suggests to the player that the start timing of the next state has not arrived during the execution of , Ending countdown information 44v) is provided with a notification means for notifying the player. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current state in which the transitional display effect is being executed is in a predetermined state, in other words, the current time in which the transitional display effect is being executed is not yet in the next state. Become. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by erroneously assuming that the current state in which the display effect at the time of transition is being executed is the next state.

(A19) In the gaming machine according to (A18) above,
The predetermined state is a predetermined gaming state (for example, a jackpot round gaming state), and the next state is the next gaming state (for example, a support gaming state) that occurs next to the predetermined gaming state. The predetermined timing of the predetermined state is the final stage of the predetermined gaming state (for example, the timing after the end of the final round), and the predetermined timing of the next state is the start timing of the next gaming state (support gaming state). (Start timing of Machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (A19), the gaming machines described in (A1) to (A17) can be realized.

(A20) In the gaming machine according to (A18) above,
The predetermined state is a predetermined display state (self-character selectable state) in a predetermined display effect (for example, a confrontation type reach development effect), and the next state is a predetermined display state in the predetermined display effect. It is the next display state (confrontation execution state) that occurs next, and the predetermined timing of the predetermined state is a predetermined timing in the predetermined display effect (for example, the own character selection start timing of the reach development effect). The predetermined timing of the next state is a predetermined timing in the next display state (for example, the confrontation start timing of the confrontation type reach development effect), and notifies the unarrival suggestion information (for example, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period). A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine described in (A20), the predetermined state is the predetermined display state (self-character selectable state) in the predetermined display effect (for example, the confrontation type reach development effect), and the next state is It is the next display state (confrontation execution state) that occurs next to the predetermined display state in the predetermined display effect, and the predetermined timing of the predetermined state is a predetermined timing (for example, reach development effect) in the predetermined display effect. The predetermined timing of the next state is the predetermined timing in the next display state (for example, the confrontation start timing of the confrontation type reach development effect), and the unarrival suggestion information (for example, specific). Notify the end-of-operation period proximity information 44e). As a result, the player can see that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the predetermined display state in the predetermined display effect, in other words, the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is still the predetermined display effect. It becomes easy to recognize that it is not the next display state in. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by erroneously assuming that the current display state in which the transition display effect is being executed is the next display state in the predetermined display effect.

(A21) In the gaming machine according to (A20) above,
The transition display effect (for example, the self-character selection effect of the confrontation type reach development effect) includes a plurality of types of images (for example, first player information PYA, second player information PYB, third player information PYC, fourth player information). It is executed continuously in a predetermined combination,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the type of the specific result (for example, in the case of a probability variation jackpot, the first player information PYA to the fourth Player information PYD is displayed, and in the case of a normal jackpot, 1st player information PYA to 3rd player information PYC are displayed),
The non-arrival suggestion information (for example, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period) is used until the timing when the plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the predetermined combination (for example, from the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD). A gaming machine characterized in that it suggests to the player that the start timing of the next display state has not arrived (until two rounds of display).

According to the gaming machine described in (A21), the transition display effect (for example, the self-character selection effect of the confrontation type reach development effect) includes a plurality of types of images (for example, first player information PYA, second player information PYB, etc.). The third player information PYC and the fourth player information PYD) are continuously executed in a predetermined combination, and the predetermined combination is the specific combination when the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes a specific result. It is displayed in different combinations depending on the type of result (for example, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD are displayed, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the first player information PYA to the third player information PYC. (Displayed), the unarrival suggestion information (for example, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period) is displayed from the first player information PYA until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination (for example, in the case of a probability variation jackpot). It is intended to suggest to the player that the start timing of the next display state has not arrived (until two rounds of the display of the fourth player information PYD). As a result, conventionally, when the player misunderstands that the end timing of the display time of a certain image in the transition display effect is the end timing of a series of transition display effects, the subsequent image is displayed. There is a risk of mistaking the time as being transferred to the next gaming state, which will result in a disadvantage. However, in the present invention, during the transition display effect, the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived due to the unarrival suggestion information until the timing when the plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the predetermined combination. Is suggested, the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantages is reduced.

<Second task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, when the player operates the operating means within a predetermined period (for example, a high-speed changing period of the symbol) during the identification information fluctuation display, this operating means is used. For example, an image for volume adjustment operation for performing a setting operation such as volume adjustment is displayed, and the operation means is operated outside the predetermined period (for example, reach display period) during the identification information variation display. In some cases, there is a gaming machine that does not display the image for volume adjustment operation (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193546 (page 43, FIG. 28)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, it is easy to misunderstand that the predetermined period has not passed even though the predetermined period during the identification information fluctuation display has passed, and the period of the volume adjustment operation has elapsed without the volume adjustment operation being performed. This is a problem that the player cannot enjoy the variable display of the identification information at a comfortable volume.
The invention according to the following (B1) was made in view of such circumstances, and the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the image for specific operation can be displayed at the present time during the identification information fluctuation display is disadvantageous. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be reduced.

(B1) When the player operates the operation means (for example, the decision button 81) within a predetermined period (for example, the display period of the normal screen 43a, the demo screen 43b, and the high-speed changing screen 43c), at least the operation. The display of the image for specific operation (for example, the display of the specific operation screen 44b having the volume adjustment display) for performing the specific operation (volume adjustment operation) using the means is executed, and the period outside the predetermined period (for example, the reach display period) is executed. ), When the operation of the operation means is performed, the execution means that does not execute the display of the image for specific operation and the execution means.
Non-arrival suggestion information that suggests to the player that the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation image has not arrived during the predetermined period (for example, information 44a during the specific operation period described later, the end of the specific operation period). A gaming machine provided with a notification means for notifying a player of proximity information 44e).

According to the gaming machine described in (B1) above, the executing means is for causing at least a specific operation using the operating means when the operating means is operated by the player within a predetermined period. The display of the image for specific operation is executed, and when the operation means is operated outside the predetermined period, the display of the image for specific operation is not executed. The notifying means notifies the player of unarrival suggestion information suggesting to the player that the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation image has not arrived during this predetermined period. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation image has not yet arrived at the present time, in other words, the display of the specific operation image is possible at the present time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the image for specific operation can be displayed at the present time.

(B2) In the gaming machine described in (B1) above,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information includes a specific operationable period notification image for notifying that the specific operation image can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (B2), the non-arrival suggestion information includes a specific operationable period notification image for notifying that the specific operation image can be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the predetermined period during the identification information variation display is the period during which the specific operation can be performed.

(B3) In the gaming machine according to (B1) above,
The non-arrival suggestion information includes a remaining time notification image that notifies the remaining time of the displayable period of the specific operation image or a remaining time suggestion image that suggests the remaining time of the displayable period of the specific operation image. A featured game machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (B3), the non-arrival suggestion information indicates the remaining time of the displayable period of the specific operation image or the displayable period of the specific operation image. Includes suggested remaining time suggestive images. As a result, the player can easily recognize the remaining time of the period during which the specific operation can be performed in the predetermined period during the identification information variation display.

(B4) The non-arrival suggestion information is characterized in that, when the specific operation image is displayed within the predetermined period, a non-notification period is provided in which the non-arrival suggestion information is not notified thereafter. Game machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (B4) above, if the image for specific operation is displayed within a predetermined period of time, the non-arrival suggestion information is not notified that the image for specific operation is not displayed thereafter. There will be a period. As a result, the image for specific operation is frequently displayed within a predetermined period (that is, the player performs an operation to display the image for specific operation), and the player can sufficiently see the effect within the predetermined period. It can be reduced that it cannot be used.

(B5) In the gaming machine according to (B1) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information is continuously notified even when the image for specific operation is displayed within the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine described in (B5) above, the non-arrival suggestion information is continuously notified even when the image for specific operation is displayed within a predetermined period. As a result, even when a specific operation for displaying a specific operation image is performed, the player can easily correct the content within a predetermined period.

(B6) In the gaming machine according to (B1) above,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information is displayed even while the image for specific operation is being displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (B6), the non-arrival suggestion information is displayed even during the display of the specific operation image. As a result, the player recognizes the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation image even when viewing the display screen of the specific operation screen after seeing the non-arrival suggestion information and operating the operation means. It will be easier.

(B7) In the gaming machine according to (B1) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the image being displayed can be visually recognized during the predetermined period even while the image for specific operation is being displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (B7), the image being displayed during the predetermined period can be visually recognized even while the image for specific operation is being displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize what the displayed image will look like during the predetermined period even while the specific operation screen is being displayed.

(B8) In the gaming machine according to (B1) above,
The non-arrival suggestion information can be displayed within the high-speed fluctuation period during the identification information fluctuation display period, and cannot be displayed after the high-speed fluctuation period even during the identification information fluctuation display period. A game machine to be.

According to the gaming machine described in (B8) above, the non-arrival suggestion information can be displayed within the high-speed fluctuation period during the identification information fluctuation display period, and after the high-speed fluctuation period even during the identification information fluctuation display period. Is not displayable. As a result, even during the identification information fluctuation display period, after the high-speed fluctuation period ends, the period is the period that the player wants to see / the player wants to see (variation display result display and reach effect). Is displayed, which can reduce inconvenience.

(B9) In the gaming machine according to (B1) above,
The non-arrival suggestion information is the next in the specific gaming state when the specific gaming state shifts to the next gaming state and the specific operation image cannot be displayed in the next gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be displayed during the production at the time of transition to the gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (B9), the non-arrival suggestion information is a case where the specific gaming state shifts to the next gaming state, and the image for specific operation cannot be displayed in the next gaming state. In this case, it is possible to display the image during the transition to the next gaming state in the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the inconvenience caused by the inability to perform the specific operation after the specific game state shifts to the next game state.

<Third task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine in which a right-handed gaming is performed in a gaming state with a jackpot round gaming state and a subsequent support state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-255733 (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-255733). Page 3)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, since it is necessary to notify the player that this type of gaming machine is a right-handed gaming during a jackpot round gaming state or a gaming state with a support status thereafter, the main display screen or LED is used. Notification that it is a right-handed game has been made. This right-handed notification is also performed during the ending effect performed after the end of the final round in the jackpot round game state. Therefore, during the ending production period, the jackpot round game has ended, and even though the support state has not started, the player hits right with the right-handed notification, causing a waste ball. There's a problem.
The invention according to the following (C1) is made in view of such circumstances, and is a gaming machine capable of reducing the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the current time is the execution timing of the right-handed game. The purpose is to provide.
The invention according to the following (C1) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(C1) A first notification means for performing right-handed notification to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed in a predetermined gaming state.
In the next gaming state that occurs after the end of the predetermined gaming state, a second notification means that notifies the player that the game is to be performed by right-handing, and a second notification means that notifies the player.
When shifting from the predetermined gaming state to the next gaming state, the transition of displaying a predetermined image on the display means from the end timing of the right-handed game in the predetermined gaming state to the start timing of the next gaming state. Equipped with an execution means to execute the time display effect,
The first notification means performs right-handed notification in the first aspect during the right-handed game in the predetermined gaming state, and changes to a mode different from the first aspect during the execution of the transition display effect. A gaming machine characterized by performing right-handed notification in a mode.

According to the gaming machine described in (C1), the first notification means performs right-handed notification to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed in a predetermined gaming state. The second notification means performs right-handed notification to notify the player that the game will be performed by right-handed in the next game state that occurs after the end of the predetermined game state. When shifting from a predetermined gaming state to the next gaming state, the executing means shifts to display a predetermined image on the display means from the end timing of the right-handed game in the predetermined gaming state to the start timing of the next gaming state. Execute the time display effect. The first notification means performs right-handed notification in the first aspect during a right-handed game in a predetermined gaming state, and right in a second aspect changed to a mode different from the first aspect during execution of the transition display effect. Make a hit notification. As a result, the player can play a predetermined game at the present time due to the difference in the notification mode between the right-handed notification that is performed until the transition display effect is executed in the predetermined game state and the right-handed notification that the transition display effect is being executed. It is easy to notice that the display effect at the time of transition is being executed, not during the right-handed game in the state, and it is not the execution timing of the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by erroneously recognizing that the current time during which the transition display effect is being executed is the execution timing of the right-handed game.

(C2) In the gaming machine according to (C1) above,
The predetermined game state is a round in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times, with one round from the opening state to the closing state of the specific ball entry means based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific result. It is in a game state,
The next gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that occurs after the end of the round gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, based on the result of the lottery being the specific result.
The transition display effect is executed from the end timing of the final round in the round gaming state to the start timing of the advantageous gaming state when shifting from the round gaming state to the advantageous gaming state.
The first notification means is a gaming machine characterized in that during the round game, right-handed notification is performed in the first aspect, and during execution of the transition display effect, right-handed notification is performed in the second aspect.

According to the gaming machine described in (C2), the predetermined gaming state is from the opening state to the closing state of the specific ball entry means based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being the specific result. This is a round game state in which a round game of one round is performed a predetermined number of times. The next gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that occurs after the end of the round gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, based on the result of the lottery being a specific result. The transition display effect is executed from the end timing of the final round in the round gaming state to the start timing of the advantageous gaming state when shifting from the round gaming state to the advantageous gaming state. The first notification means performs right-handed notification in the first mode during the round game, and right-handed notification in the second mode during the execution of the transition display effect. As a result, the player is currently executing the transition display effect, not the round game, due to the difference in the notification mode between the right-handed notification during the round game and the right-handed notification during the transition display effect. , It becomes easy to notice that it is not the execution timing of the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by erroneously recognizing that the current time during which the transition display effect is being executed is the execution timing of the right-handed game in the advantageous game state.

(C3) In the gaming machine according to (C1) above,
The second aspect of the gaming machine is characterized in that it is more difficult for the player to perform a right-handed operation than the first aspect.

According to the gaming machine described in (C3), the second aspect of the right-handed notification is a mode in which it is more difficult for the player to perform the right-handed operation than the first aspect of the right-handed notification. As a result, the recognition that the execution timing of the right-handed game is during the transition display effect is lowered, so that the current time during the transition display effect is misunderstood as the execution timing of the right-handed game in the advantageous game state. It is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by doing so. The mode in which the right-handed operation is difficult to perform is, for example, an image that discourages the right-handed operation or an image in which the right-handed operation is inconspicuous, which will be described later.

(C4) In the gaming machine according to (C1) above,
The second aspect is a gaming machine characterized in that it is less noticeable to the player than the first aspect.

According to the gaming machine described in (C4), the second aspect of the right-handed notification is a mode that is less noticeable to the player than the first aspect of the right-handed notification. As a result, the recognition that the execution timing of the right-handed game is during the transition display effect is lowered, so that the current time during the transition display effect is misunderstood as the execution timing of the right-handed game in the advantageous game state. It is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by doing so. Inconspicuous aspects are, for example, that if the right-handed notification is an image, the size of the image is small and the color of the image is light. The image of the right-handed notification may gradually become smaller, or the color of the image may gradually become lighter.

(C5) In the gaming machine according to (C1) above,
The first notification means is a gaming machine characterized in that, at the final stage of the transition display effect, right-handed notification is performed in a third aspect suggesting that the second aspect returns to the first aspect.

According to the gaming machine described in (C5), the first notification means performs right-handed notification in a third aspect suggesting that the second aspect returns to the first aspect at the final stage of the transition display effect. As a result, right-handed notification can be quickly resumed at the timing when the transition display effect shifts to the next gaming state.

(C6) A first notification means for performing right-handed notification to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed in a predetermined gaming state, and
In the next gaming state that occurs after the end of the predetermined gaming state, a second notification means that notifies the player that the game is to be performed by right-handing, and a second notification means that notifies the player.
When shifting from the predetermined gaming state to the next gaming state, the transition of displaying a predetermined image on the display means from the end timing of the right-handed game in the predetermined gaming state to the start timing of the next gaming state. Execution means to execute the time display effect,
A gaming machine comprising:, in the transition display effect, a next gaming state proximity information notifying means for notifying the next gaming state proximity information indicating that the start timing of the next gaming state is approaching.

According to the gaming machine described in (C6), the next gaming state proximity information notification means notifies the next gaming state proximity information indicating that the start timing of the next gaming state is approaching in the transition display effect. do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time during which the transition display effect is being executed is the execution timing of the right-handed game in the next game state.

(C7) A first notification means for performing right-handed notification to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed in a predetermined gaming state.
In the next gaming state that occurs after the end of the predetermined gaming state, a second notification means that notifies the player that the game is to be performed by right-handing, and a second notification means that notifies the player.
When shifting from the predetermined gaming state to the next gaming state, the transition of displaying a predetermined image on the display means from the end timing of the right-handed game in the predetermined gaming state to the start timing of the next gaming state. Execution means to execute the time display effect,
The game is characterized by comprising a next game operation start time proximity information notifying means for notifying the proximity information of the next game operation start time indicating that the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next game state is approaching. Machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (C7), the next game operation start time proximity information notification means notifies the next game operation start time proximity information indicating that the start timing of the next game state is approaching. This makes it easier to grasp the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next game state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by not being able to properly grasp the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next gaming state.

(C8) In the gaming machine according to (C7) above,
The next game operation start time proximity information notification means is a gaming machine that notifies the next game operation start time proximity information from the transition display effect to the next game state.

According to the gaming machine described in (C8), the next game operation start time proximity information notification means notifies the next game operation start time proximity information from the transition display effect to the next game state. As a result, it is possible to be aware of the right-handed operation for the next game state from the period of the transition display effect, and to quickly execute the right-handed operation at an appropriate timing after entering the next game state.

(C9) In the gaming machine according to (C7) above,
The next game operation start time proximity information notification means is a gaming machine characterized in that the next game operation start time proximity information is notified in the transition display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (C9), the next game operation start time proximity information notification means notifies the next game operation start time proximity information in the transition time display effect. As a result, the player can execute the right-handed operation for the next game state at an appropriate timing during the transition display effect.

<Fourth task>
Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, for example, there is a gaming machine in which a player can change the volume (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-089649 (pages 41 to 42)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, this type of gaming machine has a problem that the operation of changing the volume by the player is not interesting.
The invention according to the following (D1) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in an operation of changing the volume. ..
The invention according to the following (D1) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(D1) A display means capable of displaying a display effect related to a game,
A sound output means that outputs sound according to the display effect, and
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A volume change control means capable of changing the volume of the sound output from the sound output means based on the operation to the operation means, and a volume change control means.
The volume change control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the operation sound at the time of volume change can be a sound related to the display effect displayed during the period in which the volume can be changed.

According to the gaming machine described in (D1), a display means capable of displaying a display effect, a sound output means for outputting sound according to the display effect, an operation means capable of being operated by a player, and an operation means. The volume change control means that can change the volume of the sound output from the sound output means based on the operation to, and the volume change control means display the operation sound at the time of volume change during the period when the volume can be changed. It is possible to make the sound related to the production. As a result, the player can change the volume while listening to the sound related to the display effect when the volume is changed, so that the player can improve the interest of the operation of changing the volume.

(D2) In the gaming machine described in (D1) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation sound is a sound related to the changed display effect when the display effect at the time of changing the volume is changed to a different display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (D2), the operation sound is a sound related to the changed display effect when the display effect at the time of changing the volume is changed to a different display effect. As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while listening to the sound related to the display effect displayed at the time of the change operation, so that the optimum volume can be set at the time of the change operation.

(D3) In the gaming machine described in (D1) above,
The operation sound is a sound related to the display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined display effect that can be associated with the display effect, and the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined association. A gaming machine characterized in that the sound is not related to the display effect when the display effect is impossible.

According to the gaming machine described in (D3), the operation sound is a sound related to the display effect when the display effect at the time of changing the volume is a predetermined and associative display effect, and the volume is changed. When the display effect of time is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated with each other, it is a sound that is not related to the display effect. As a result, when the display effect at the time of changing the volume is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated with each other, the player is given discomfort or inconvenience by forcibly associating the display effect with an inappropriate display effect. Can be prevented.

(D4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D3).
The display means is a gaming machine characterized in that the display effect and volume information can be displayed when the volume is changed.

According to the gaming machine described in (D4) above, the display means can display the display effect and the volume information when the volume is changed. As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while watching the display effect and listening to the sound related to the display effect, so that the player can improve the interest of the operation of changing the volume.

(D5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D4) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is displayed in a smaller size than the image of the display effect displayed before the volume change operation.

According to the gaming machine described in (D5), the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is displayed in a smaller size than the image of the display effect displayed before the volume change operation. .. As a result, the image of the display effect is reduced during the volume change operation, so that the volume change operation becomes easy. In addition, the player can check the displayed display effect on the reduced image while performing the volume change operation, so he / she does not have to worry that the display effect may end during the volume change operation. In addition, you can change the volume with confidence.

(D6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D4) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that, at least a part of the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is superimposed behind the image for the volume change operation in a visible manner.

According to the gaming machine described in (D6), at least a part of the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is superimposed behind the image for the volume change operation so as to be visible. Is displayed. As a result, a sufficient area for displaying an image for the volume change operation can be secured, so that the volume change operation becomes easy. Also, while the player is performing the volume change operation, the display effect being displayed can be confirmed by the image displayed overlaid on the back, so the display effect may end during the volume change operation. You can change the volume with confidence without worrying about it.

<Fifth task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine in which a display effect for displaying information that can be visually recognized by a player is performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-081588 (pages 44 to 46)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, this type of gaming machine has a problem that the display effect is not interesting because the pattern in which the information is displayed is fixed.
The invention according to the following (E1) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of display production.
The invention according to the following (E1) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(E1)
Display means that can display display effects related to the game,
A display control means for controlling the display of the display effect on the display means in a predetermined pattern is provided.
The predetermined pattern is
A first pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined display time and in a predetermined display mode, and
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined display information has a display time shorter than the predetermined display time and a second pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a display mode different from the predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine described in (E1), a predetermined display means capable of displaying a display effect related to the game and a display control means for controlling the display effect to be displayed on the display means in a predetermined pattern are provided. The patterns are different from the first pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in the predetermined display time and in the predetermined display mode, and the predetermined display information is displayed in the display time shorter than the predetermined display time and in the predetermined display mode. It has a second pattern displayed in a display mode. As a result, it is possible to execute the display effect in various variations in which the display time and the display mode for displaying the predetermined display information are different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the display effect.

(E2) In the gaming machine according to (E1) above,
The first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order.
The second pattern is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined display information is displayed in a shortened state in which the predetermined display time is shortened while maintaining the predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine described in (E2), the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a predetermined display information in a predetermined order. It is a pattern that is displayed in a shortened state in which the display time of is shortened. Thereby, the variation of the display effect can be increased without impairing the sameness of the content and the presentation method of the display effect in the first pattern and the second pattern.

(E3) In the gaming machine according to (E1) above,
The first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order.
The second pattern is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a pattern displayed in a composite state in which the predetermined information displayed in the predetermined order is combined.

According to the gaming machine described in (E3), the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a predetermined information displayed in a predetermined order. It is a pattern that is displayed in a composite state in which. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the display effect without impairing the identity of the content of the display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern.

(E4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (E1) to (E3) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the second pattern.

According to the gaming machine described in (E4), the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the second pattern. As a result, in the display effect executed in the second pattern, by shortening the display time for displaying the predetermined display information, it is possible to increase the variation of the display effect by utilizing the generated surplus time.

(E5) In the gaming machines described in (E1) to (E4) above,
The predetermined display information is a gaming machine characterized in that it is ending effect information after a jackpot round game.

According to the gaming machine described in (E5), the predetermined display information is the ending effect information after the jackpot round game. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the ending effect after the jackpot round game.

(E6) In the gaming machines described in (E1) to (E4) above,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the predetermined display information is suggestive effect information displayed during the reach effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (E6), it is suggestive effect information displayed during the reach effect. It is possible to increase the variation of the suggestion effect displayed during the reach effect.

<Sixth task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine in which a display effect for displaying information that can be visually recognized by a player is performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-081588 (pages 44 to 46)). Even in this type of gaming machine, a display accompanied by an operation of the operating means may be performed in the middle of the display effect.
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, this type of gaming machine has a problem that the fun of the display effect is reduced because a part of the display effect is replaced with the display accompanied by the operation of the operating means.
The invention according to the following (F1) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of display production.
The invention according to the following (F1) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(F1)
Display means to display display effects related to the game,
An operating means that can be operated by the player according to the display effect,
A display control means for controlling the display of the display effect on the display means is provided.
The display control means
An operation request execution means that controls the display of an operation request image that requests the player to operate the operation means during the display effect, and an operation request execution means.
The operation display effect executing means for controlling the display of the operation display effect using the operation means during the display effect, triggered by the player's operation on the operation request image, is provided.
The predetermined pattern is
A first pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined display time and in a predetermined display mode when the operation request image is displayed and the player does not perform an operation on the operation request image.
When the operation request image is displayed and the player performs an operation on the operation request image, the predetermined display information is displayed in a shorter display time than the first pattern and different from the first pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed in a mode and has a second pattern in which the operation display effect is executed after the display of the predetermined display information is completed.

According to the gaming machine described in (F1), the display means for displaying the display effect related to the game, the operation means that the player can operate according to the display effect, and the control for displaying the display effect on the display means are performed. The display control means includes an operation request execution means for controlling the display of the operation request image requesting the player to operate the operation means during the display effect, and the player's operation on the operation request image. The operation display effect execution means for controlling the display of the operation display effect using the operation means during the display effect is provided, and the predetermined pattern is such that the operation request image is displayed and the operation request image is displayed. When the player does not perform the operation, the first pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in the predetermined display time and in the predetermined display mode, the operation request image is displayed, and the game is performed with respect to the operation request image. When a person performs an operation, the predetermined display information is displayed in a display mode shorter than that of the first pattern and in a display mode different from that of the first pattern, and the operation display effect is displayed after the display of the predetermined display information is completed. It has a second pattern to be performed. As a result, when the operation means is effectively operated with respect to the operation request image, the interest of the display effect can be improved by entertaining the operation display effect without significantly impairing the interest of the display effect. can.

(F2) In the gaming machine described in (F1) above,
The first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order at the predetermined display time.
The second pattern is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined display information is displayed in a shortened state in which the predetermined display time is shortened while maintaining the predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine described in (F2), the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order at a predetermined display time, and the second pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is predetermined. It is a pattern that is displayed in a shortened state in which a predetermined display time is shortened in the same order as. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the operation display effect without impairing the sameness of the content and the presentation of the display effect in the first pattern and the second pattern.

(F3) In the gaming machine described in (F1) above,
The first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order at the predetermined display time.
The second pattern is characterized in that it is displayed in a composite state in which the predetermined display time is shortened by displaying the predetermined display information displayed in the predetermined order in combination. A game machine to play.

According to the gaming machine described in (F3), the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order at a predetermined display time, and the second pattern is displayed in a predetermined order. This is a pattern in which the predetermined display information that has been displayed is displayed in a composite state, so that the predetermined display time is shortened and the predetermined display information is displayed in a composite state. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the operation display effect without impairing the identity of the content of the display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern.

(F4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F3).
A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the second pattern.

According to the gaming machine described in (E4), the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the second pattern. As a result, in the display effect executed in the second pattern, by shortening the display time for displaying the predetermined display information, the generated surplus time can be used to increase the variation of the operation display effect. ..

(F5) In the gaming machines described in (F1) to (F4) above,
The predetermined display information is a gaming machine characterized in that it is ending effect information after a jackpot round game.

According to the gaming machine described in (F5), the predetermined display information is the ending effect information after the jackpot round game. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the operation display effect performed during the ending effect after the jackpot round game.

(F6) In the gaming machines described in (F1) to (F4) above,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the predetermined display information is suggestive effect information displayed during the reach effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (F6), the predetermined display information is suggestive effect information displayed during the reach effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the operation display effect performed during the suggestion effect displayed during the reach effect.

<7th task>
Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, for example, there is a gaming machine that displays an ending image after the end of a jackpot round game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-20575 (pages 89 to 90)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, this type of gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to further improve the fun of the ending effect.
The invention according to the following (G1) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the ending effect.
The invention according to the following (G1) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(G1)
A display means that can display a display effect triggered by a lottery based on the establishment of starting conditions,
A display control means for controlling the display of the display effect on the display means is provided.
The display control means
A specific effect executing means for controlling the execution of the specific effect during the display effect, and
Based on the result of the lottery being a specific result, the variable ball entry means is executed a predetermined number of times as one round from the opening state in which the game ball can enter to the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. It is provided with an ending effect executing means for controlling the display of the ending effect that displays predetermined information during the ending period from the end of the round game to the start of the next game.
The ending effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to control the display of information related to the specific effect executed during the display effect in the ending effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (G1), a display means capable of displaying a display effect triggered by a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition, and a display control means for controlling the display effect to be displayed on the display means. The display control means is an opening that allows the game ball to enter the specific effect execution means that controls the execution of the specific effect during the display effect and the variable ball entry means based on the result of the lottery being the specific result. An ending that displays predetermined information during the ending period from the end of a round game to the start of the next game, which is executed a predetermined number of times from the state to the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. The ending effect executing means for controlling the display of the effect is provided, and the ending effect executing means can control the display of information related to the specific effect executed during the display effect in the ending effect. As a result, the ending effect and the display effect up to the ending effect are associated with each other by the specific effect, and the fun of the display effect continues to the ending effect through the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved. ..

(G2) In the gaming machine described in (G1) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the information related to the specific effect is information indicating a component of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (G2), the information related to the specific effect is information indicating a component of the specific effect. As a result, it becomes easier to remember the display effect by displaying the components of the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved.

(G3) In the gaming machine described in (G1) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the information related to the specific effect is information indicating the influence of the specific effect on the player.

According to the gaming machine described in (G3), the information related to the specific effect is information indicating the influence given to the player by the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to appeal to the player who has been influenced by the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved.

(G4) In the gaming machines described in (G1) to (G3) above,
The display effect on which the specific effect is executed is a gaming machine characterized in that the display effect is a variable display effect of identification information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the result of the lottery is the specific result.

According to the gaming machine described in (G4), the display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a variable display effect of the identification information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the result of the lottery is the specific result. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect as well as the variable display effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

(G5) In the gaming machine described in (G4) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the display effect on which the specific effect is executed is a reach display effect of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine described in (G5), the display effect on which the specific effect is executed is the reach display effect of the identification information. As a result, it becomes easier to remember the specific effect as well as the reach display effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

(G6) In the gaming machines described in (G1) to (G3) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the display effect on which the specific effect is executed is a round display effect displayed during the round game.

According to the gaming machine described in (G6), the display effect on which the specific effect is executed is a round display effect displayed during the round game. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect as well as the round display effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

(G7) In the gaming machines described in (G1) to (G6) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the possibility of the specific effect is higher than that in the case where the specific effect is not executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (G7), the specific effect is a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the possibility of producing a specific result is higher than that in the case where the specific effect is not executed. As a result, the player who understands the meaning of the suggestion can easily remember the specific suggestion effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

(G8) In the gaming machines described in (G1) to (G6) above,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is a specific notification effect that notifies that the possibility of the specific effect is higher than that in the case where the specific effect is not executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (G8), the specific effect is a specific notification effect that notifies that the possibility of a specific result is higher than that in the case where the specific effect is not executed. As a result, the player who sees, hears, or experiences the notification can easily remember the specific notification effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

(G9) In the gaming machines described in (G1) to (G8) above,
The display control means includes selection request execution means for controlling the display of a selection request image that requests the player to make a predetermined selection during the display effect.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a predetermined selection requested by the selection request image is made.

According to the gaming machine described in (G9), the display control means includes a selection request execution means for controlling the display of a selection request image that requests the player to make a predetermined selection during the display effect, and the specific effect is , Selection request Executed when there is a predetermined selection requested by the image. As a result, it becomes easier to remember the specific effect together with the predetermined selection requested by the operation request image, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

(G10) In the gaming machines described in (G1) to (G9) above,
The selection request image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed during a variable display effect of identification information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the result of the lottery is the specific result.

According to the gaming machine described in (G10), the selection request image is displayed during the variable display effect of the identification information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the result of the lottery is a specific result. As a result, the impression of the specific effect is likely to remain strong along with the variable display effect, and the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

(G11) In the gaming machines described in (G1) to (G9) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the selection request image is displayed during the ending effect and at the same time as information related to the specific effect or after displaying information related to the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (G11), the selection request image is displayed during the ending effect and at the same time as the information related to the specific effect or after displaying the information related to the specific effect. .. As a result, it becomes possible to reconsider whether or not to make a predetermined selection while looking at the information related to the specific effect or after seeing the information related to the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the ending effect. ..

(G12) In the gaming machines according to the above (G1) to (G11).
The specific effect is a gaming machine including one that is executed when the specific effect can be executed triggered by a lottery based on the establishment of the start condition.

According to the gaming machine described in (G12), the specific effect may be executed when the specific effect can be executed triggered by a lottery based on the establishment of the start condition.

<8th task>
Conventionally, there are pachinko machines and slot machines as typical examples of game machines. Some gaming machines of this type include, for example, decorative parts having a light emitting region. (For example, refer to Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-100905 (pages 4 to 8, FIGS. 3 to 8)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, there is a problem that it is difficult to appropriately change the light emitting region.
The following inventions (H0), (H00), and (H1) have been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the light emitting region. do.

(H0) Irradiation means for irradiating light and
When the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the first light emitting region, the control means for controlling the mode of the light emitted from the irradiation means to the first aspect capable of emitting the first light emitting region. And with
When the light emitted from the irradiation means emits light in the second light emitting region, the control means has a second aspect in which the light emitted from the irradiation means can emit light in the second light emitting region. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled to.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (H0), whether the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the first light emitting region or the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the second light emitting region. Since it can be dealt with by controlling the mode of the light emitted from the irradiation means, the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(H00) A decorative member arranged on the front side of the main body of the gaming machine and
In a gaming machine provided with an irradiation means for irradiating light toward the back surface side of the decorative member.
The gaming machine can shift a predetermined region of the decorative member that receives the light emitted from the irradiation means to a different position.
When the predetermined region is located at the first position, the light emitted from the irradiation means executes the first control of emitting the predetermined region located at the first position as the first light emitting region. When the predetermined region is located at the second position, a second control is executed in which the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined region located at the second position as the second light emitting region. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a control means for performing.

The gaming machine according to (H00) includes a decorative member arranged on the front surface side of the gaming machine main body and an irradiation means for irradiating light toward the back surface side of the decorative member. Since the gaming machine can shift a predetermined area of the decorative member that receives the light emitted from the irradiating means to a different position, the gaming machine can be moved to a different position on the front side of the gaming machine according to the change in the position of the predetermined area of the decorative member. The impression can be different. When the predetermined region is located at the first position, the light emitted from the irradiating means executes the first control of emitting the predetermined region located at the first position as the first light emitting region, and the predetermined region becomes When it is located at the second position, it is provided with a control means for executing a second control in which the light emitted from the irradiation means emits a predetermined region located at the second position as the second light emitting region. The light emitting region can be suitably changed by optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the transition of the predetermined region of the member.

(H1) Decorative members arranged on the front side of the main body of the gaming machine,
In a gaming machine provided with an irradiation means for irradiating light toward the back surface side of the decorative member.
The gaming machine can shift a predetermined surface of the decorative member that receives the light emitted from the irradiation means to a different position.
When the predetermined surface is located at the first position, the light emitted from the irradiation means executes the first control of emitting the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region. When the predetermined surface is located at the second position, a second control is executed in which the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a control means for performing.

The gaming machine according to (H1) includes a decorative member arranged on the front surface side of the gaming machine main body and an irradiation means for irradiating light toward the back surface side of the decorative member. Since the gaming machine can shift the predetermined surface of the decorative member that receives the light emitted from the irradiating means to a different position, the front side of the gaming machine responds to the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the decorative member. The impression can be different. When the predetermined surface is located at the first position, the light emitted from the irradiation means executes the first control of emitting the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region, and the predetermined surface becomes When it is located at the second position, it is provided with a control means for executing a second control in which the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region. The light emitting region can be suitably changed by optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the transition of the predetermined surface of the member.

(H2) In the gaming machine according to (H1) above,
The decorative member is a replaceable decorative cover arranged on the front side of the gaming machine main body.
The first light emitting region is provided on the predetermined surface of the decorative cover.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second light emitting region is provided on the predetermined surface of another decorative cover to be replaced with the decorative cover.

According to the gaming machine described in (H2), the light emitting region can be suitably changed even when the decorative cover arranged on the front side of the gaming machine main body is replaced with another decorative cover.

(H3) In the gaming machine according to (H1) or (H2) above.
The irradiation means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a light emitting substrate mounted on a front surface portion constituting the front surface of the gaming machine main body.

According to the gaming machine described in (H3), when the decorative cover arranged on the front surface constituting the front surface of the gaming machine main body is replaced with another decorative cover, the light emitting substrate is not on the decorative cover side but on the front surface. Even when it is provided on the part side, the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(H4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (H1) to (H3) above.
In the first control, the light emitted from the irradiation means is set to the irradiation angle of the light emitted from the irradiation means with respect to the first light emitting region, or the first irradiation angle is set. The irradiation area of the light emitted from the irradiation means to the region is set as the first irradiation area, or a predetermined point (for example, the center point) of the first light emitting region and a predetermined point (for example, the center point) of the irradiation means. ) Is set as the first irradiation distance, or at least one of them is included.
The second control is a second irradiation angle different from the first irradiation angle, a second irradiation area different from the first irradiation area, or the first irradiation distance. Is a gaming machine characterized in that it has a different second irradiation distance, or includes at least one of them.

According to the gaming machine described in (H4), the light emitting region can be suitably changed by changing at least one of the irradiation angle, the irradiation area, and the irradiation distance.

(H5) In the gaming machines described in (H2) to (H4) above,
The separate decorative cover is a gaming machine characterized in that the second light emitting region changes according to its shape.

According to the gaming machine described in (H5), the light emitting region can be suitably changed even when the shape of the separate decorative cover is changed from the shape of the decorative cover before the change.

(H6) In the gaming machines described in (H2) to (H5) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative cover and the separate decorative cover can be replaced without using a tool.

According to the gaming machine described in (H6), the replacement work for appropriately changing the light emitting region can also be easily performed.

(H7) In the gaming machines described in (H1) to (H6) above,
The irradiation means is a gaming machine capable of at least one of rotation, rotation, tilting, bending, bending, expansion and contraction, and movement including a front-back direction and a left-right direction.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (H7), whether the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the first light emitting region or the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the second light emitting region. The irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by rotating, rotating, and tilting. In addition, the irradiation area can be easily adjusted by bending it if it has a structure that can be bent with a hinge or the like, bending it if it is a flexible substrate, or expanding or contracting it if it has a structure that can be expanded or contracted by a slide mechanism or the like. can do. The irradiation distance may be easily adjusted by moving in the front-back direction and the left-right direction.

(H8) In the gaming machines described in (H1) to (H7) above,
A translucent means for transmitting light emitted from the irradiation means to the first light emitting region or the second light emitting region is provided.
The translucent means is a gaming machine capable of at least one of rotation, rotation, tilting, bending, bending, expansion and contraction, and movement including a front-back direction and a left-right direction.

According to the gaming machine described in (H8), not only the irradiation means can be tilted but also the light transmitting means can be tilted, as in (H7), the irradiation angle, irradiation area, and so on. At least one of the irradiation distances can be easily adjusted.

(H9) In the gaming machine according to (H2) above,
The control means is characterized in that, in the process of replacing the decorative cover with another decorative cover, the irradiation means changes from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed. A game machine to play.

According to the gaming machine described in (H9), the light emitting region can be suitably changed in the process of replacing the decorative cover with another decorative cover.

(H10) In the gaming machine according to (H9) above,
The control means is an input means for inputting a force generated in the process of exchanging the decorative cover for the other decorative cover, and a state in which the irradiation means can execute the first control based on the input force. A gaming machine including an output means for changing the second control into a state in which it can be executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (H10), the light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of exchanging the decorative cover with the other decorative cover.

(H11) In the gaming machine according to (H10) above,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the input means is a means for pushing the irradiation means into the separate decorative cover in the process of replacing the decorative cover with the separate decorative cover.

According to the gaming machine according to (H11), the light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force of the separate decorative cover pushing the irradiation means in the process of replacing the decorative cover with the separate decorative cover.

(H12) In the gaming machine according to (H10) or (H11),
The output means irradiates the irradiation means by rotating, rotating, tilting, bending, bending, expanding and contracting, and moving the irradiation means including the front-back direction and the left-right direction based on the input force. A gaming machine characterized in that the means is changed from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (H12), at least one of the irradiation angle, the irradiation area, and the irradiation distance can be easily made by utilizing the force input in the process of attaching another decorative cover to the front portion instead of the decorative cover. Can be adjusted to.

The configurations described in (H2) to (H12) may be provided in the gaming machines described in (H0) and (H00) described above or (I1) and (J1) described later.

<9th task>
Conventionally, there are pachinko machines and slot machines as typical examples of game machines. Some gaming machines of this type include, for example, decorative parts having a light emitting region. (For example, refer to Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-100905 (pages 4 to 8, FIGS. 3 to 8)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, there is a problem that it is difficult to appropriately change the light emitting region.
The following invention (I1) has been made in view of such circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing a light emitting region.

(I1) Decorative members arranged on the front side of the main body of the gaming machine,
In a gaming machine provided with an irradiation means for irradiating the decorative member with light.
A driving means capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the decorative member to be emitted by the light emitted from the irradiating means to a first position and a second position.
When the predetermined surface is transferred to the first position by the driving means, the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region. When the control of 1 is executed and the predetermined surface is transferred to the second position by the driving means, the light emitted from the irradiation means second the predetermined surface located at the second position. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a control means for executing a second control for emitting light as a light emitting region of the above.

The gaming machine according to (I1) includes a decorative member arranged on the front surface side of the gaming machine main body and an irradiation means for irradiating the decorative member with light. Since the gaming machine includes a driving means capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the decorative member to be emitted by the light emitted from the irradiating means to the first position and the second position, the light emitting portion of the decorative member is provided. It is not uniform, and it is easy to change the light emitting part of the decorative member. When the predetermined surface is transferred to the first position by the driving means, the gaming machine emits the light emitted from the irradiation means with the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region. When the control is executed and the predetermined surface is transferred to the second position by the driving means, the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region. Since the control means for executing the control of the above is provided, the transition of the light emitting portion is facilitated, and the light emitting region can be suitably changed by optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the light emitting portion.

(I2) In the gaming machine according to (I1) above,
The game machine main body is a pachinko machine main body,
The main body of the pachinko machine
The outer frame forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine body and
An inner frame that is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame with one side portion of the outer frame as an opening / closing shaft.
A front frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame with one side of the inner frame as an opening / closing shaft is provided.
The inner frame includes a resin base that forms the outer shape thereof, and a game board that has a game area in which a game ball attached to the resin base flows down.
The game board visually recognizes the symbol display device having a display screen for displaying the display effect during the variable display of the symbol and the display effect during the specific game state that occurs when the variable display of the symbol has a specific result, and the display screen. With an opening that allows
The front frame includes a transparent member frame portion that surrounds the game area and the transparent member that makes the display screen visible.
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is visible from the front side of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body.

According to the gaming machine described in (I2) above, the decorative member is visible from the front side of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body, so that the light emitting portion on the front side of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body is visible. The light emitting region can be suitably changed by facilitating the transition and optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the light emitting portion.

(I3) In the gaming machine according to (I2) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is attached to the transparent member frame portion of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body.

According to the gaming machine described in (I3), since the decorative member is attached to the visual recognition member frame of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body, the transition of the light emitting portion in the visual recognition member frame of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body can be changed. By simplifying the process and optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the transition of the light emitting portion in the visual recognition member frame, the light emitting region in the visual recognition member frame can be suitably changed.

(I4) In the gaming machine according to (I2) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is attached behind the transparent member of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body and is visible through the transparent member.

According to the gaming machine described in (I4), the decorative member is attached behind the transparent member of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body and is visible through the transparent member. By facilitating the transition of the light emitting part behind the transparent member of the pachinko machine body and optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the transition of the light emitting part behind the transparent member, the light emitting region behind the transparent member can be made. It can be changed suitably.

(I5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I2) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is arranged on any one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side in the gaming area of the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine described in (I5), the light emitting region can be suitably changed at any of the upper, lower, left, and right positions in the gaming area of the gaming board.

(I6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I2) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is arranged on any one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side in the opening of the game board.

According to the gaming machine described in (I6), the light emitting region can be suitably changed at any of the upper, lower, left, and right positions in the opening of the gaming board.

(I7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I6) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that the irradiation means includes a light emitting substrate and a posture changing means for changing the posture of the light emitting substrate with respect to the predetermined surface of the decorative member.

According to the gaming machine according to (I7), the irradiation means includes a light emitting substrate and a posture changing means for changing the posture of the light emitting substrate with respect to the predetermined surface of the decorative member. The light emitting region can be preferably changed.

(I8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I7).
The first control is to set the irradiation angle of the light emitted from the irradiation means to the first light emitting region to be the first irradiation angle, or to irradiate the first light emitting region with the light emitted from the irradiation means. The irradiation area of the light emitted from the means is set as the first irradiation area, or the irradiation distance between the predetermined point (for example, the center point) of the first light emitting region and the predetermined point (for example, the center point) of the irradiation means is set. Including at least one of the first irradiation distances,
The second control is a second irradiation angle different from the first irradiation angle, a second irradiation area different from the first irradiation area, or a second irradiation distance different from the first irradiation distance. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes at least one of the irradiation distances of.

According to the gaming machine according to (I8), the light emitting region can be suitably changed by changing at least one of the irradiation angle, the irradiation area, and the irradiation distance in the configuration in which the decorative member operates.

(I9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I8) above.
Equipped with an operation means to receive the operation of the player
The decorative member is a gaming machine characterized in that it operates in response to an operation of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine described in (I9), even when the decorative member operates in response to the operation of the operating means, the light emitting region can be suitably changed at each position.

(I10) In the gaming machine according to (I9) above,
The decorative member is a gaming machine characterized in that it operates in response to an operation of the operating means during a standby display other than the display of a display effect on the symbol display device.

According to the gaming machine according to (I10), when the machine operates in response to the operation of the operating means during the standby display in the symbol display device, the light emitting region is suitably changed at each position according to the operation. be able to.

(I11) In the gaming machine according to (I9) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member operates in response to an operation of the operating means while displaying a display effect on the symbol display device.

According to the gaming machine described in (I11), even when the decorative member operates during the display of the display effect on the symbol display device, the light emitting region can be suitably changed at each position according to the operation.

(I12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I11).
The irradiating means is a gaming machine capable of rotating, rotating, tilting, bending, bending, expanding and contracting, and moving including a front-back direction and a left-right direction according to the operation of the decorative member.

(I13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I12) above.
The control means controls the irradiation means from a state in which the first control can be executed in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position. A gaming machine characterized by changing to a state in which it can execute.

According to the gaming machine according to (I13), the light emitting region can be suitably changed in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position.

(I14) In the gaming machine according to (I13),
The control means receives an input means for inputting a force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position, and the irradiation means based on the input force. A gaming machine comprising an output means for changing from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed.

According to the gaming machine according to (I14), the light emitting region is suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position. be able to.

(I15) In the gaming machine according to (I14),
The input means rotates, rotates, tilts, bends, bends, expands and contracts with respect to the irradiation means in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a means for giving a force for at least one of movements including a front-back direction and a left-right direction.

According to the gaming machine according to (I15), the light emitting region is suitably changed by utilizing the force applied to the irradiation means in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position. be able to.

(I16) In the gaming machine according to (I14) or (I15),
The output means causes the irradiation means to rotate, rotate, tilt, bend, bend, expand and contract, and move at least in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction based on the input force. The gaming machine is characterized in that it changes from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed.

According to the gaming machine according to (I16), the irradiation angle, the irradiation area, and the irradiation distance are determined by utilizing the force input in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position. At least one can be easily adjusted.

The configurations described in (I2) to (I16) may be provided in the gaming machines described in (H0), (H00), (H1) described above or (J1) described later.

<10th task>
Conventionally, there are pachinko machines and slot machines as typical examples of game machines. Some gaming machines of this type include, for example, decorative parts having a light emitting region. (For example, refer to Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-100905 (pages 4 to 8, FIGS. 3 to 8)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, there is a problem that it is difficult to appropriately change the light emitting region.
The following invention (J1) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the light emitting region.

(J1) Decorative members arranged on the front side of the main body of the gaming machine,
In a gaming machine provided with an irradiation means for irradiating the decorative member with light.
The gaming machine can shift a predetermined surface of the decorative member that receives the light emitted from the irradiation means to a first position and a second position.
A detection means capable of detecting the transition of the predetermined surface of the decorative member, and
When it is detected that the predetermined surface has been transferred to the first position, the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region. When the predetermined surface is transferred to the second position, the light emitted from the irradiation means emits light with the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a control means for executing a second control to be performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (J1), a decorative member arranged on the front surface side of the gaming machine main body and an irradiation means for irradiating the decorative member with light are provided. Since the gaming machine can shift the predetermined surface of the decorative member to be emitted by the light emitted from the irradiating means to the first position and the second position, the position of the predetermined surface of the decorative member is changed. The impression on the front side of the gaming machine can be changed according to the situation. Since the gaming machine includes a detecting means capable of detecting the transition of the predetermined surface of the decorative member, the transition of the predetermined surface of the decorative member can be recognized. When it is detected that the predetermined surface has changed to the first position, the gaming machine emits the light emitted from the irradiation means with the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region. When the control is executed and the predetermined surface is transferred to the second position, the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region. Since the control means to be executed is provided, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by recognizing the transition of the predetermined surface of the decorative member and optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the predetermined surface.

The "detecting means" includes both non-contact type and contact type.

(J2) In the gaming machine described in (J1) above,
The control means is an input means for inputting a force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position, and the decorative member based on the input force. A contact-type detecting means capable of detecting that the predetermined surface has changed from the first position to the second position, and detecting that the predetermined surface has changed from the first position to the second position. A gaming machine, characterized in that the irradiation means is provided with an output means that changes from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (J2), the light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position. ..

(J3) In the gaming machine described in (J2) above,
The input means is a means for pushing the contact-type detecting means by accepting a force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position. Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (J3), the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position is received and the force for pushing the contact type detecting means is used. The light emitting region can be preferably changed.

(J4) In the gaming machines described in (J1) to (J3) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is a transparent resin member and is configured so that the control means is difficult to see.

According to the gaming machine described in (J4), the decorative member is a transparent resin member, but the control means is configured so as to be difficult to see, so that the control means can be made inconspicuous. ..

(J5) In the gaming machines described in (J1) to (J4) above,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means is arranged so as not to overlap the front surface of the light emitting portion mounting surface of the irradiation means.

In the gaming machine according to (J5), since the control means is arranged so as not to overlap the front surface of the light emitting portion mounting surface of the irradiation means, the light emitting region can be preferably set without blocking the light emitting portion mounting surface. Can be changed.

(J6) In the gaming machine described in (J5) above,
The input means is provided on either the left or right side surface side of the irradiation means when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is transferred upward or downward when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (J6), the input means is placed on either the left or right side surface side of the irradiating means when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is transferred upward or downward in the front view of the gaming machine. Since it is provided, it is difficult to block the light emitting region that is transferred in the vertical direction, and the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(J7) In the gaming machine described in (J5) above,
The input means is provided on either the upper or lower side surface side of the irradiation means when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is transferred to the left or right in the front view of the gaming machine. Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (J7), the input means is placed on either the upper or lower side surface side of the irradiating means when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is shifted to the left or right in the front view of the gaming machine. Since it is provided, it is difficult to block the light emitting region that is transferred in the left-right direction, and the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(J8) In the gaming machine described in (J5) above,
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is provided on the back side of the irradiation means.

According to the gaming machine described in (J8), since the control means is provided on the back side of the irradiation means, a sufficient light emitting area is secured on the front side of the control means without blocking the transferred light emitting area. In this state, the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(J9) In the gaming machine described in (J8) above,
The input means is the back side of the irradiation means when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is transferred in the upward oblique direction or the downward oblique direction in the front view of the gaming machine, and the predetermined surface is in the upward oblique direction or A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided at a position where the force generated in the process of shifting in the downward diagonal direction can be input.

According to the gaming machine described in (J9), the input means is the back side of the irradiation means when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is transferred in the upward oblique direction or the downward oblique direction in the front view of the gaming machine. Since the predetermined surface is provided at a position where the force generated in the process of shifting in the upward oblique direction or the downward oblique direction can be input, it does not interfere with the transition of the decorative member and emits light without obstructing the light emitting region to be transferred. The region can be suitably changed.

The configuration described in (J2) to (J9) may be provided in the gaming machine described in (H0), (H00), (H1) or (I1) described above.

The pachinko machine of the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 4 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10, and is a view showing a state in which the illumination cover is attached in the AA cross section of FIG. FIG. 5 is a left side view of the pachinko machine 10, and is a view showing a state in which the illumination cover is attached in a BB cross section of FIG. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. 9A and 9B are explanatory views in which FIG. 9A shows the display contents of the third symbol display device 42, and FIG. 9B shows a hold display.

In the following embodiments, unless otherwise specified, the directions of up / down / left / right and front / back (or back / front) will be described with reference to a state in which the game board is viewed from the front, that is, a front view of the game board.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and is fixed to a game island of a game hall (hall), and one side portion of the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11 with (for example, the left side portion in the front view) as the opening / closing shaft J1, and one side portion (for example, the left side portion in the front view) of the inner frame 12 is the opening / closing shaft J2. A front frame set 14 that can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 is provided.

The outer frame 11 is formed of a wooden plate material in a rectangular shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and each plate material is assembled by a detachable fastener such as a machine screw. In the present embodiment, for example, the outer dimension of the outer frame 11 in the vertical direction is 809 mm (inner dimension 771 mm), and the outer dimension in the left-right direction is 518 mm (inner dimension 480 mm). The outer frame 11 may be made of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

The inner frame 12 is roughly classified into a resin base 12a (see FIG. 2) as a main member forming the outer shape thereof and a game board 30 (see FIG. 7) attached to the resin base 12a. Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the inner frame 12 includes a front frame set 14 that can be opened on one side on the front side of the resin base 12a.

Specifically, the resin base 12a has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening having a substantially central portion as the center of the opening (the same size as the game area 30a (see FIG. 7) described later). It is a plate-shaped member with an opening).

The front frame set 14 is attached to the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable with the vertical opening / closing shaft J2 as the axis on the left side of the front view. Specifically, the front frame set 14 is rotatable forward with the left side as the opening / closing base end side and the right side as the opening / closing tip side in front view.

The game board 30 (see FIG. 7) is detachably attached from the back side of the resin base 12a so that the game area 30a is located at the opening of the resin base 12a.

Here, the front frame set 14 will be described in a little more detail.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 is attached to the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. It is said that it can be opened to the front side with the heart in mind.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a lower plate portion 13 located at the lowermost portion, an upper plate portion 21 located above the lower plate portion 13, and the upper plate portion when viewed from the front. It is roughly classified into a glass frame portion 23 located above the 21.

The front frame set 14 is configured by attaching the lower plate portion 13, the upper plate portion 21, and the glass frame portion 23 to each of the front side portions of the base plate body 14a, which is a resin molded part of the front frame set 14. ing.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lower plate portion 13 is a component in which a component forming the lower plate 15 and a component surrounding the component are integrated, and is located at the lowermost portion of the front frame set 14. , Screws and other fasteners fix the base plate 14a to the lowermost portion in front view. The lower plate portion 13 is provided with a lower plate 15 and a ball pulling lever 17 on the front surface side thereof.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided from the left end to "2/3" when the width of the front frame set 14 is substantially divided into three equal parts, and is provided as a discharge port. The game balls discharged from 16 can be stored in the lower plate 15. The ball pulling lever 17 is for pulling out (discharging) the game ball in the lower plate 15, and by moving the ball pulling lever 17 to the left side in FIG. 1, a predetermined position on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15 ( For example, a substantially central portion) is opened, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 15 can be pulled out downward through the opening portion on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15.

The game ball launch handle 18 is arranged so as to project to the right side of the lower plate 15 and to the front side. In response to the operation of the game ball launching handle 18 by the player, the game ball is driven toward the game board 30 (see FIG. 7) by the launching device 229 (see FIGS. 3 and 8).

As shown in FIG. 1, the sound output units 24 are provided at two upper left and right positions in the front view of the front frame set 14, and output sound from speakers provided inside or at the back of the front frame set 14. It is formed by a plurality of output ports for this purpose. Only a part of this output port is shown in FIG. 1, and the whole drawing is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the upper plate portion 21 is a component in which a component forming the upper plate 19 and a component surrounding the component are integrated, and is a lower portion of the front frame set 14 (the lower plate 15 described above). It is fixed to the lower part of the base plate 14a in front view by a fastener such as a screw so as to be located at the upper position of the base plate 14a, and is provided with an upper plate 19 as a saucer for a game ball. Here, the upper plate 19 is a ball tray for temporarily storing the game balls and guiding them toward the launching device 229 while arranging them in a row.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper plate portion 21 is provided with various operation buttons operated by the player on the upper surface portion thereof. As these operation buttons, a frame button 80 composed of a plurality of push buttons is provided at a position close to the ball storage space of the upper plate 19 on the upper surface portion of the upper plate portion 21. The frame button 80 includes a decision button 81, a left selection button 82 arranged on both the left and right sides of the decision button 81, and a right selection button 83. In addition to the push button type, for example, a lever type, a touch sensor type, or the like may be used.

As shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame portion 23 includes a window portion 101 formed on the upper side of the upper plate portion 21, and various illuminated portions provided around the window portion 101.

That is, as shown in FIG. 1, most of the game area 30a (see FIG. 7) of the game board 30 is externally attached to the front frame set 14 at the central portion of the glass frame portion 23 located above the upper plate portion 21. A window portion 101 having a substantially vertically elongated elliptical shape is formed so that it can be visually recognized from the window. Specifically, the window portion 101 has a substantially vertically elongated elliptical shape and a hollow center (opening 101a), and a glass unit (not shown) is not shown so that the opening 101a is covered with a glass plate 137 having a substantially vertically elongated elliptical shape or the like. Is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 140 has a double glass structure in which two glass plates 137 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. The substantially central portion of the window portion 101 may be linear, and the glass plate 137 may also be adapted to the shape. Further, the glass plate 137 is not limited to glass, and any material thereof may be used as long as it is a transparent plate having a predetermined strength.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame portion 23 has various illuminated portions 300 (first illuminated portion 301, second illuminated portion 302, and third illuminated portion 303) around the window portion 101. I have. That is, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a first illuminated portion 301 (left illuminated portion) with a built-in LED or the like at a left portion around the window portion 101 when viewed from the front. The second illuminated portion 302 (right illuminated portion) having an LED or the like built in the right portion around the window portion 101, and the third illuminated portion 303 having an LED or the like built in the upper portion around the window portion 101. (Upper illumination part) is provided. These illuminated parts play a role of enhancing the effect during the game by controlling the change of the light emitting mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first illumination unit 301, the second illumination unit 302, and the third illumination unit 303 function as jackpot lamps, and by lighting or blinking at the time of jackpot, the jackpot is being hit. Notify. In addition, the first illumination unit 301 and the second illumination unit 302 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided with a prize ball lamp 105 that lights up while paying out the prize ball, and an error indicator lamp 106 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs. ing.

Further, a small window 107 made of transparent resin is provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 101 at a position diagonally lower to the right so that a part of the inner frame 12 surface, the game board 30 surface, and the like can be visually recognized. Since the predetermined portion of the small window 107 is flat, a certificate stamp or the like attached to the lower right corner of the game board 30 can be suitably read by a machine from the flat portion of the small window 107.

Further, a ball lending operation unit 120 is arranged at the lower right of the window portion 101, and the ball lending operation unit 120 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. When the ball lending operation unit 120 is operated with bills, cards (for example, prepaid cards), etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending operation unit 120 responds to the operation. Game balls are rented. The ball lending button 121 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 19 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. The ball lending operation unit 120 may be further provided with a frequency display unit (not shown). This frequency display unit (not shown) displays the balance information of the card or the like. A pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which a game ball is directly lent to an upper plate from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, eliminates the need for the ball lending operation unit 120. Therefore, a decorative sticker or the like is attached to the installation portion of the ball rental operation unit 120. As a result, it is possible to standardize the ball lending operation unit between the pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 30 is provided with a game board 30b which is made of square wooden (for example, plywood) in a front view and has a shape in which both corners on the left side are removed, and a peripheral portion thereof (described later). The outer portions of the rails 51 and 52) are attached in contact with the back side of the resin base 12a of the inner frame 12. The game area 30a, which is a substantially central portion on the front side of the game board 30, is formed on the front surface of the base plate body (not shown) of the front frame set 14 through the glass plate 137 of the window portion 101 shown in FIG. It is visible from the front outside of the frame set 14.

Further, the game board 30 includes a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1, a starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, a starting opening 34 for ordinary symbols, and a variable display device unit 35. There is. These are arranged in each through hole formed by router processing in the game board 30, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like.

The start winning device 33a for the special figure 1 is a so-called navel type start opening (start chucker) that does not have an electric accessory that opens and closes the entrance for the game ball. The start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is a so-called electric chew type start opening (start chucker) having an electric accessory that opens and closes the entrance for the game ball. The normal symbol start port 34 is a start port (through chucker) that opens the electric accessory of the special figure 2 start winning device 33b a predetermined number of times due to the game ball passing through the gate (through gate). The variable winning device 32 is a winning device having an electric accessory (door member) that opens and closes the large winning opening based on the lottery results of the special drawing 1 starting winning device 33a and the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b. The opening and closing of the electric accessory is not limited to the rotating type shown in the figure, and may be a type that linearly advances and retreats back and forth or left and right.

The start winning device 33a for special figure 1 inserts a game ball that has flowed down the left game area 30al provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 35 and has dropped from directly above by rolling the stage portion 47B. It is a ball-capable starting port. Above the start winning device 33a for the special figure 1, a stage portion 47B is provided to swing (reciprocate) the game ball flowing down the left game area 30al in the horizontal direction. A game ball or the like that has fallen from a position directly above the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 of the stage portion 47B enters the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1.

The start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is a start port provided at a position where a game ball can enter in the right game area 30ar provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 35. A start port (through gate) 34 for a normal symbol is provided above the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2. When the result of the lottery of the normal symbol based on the detection of passing through the start port 34 for the normal symbol is a win, the electric accessory of the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 is released, and the game ball can be entered. ing.

The right game area 30ar may be configured to allow some of the game balls launched in the right game area 30ar to pass through the normal symbol start port 34, or may be launched in the right game area 30ar. It may be configured so that all the game balls that have been played are passed through the starting port 34 for a normal symbol.

The variable winning device 32 is provided on the diagonally lower left side of the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, and only a game ball flowing down the right game area 30ar can be entered. That is, the game ball launched by the right-handed operation can enter the variable winning device 32 if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state.

The general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1, the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, and the starting opening 34 for ordinary symbols are not shown to detect the entry or passage of a game ball, respectively. The detection switch is provided, and the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a, the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b, and the normal symbol starting port 34 is individually detected by each detection switch.

Further, a ball entering the general winning opening 31, the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1, and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is detected by a detection switch (a winning opening switch (not shown)), and the variable winning device 32 is entered. Each ball is detected by a detection switch (count switch (not shown)), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (or lower plate 15) based on the output of the detection switch.

For example, in the case of entering the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, three prize balls are paid out. Further, in the case of entering the general winning opening 31 and the variable winning device 32, 10 prize balls are paid out. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary and may be various.

The game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 34, and the passage is detected by the detection switch (passage detection switch (not shown)), but even if the ball enters the normal symbol start port 34, the game ball Is not paid out.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and a game ball that has not entered various winning devices or the like is passed through the out port 36 to a ball discharge path (not shown). You will be guided to the direction. A large number of nails 39 are planted on the game board 30 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball. In addition to this, various members (accessories) such as a wind turbine may be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 7, the variable display device unit 35 is triggered by winning a prize in the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for special figure 2, and the first symbol (for example, a special symbol) as identification information. The first symbol display device 40 for variable display, the second symbol display device 41 for variable display of the second symbol (for example, normal symbol) triggered by the passage of the normal symbol start port 34, and the special symbol 1 start prize. It is provided with a third symbol display device 42 that variablely displays a third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol) by using the device 33a and the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 as a trigger. The third symbol display device 42 may be, for example, a display device dedicated to a display effect, or a light-transmitting resin plate such as an acrylic panel capable of displaying an image provided in place of the glass plate 137 or together with the glass plate 137.

As shown in FIG. 7, the first symbol display device 40 is, for example, a first segment display which is a segment display (for example, a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point) in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. The part 40a is provided. The first segment display unit 40a emits variable light or the like based on the ball entering the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the first symbol display device 40 includes a hold lamp 40c indicating the number of hold of variable display on the first segment display unit 40a. The hold lamp 40c is also configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, the third symbol display device 42 has the first to fourth hold displays H1 to H4 corresponding to the four hold lamps 40c and the fluctuation pattern currently being executed. The hold display TH corresponding to the above is provided. In FIG. 9A, when the number of holds is 4, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold display TH is started, and when the number of holds is 4, the symbol change display corresponding to the hold display TH is confirmed to be out of alignment. Indicates the time, or when the number of reservations is 4, when the decorative symbol (third symbol) composed of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold display TH is displayed in a variable manner. The first to fourth hold displays H1 to H4 and the hold display TH are displayed in colors according to the high possibility of becoming a big hit.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9B, if the jackpots are shown in order from the one with the lowest possibility of hitting the jackpot, the possibility of hitting the jackpot increases in the order of white, blue, red, and rainbow. The white hold does not suggest that the variation pattern corresponding to the hold is likely to be a jackpot combination, or suggests that it is unlikely to be a jackpot combination. A blue hold is more likely to be a jackpot for the variation pattern corresponding to the hold than a white hold, but it is more likely to be a jackpot than a variation pattern corresponding to a red hold. It suggests that it is relatively low. The red color suggests that the variation pattern corresponding to the hold is higher than the variation pattern corresponding to the blue hold. The iridescent hold is most likely to be a jackpot, suggesting that the variation pattern corresponding to that hold has been established to be a jackpot combination. Note that FIG. 9A shows that the first to fourth hold indications H1 to H4 and the hold indication TH are white.

The first segment display unit 40a changes the light emission of each segment light emitting unit at random or in order based on the ball entering the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, so that the first segment display unit 40a emits light. A fluctuation display state of the symbol (in this embodiment, a light emission fluctuation mode of each segment light emitting unit) is generated, and when the light emission fluctuation is stopped, whether it is a big hit or a miss is displayed according to the light emission display mode. In addition to whether it is a big hit or a miss, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit may be displayed. For example, displaying the first symbol (for example, numbers and letters) by light emission means the first jackpot, and displaying the second symbol (for example, numbers and letters) by emitting light means the second big hit, and the third symbol (for example, numbers). When a light emission display of (or letters, etc.) is displayed, it means a third big hit, and when a fourth symbol (for example, a number or a character) is light emission display, it means a miss. Since the light emitting display by the first segment display unit 40a does not know what a general player means even if he / she sees it, whether the player sees it alone is a big hit or a miss. The display is such that it is unknown (or difficult to understand) whether it is a type of jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot round based on the jackpot of a specific type is completed, the game ball is in a support state for supporting the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 so as to be easily won. During the support state, the player strikes right in order to make the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 win the game ball. When the right-handed game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 34, the winning / losing lottery by the second symbol and the result display are performed within an extremely short time. When the result of the lottery by the second symbol is a hit, the electric accessory of the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is opened for a predetermined time. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start opening 34 is likely to enter the special figure 2 start winning device 33b during the time saving state or the probability change state.

As the first symbol display device 40, a single or a plurality of LEDs of a type capable of emitting light of at least two colors may be adopted. Specifically, for example, when two LEDs capable of emitting light in red and blue are adopted as the first symbol display device 40, the first pattern display device 40 is changed by alternately changing the emission color of each LED. A variable display state of the design (emission color mode of each LED) is generated. For example, when both LEDs stop in the red light emitting state, the first jackpot is shown, and one LED stops in the red light emitting state and the other LED stops. When it is turned off, it indicates a second jackpot, when both LEDs stop in a blue light emitting state, it indicates a third jackpot, and when both LEDs stop in a different color emitting state, it indicates a disconnection. Further, at least one of the first segment display unit 40a and the holding lamp 40c constituting the first symbol display device 40 is a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In particular, it may be configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42. The pattern displayed on the first symbol display device 40 includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types. A configuration in which colors are displayed can be considered.

The second symbol display device 41 has, for example, a "○" display unit 41a for the second symbol, a display unit 41b on which, for example, "x" is drawn for the second symbol, and a holding lamp 41c. Every time the game ball passes through the third start port 34, for example, the display symbols (ordinary symbols) on the display units 41a and 41b fluctuate, and when the variation display stops at a predetermined symbol, the start for special figure 2 on the lower side. The winning device 33b is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time. The number of times the game ball has passed through the third starting port 34 is held up to four times, and the number of times held is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 41c. The display units 41a and 41b have LEDs (light emitting diodes) inside the display units 41a and 41b, and are configured to be variablely displayed by switching the light emission (or lighting of the lamp) of the LEDs. Further, at least one of the second symbol display device 41 and the hold lamp 41c may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device, and in particular. It may be configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42.

In the third symbol display device 42, the variation display and the predetermined display (stop display) of the first symbol are displayed on the first symbol display device 40 based on the winning of the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. ) Is performed, the variation display and the predetermined display (stop display) of the third symbol are performed accordingly. In addition, in the third symbol display device 42, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the special drawing 1 start winning device 33a and the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b, but also the specific game that shifts after the big hit is won. Display effects during the state are performed.

The third symbol display device 42 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 45 described later. On the third symbol display device 42, for example, as shown in FIG. 9, three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R on the left, middle, and right are displayed. Each decorative symbol row L, M, R is composed of a plurality of decorative symbols, and these decorative symbols are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 42 so as to be scrolled for each decorative symbol row L, M, R. NS. In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) includes, for example, a large liquid crystal display having an size of 11 inches. In the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47A is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 42 so as to substantially surround the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 in a front view. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the third symbol display device 42, but other types of image display devices (for example, PDP: plasma display panel, EL: electroluminescence display, organic EL, etc.) May be adopted.

The variable winning device 32 shown in FIG. 7 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize (or may be in a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize). It is operated repeatedly in the closed state of. The period during which the variable winning device 32 is closed after being opened is called a round. In the jackpot state, this round game is repeated a predetermined number of times.

In this way, in the jackpot round game, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly operated in the open state and the normal closed state, and a large number of game balls are entered (winning) in the variable winning device 32, and a large amount of the winning balls are received. Since the prize balls are paid out, the game is in an advantageous state for the player. However, in the jackpot round game, the period in which the variable winning device 32 is in the open state is extremely short, and it may be difficult for the game ball to win even in the open state, but such a jackpot round game is in the support state after the end. Since the transition is made, it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held by the player, which is an advantageous game state for the player.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of game balls input (the number of game balls launched into the game area 30a by the launching device 229) is the number of game ball prize balls paid out (general winning opening 31, variable). The normal game state (game ball consumption state), which is larger than the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game balls into the prize device 32, the start prize device 33a for special figure 1, the start prize device 33b for special figure 2, etc. The number of prize balls paid out is larger than the number of balls inserted, the same number, or the difference is small compared to the normal game state (for example, the jackpot round game state and the subsequent big hit round game state). It is possible to change the state to (support state).

More specifically, when the game ball wins the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, the first symbol display device 40 is matched with the variable display of the first segment display unit 40a. 3 The third symbol of the symbol display device 42 is changed and displayed. The variation display based on the winning of the special figure 2 start winning device 33b is preferentially changed over the variation display based on the winning of the special drawing 1 starting winning device 33a. It is also possible to change in the order of winning the device 33a and the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2. When it is determined that the display of the first segment display unit 40a and the third symbol display device 42 after each change is stopped to be a preset symbol and combination indicating a jackpot, a jackpot round game state can be generated. Become.

The variable winning device 32 is configured so that the large winning opening 32a is in a predetermined open state. Specifically, the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 8 or 16 rounds), with the passage of a predetermined time or a predetermined number of winnings in the open state as one round. .. Further, the number of times the game ball has passed through the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is held up to 4 times, and the number of holdings is held by the holding lamps 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, 40c4 (collectively referred to). In this case, it is called a hold lamp 40c). The hold lamp 40c is turned on in the order of 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, 40c4. The hold lamp 40c may have a configuration in which a hold display or the like is displayed on a part of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, two rails 51 and 52 for guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 229 (see FIG. 3) to the upper part of the game board 30 are attached to the game board 30. The game ball launched by the rotation operation of the game ball launch handle 18 is guided to a predetermined game area 30a through the ball guide passage 49 described later of the two rails 51 and 52. The two rails 51 and 52 are long stainless steel metal strip-shaped members, and are attached to the game board 30 in double inside and outside. The inner rail 51 is formed in a shape excluding a portion of a substantially vertical ellipse from diagonally upper left to diagonally lower right in the front view of the game board 30. The outer rail 52 is formed so that a part (mainly the left side portion) faces the inner rail 51. In such a case, the guide rail is formed by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, and the ball guide passage 49 is formed by a portion (the portion on the left side when facing) in which the respective rails 51 and 52 are parallel to each other at a predetermined interval. .. The ball guide passage 49 is formed in a groove shape having a contact surface with the game board 30, that is, a groove shape in which the front side is open.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 7) of the inner rail 51. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball once guided from the ball guide passage 49 between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 to the upper part of the game board 30 returns to the inside of the ball guide passage 49. Further, in a state where the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12, at a position on the outer rail 52 corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the game ball (upper right portion in FIG. 7: a portion corresponding to the tip end portion of the outer rail 52). Is located where the return rubber 54 is located. Therefore, the game ball launched with a momentum equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is bounced off. Since the outer rail 52 is made of a long stainless steel metal band, the flight of the game ball can be made smoother, that is, the frictional resistance of the game ball can be reduced. As shown in FIG. 7, from the tip of the outer rail 52 (upper right of FIG. 7) to the right tip of the inner rail 51 (lower right of FIG. 7), the gaming area of the first symbol display device 40 The game area 30a is partitioned by locating the wall portion 56 on the 30a side and the wall portion 55 (shown by the broken line in FIG. 7) formed on the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower right corner of the game board 30 is a space for attaching a sticker SL (which may be a plate) such as a certificate stamp (for example, a serial number is written). By attaching a sticker SL such as a certificate stamp to the lower right corner of the game board 30, the game board 30 and the certificate stamp can be unique.

Next, the game area 30a of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the game area 30a is divided into substantially vertically elongated circular shapes by the inner peripheral portions (inner and outer rails) of the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52. In particular, in the present embodiment, the game board 30a is formed. The game area 30a partitioned on the board surface of the game is largely configured.

In the present embodiment, when the game area 30a is viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the area surrounded by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, excluding the area of the guide rail which is a parallel portion of the inner and outer rails 51 and 52. Area. Therefore, since the guide rail portion is not included in the game area 30a, the limit position on the left side of the game area 30a is specified not by the outer rail 52 but by the inner rail 51. Further, the limit position on the right side of the game area 30a is specified by the wall portion 55 (a part of the inner frame 12). Further, the lower limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the inner rail 51. Further, the upper limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the outer rail 52.

Although disclosure of detailed drawings is omitted, game balls are supplied to the launching device 229 one by one from a ball outlet (a ball outlet leading from the most downstream portion of the upper plate 19) of the front frame set 14 (not shown). ..

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, in the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally on the back surface (actually, the back surface of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30), and predetermined control boards are stacked in the front-rear direction (actually, the predetermined control boards are stacked in the front-rear direction). For example, the payout control board 311a of FIG. 8 to be described later is located on the front side in the rear view, and the power supply control board of the power supply device 313 and the launch control board of the launch control device 312 are located on the back side of the payout control board 311a). Further, a game ball supply device (pain mechanism unit 352) for supplying the game balls, a resin protective cover 353, and the like are attached. In the present embodiment, various control boards are separately mounted on a plurality of (three) mounting bases 230 to 232 shown in FIG. 3, and these are used as each control board unit, and each control board unit is individually mounted on the inner frame 12 or It is attached to the back of the game board 30. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the main control device 261 is mounted on the mounting base 230, the sub control device 262 is mounted on the mounting base 232 to be unitized, and the payout control device 311 and the launch control device are respectively. The 312 and the power supply device 313 are mounted on the mounting base 231 to form a unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the payout mechanism unit 352, various parts (tank 355, tank rail 356, case rail 357, payout device 358 and power switch board 382, which will be described later) are reversed L when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The unit is arranged in a U-shape, and the payout mechanism portion 352 and the protective cover 353 are also integrated as one unit. Since the unit is sometimes referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as "back" here. It is called "pack unit 203".

The back pack unit 203 is configured so that it can be attached and detached in units of units without using any tools, and in addition to this, a support shaft portion is provided in a part thereof with respect to the inner frame 12 or the back surface of the game board 30. It has a structure that can be opened and closed. This is also a device for making it possible to easily confirm the hidden configuration or the like even if the back pack unit 203 and other configurations are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

Further, on the back surface of the game board 30, a prize detection mechanism for detecting the passage of a game ball such as various prize openings is provided. Specifically, a winning opening switch (not shown) is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and a count switch (not shown) is provided on the variable winning device 32. The count switch is a switch that counts winning balls. Further, at the positions corresponding to the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, the operation port switch (not shown) for the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device for special drawing 2 are located. An operating port switch (not shown) (not shown) for 33b is provided, and each operating port switch allows the game ball to enter the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. Is detected by. A gate switch is provided at a position corresponding to the normal symbol start port 34, and the gate switch detects the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol start port 34.

The winning opening switch (not shown) of the general winning opening 31 and the gate switch of the starting port 34 for a normal symbol are connected to a board connection board (not shown) through electrical wiring (not shown), and the board connection board is the main control described later. It is connected to the main control board 261a (see FIG. 8) in the device 261. Further, the count switch of the variable winning device 32 is connected to the large winning opening relay terminal board (not shown), and the large winning opening relay terminal board is also connected to the main control board 261a. On the other hand, the operation port switches of the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 are directly connected to the main control board 261a without passing through the relay board.

Although not shown in the illustration, the variable winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid for opening the large winning opening 32a, and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is for opening the electric accessory. A working port solenoid is provided.

The detection results detected by the winning detection mechanism are taken into the main control board 261a in the main control device 261 described later, and the payout command (of the game ball) according to the winning situation each time is taken from the main control board 261a. The number of payouts) is transmitted to the payout control board 311a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the output of the payout control board 311a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control device 261 is mounted on the lower mounting base 230 in the rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and the sub control device 262 is mounted on the upper mounting base 232 in the rear view of the pachinko machine 10. Has been done. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the main control device 261 includes a CPU 501 that controls the main control, a ROM 502 that stores a game program, a RAM 503 that stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, and various devices. Main control including input / output port 505 for communication, random number generator used for various lottery (not shown), clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization (not shown), etc. A substrate 261a is provided, and the main control substrate 261a is housed in a substrate box 263 (encapsulating means) made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing unit 261c, whereby the substrate box 263 is sealed.

Further, the sub control device 262 includes, for example, a CPU 551 that controls voice and lamp display and control of the display control device 45 according to an instruction from the main control board 261a in the main control device 261, and other ROM 552, RAM 552, bus line 554, and the like. A sub-control board 262a including an input / output port 555 and the like is provided, and the sub-control board 262a is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. The power supplied from the power supply board described later is output to the display control device 45 via the sub control device 262.

As shown in FIG. 3, the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are mounted on the mounting base 231. The payout control device 311 includes a CPU that plays a central role in control, and a control board that includes other ROMs, RAMs, various ports, and the like. Further, the launch control device 312 includes a launch control board. Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a power supply control board. The payout control board 311a of the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rented balls. Further, the launch control board of the launch control device 312 controls the launch device 229 (see FIG. 8) according to the operation of the game ball launch handle 18 by the player, and the power supply board of the power supply device 313 controls various control devices and the like. The required predetermined power supply voltage is generated and output. The launching device 229 of this embodiment employs a solenoid-type launching component that strikes a game ball with a launching mallet (not shown) that can move forward and backward according to energization / non-energization of the launching solenoid (not shown). In addition, as other launching devices 229, there are various types such as a mechanical launching component that launches a game ball by hitting it with a launching punch that operates according to the drive of a launching motor, and an electromagnetic launching component that launches a game ball by generating an electromagnetic field. You may adopt the type of. The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit 120 (see FIG. 1) on the front surface of the pachinko machine and a card unit (not shown), and takes in the command of the ball lending operation by the player and delivers it to the payout control device 311. It is output to. The card unit connection board 314 is not required for a cash machine in which a game ball is directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit.

The payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are each housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the payout control device 311, similarly to the main control device 261 described above, the box base and the box cover constituting the substrate box 311b (encapsulating means) are unopenably connected by the sealing unit (sealing means). The board box 311b is sealed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 311c. For example, when the state return switch 311c is pressed when a payout error such as ball clogging in the payout motor section occurs, the payout motor 358a (see FIG. 8) is slowly rotated in the forward direction to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state). ) Is planned.

Further, the power supply monitoring board 261b is provided with a RAM erase switch 323. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored in memory. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and turn on the power. It is decided to put it in.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded protective cover 353 and a game ball payout mechanism portion 352.

The back pack unit 203 is provided with a tank 355 that opens upward at the uppermost portion thereof, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment (game island equipment) of the game hall. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently sloping downward toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. Are concatenated. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out according to a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 358a or the like. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 through a payout passage (not shown) or the like.

Further, the tank rail 356 is provided with a vibrator 360 for adding vibration to the tank rail 356. For example, the vibrator 360 is fastened to and attached to the tank rail 356 with, for example, two screws. Further, the vibrator 360 is not in surface contact with the tank rail 356, but is in contact with the two screw portions, and the vibration by the vibrator 360 is more effectively transmitted to the tank rail 356. Therefore, if a ball clogging occurs in the vicinity of the tank rail 356, the ball clogging is eliminated by driving the vibrator 360.

A payout relay board (not shown) that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed in the payout mechanism unit 352, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. is set up. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

The payout mechanism portion 352 from the tank 355 to the payout passage (not shown) is all molded of a conductive resin material (for example, a conductive polycarbonate resin), and a part thereof is grounded. .. As a result, the generation of noise due to the charging of the game ball is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 3, an inner frame open detection switch 388 for detecting that the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 is provided on the upper right side of the inner frame 12. When the inner frame 12 is opened, it is output from the inner frame open detection switch 388 to the computer in the hall (inside the pachinko shop).

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 261, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub control device 262, a display control device 45, a voice output control device 47, a power supply device 313, and the like. .. Hereinafter, these devices will be described in detail individually.

The main control device 261 of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 is a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. A certain RAM 503 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in.

The RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the RAM 503 temporarily stores various data and the like. It has memory and area.

That is, when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the normal processing to the end, so that the RAM 503 is used when the power is turned off (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter). It is only necessary to store and retain the contents of the counter buffer and the holding ball storage area, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. Specifically, it is not necessary to provide the RAM 503 with a dedicated backup area for storing values such as registers and I / O for game information during normal processing when the power is turned off. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to input a power failure signal S1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 505 includes a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub control device 262, a first symbol display device 40, a second symbol display device 41, and other switches not shown. Etc. are connected. Further, the main control device 261 has a function of controlling the variation display of the first symbol in the first symbol display device 40 and the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device 41.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. , RAM 513 is provided with a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data and the like.

When the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the RAM 513 stores and holds information about the state at the time of power off so that the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. That is, the storage of the RAM 513 is executed when the power is turned off by the steps in the latter half of the NMI interrupt process and the payout control process, and conversely, the restoration of the stored information of the RAM 513 is executed in the power recovery process when the power is turned on. ..

An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 261 and a launch control device 312, a payout motor 358a, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 8, the launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 229, and the launch device 229 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the launch control device 312 includes a card unit connection signal S4 from the payout control device 311 (a signal output when the above-mentioned card unit is connected to the pachinko machine 10) and a player. The touch detection signal S5 output when the game ball launch handle 18 is touched, and the launch stop switch 18a provided on the game ball launch handle 18 for stopping the launch is not operated. The launch permission signal S7 is output to the main control device 261 on condition that all of the launch maintenance signals S6 are input. Further, a volume signal S10 corresponding to the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 18 is input from the game ball launch handle 18 to the launch control device 312, and the launch control device 312 outputs the volume signal S10 to the main control device 261. do.

That is, the period when the launch permission signal S7 is ON (high level) is the launch permission state, and the period when the launch permission signal S7 is OFF (low level) is the launch disapproval state. That is, the main control device 261 sends the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) that controls the launch solenoid (not shown) that launches the game ball to the launch rail during the period when the input launch permission signal S7 is ON. The ball feed control signal S9 (pulse signal) that controls the ball feed solenoid that feeds the game ball is repeatedly output to the launch control device 312 at a predetermined repetition cycle. The amplitude value of the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) is determined by the main control device 261 based on the volume signal S10. For example, the larger the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 18, the more the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal). ) Increases the amplitude value. The launch control device 312 drives and controls the launch device 229 based on the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9, and launches the game ball with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 18. On the contrary, the main control device 261 does not output the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9 to the launch control device 312 during the period when the input launch permission signal S7 is OFF, and the launch device 229 does not output the game ball. Will not be fired.

The display control device 45 controls the variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) in the third symbol display device 42. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a ROM (program ROM) 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, an image controller 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and a bus line 530, 531. And have. The output of the sub controller 262 is connected to the input of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the image controller 526 are connected to the output of the input port 527. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the image controller 526 via a bus line 531 and a third symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output of the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display on the third symbol display device 42 based on various commands transmitted by editing and transmitting various commands from the main control device 261 by the sub control device 262. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 temporarily stores the work data and flags used when the various programs are executed by the CPU 521. Memory for.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the third symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as decorative symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The image controller 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the output port 529 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 from the character ROM 525 at a predetermined timing to read the third data. It is to be displayed on the symbol display device 42.

The voice output control device 46 controls the sound output in the sound output unit 24a. The audio output control device 46 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and executes a process of controlling the output of normal audio and the output of specific sound according to the display effect of the third symbol display device 42. be. Further, as will be described later, the voice output control device 46 controls to adjust the volume through the operation of the left selection button 82 and the right selection button 83. The ROM stores a program for audio output processing and sound data. The audio output unit 24a includes an amplifier and a speaker for outputting audio.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying electric power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10. The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24-volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. Then, these + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+ 12V power source, + 5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311.

As shown in FIG. 8, the main control device 261 includes a main control board 261a and a power supply monitoring board 261b separate from the main control board 261a in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. .. The power supply monitoring board 261b includes a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal S1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of AC 24 volts with the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when the voltage becomes less than 22 volts, for example, when it exceeds 20 milliseconds. , The power failure signal S1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal S1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

In addition, even after the time when the AC 24 volt monitored by the power supply unit 541 becomes less than 22 volts exceeds 20 milliseconds, the power supply unit 541 has a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit for taking in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clearing the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal S2 to the main control board 261a. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (including turning on the power due to the resolution of the power failure), the data of the RAM 503 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 is the main control device. When the initialization command from 261 is received, the data in RAM 513 is cleared.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 9, three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R on the left, middle, and right are set in the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device), and the decorative symbol rows L, Three decorative symbols, an upper decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a lower decorative symbol, are displayed in a variable manner for each of M and R. In the present embodiment, the series of symbols is composed of a main decorative symbol SZ with numbers "0" to "9" and a sub-decorative symbol FZ composed of diamond-shaped symbols. The main decorative symbols SZ are displayed in ascending or descending order, and the sub-decorative symbols FZ are arranged between the main decorative symbols SZ to form a series of decorative symbol rows L, M, and R. Then, the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ are displayed in a variable manner from top to bottom with periodicity.

In such a case, in the left decorative symbol row L, the above series of decorative symbols are displayed in descending order (that is, in the order in which the numbers of the main decorative symbols SZ decrease), and in the middle decorative symbol row M and the right decorative symbol row R, the same applies. The series of decorative symbols are displayed in ascending order (that is, in descending order of the number of the main decorative symbol SZ). Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the left decorative symbol row L → the right decorative symbol row R → the middle decorative symbol row M, and at the time of the stop, the five effective lines on the third symbol display device 42, that is, the upper line L1 and the middle line. If the main decorative symbol SZ is a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main decorative symbols SZ) in any of L2, lower line L3, right-up line L4, and left-up line L5, it is special as a jackpot. The game video is displayed.

The main decorative pattern SZ is composed of a number part SZa on which numbers are drawn and a decorative part SZb on which characters such as people and animals are decoratively drawn. For example, the main decorative symbols SZ "1" arranged in the three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R are the same characters ("2" to "1" in the frame surrounding the number part SZa "1" and "1", respectively. It is composed of a decorative portion SZb on which a character different from 9 ”is drawn. The same applies to the main decorative symbols SZ "2" to "9".

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 uses a random number related to the operation of the accessory and another random number used for the game to draw a lottery for the first symbol display device 40 (big hit lottery: first). (Big hit lottery of symbols) and symbol display settings, lottery of the second symbol display device 41 (winning lottery of the second symbol) and symbol display settings, and decorative symbols (third symbol) of the third symbol display device 42. A lottery related to variable display and its setting will be performed.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a random number related to the operation of the accessory, as shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery of the first symbol display device 40 and the first The jackpot symbol counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol of the symbol display device 40, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the second symbol display device 41 used for the winning lottery. The two symbol random number counter C4 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4 are used.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as other random numbers used for the game, as shown in FIG. 10, in order to roughly specify the type of the variation pattern when selecting the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the third symbol display device 42. The stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop pattern, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 used for selecting the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the third symbol display device 42, and the outlier symbol of the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5 used for selection is used. Each of the above-mentioned counters is composed of a program executed by the CPU 501.

For example, "stop pattern 0" indicates a complete deviation variation pattern group consisting of a plurality of types of complete deviation fluctuation patterns, and "stop pattern 1" indicates a front-back deviation reach variation pattern group consisting of a plurality of types of front-back deviation reach fluctuation patterns. The "stop pattern 2" indicates a group of reach fluctuation patterns other than the front-back deviation, which is composed of a plurality of types of reach fluctuation patterns other than the front-back deviation, and the "stop pattern 3" is composed of a plurality of types of jackpot fluctuation patterns. It shows a group of jackpot fluctuation patterns.

For all of these counters C1 to C5, CINI1 to CINI2, CS1 to CS3, "1" is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated (hereinafter referred to as "update"), and after reaching the maximum value, it becomes "0". It is a return loop counter. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. Further, the RAM 503 is provided with a holding ball storage area including one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area, second holding area, third holding area, fourth holding area). In each of these areas, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game ball to the special figure 1 start winning device 33a and the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b. Each value such as is stored in chronological order. It should be noted that the winning of the game ball in the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is also referred to as the establishment of the starting condition. Each value stored in the execution area is also called a variable display for the executed portion, and each value stored in the reserved ball storage area is also called a variable display for the unexecuted portion.

Specifically, if the start condition is satisfied during the period when neither the executed portion nor the unexecuted portion is stored in the execution area and the reserved ball storage area, the execution portion fluctuation display is displayed in the execution area. Is stored. If the start condition is satisfied during the period when the variation display of the execution amount is stored in the execution area, the unexecuted part is in the order of the first hold area, the second hold area, the third hold area, and the fourth hold area. The variable display of is stored. When the variation display of the execution amount is stored in the execution area, the variation non-execution condition for not executing the variation display of the symbol is satisfied with respect to the variation display of the unexecuted portion stored in the hold ball storage area.

The variable display of the unexecuted portion stored in the first hold area, the second hold area, the third hold area, and the fourth hold area is also called the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold.

Each of the above-mentioned counters will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "599", reach the maximum value (that is, "599"), and then return to "0". In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 25) described later, and is a normal process described later. It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time (see FIG. 19). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 25) described later in this embodiment), and the game ball is a start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and a start winning device for special figure 2. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the 33b is won.

The hit value of the jackpot random number counter C1, that is, the number of random numbers that become jackpots is set to two types, one at low probability and the other at high probability, and the number of random numbers that become jackpot at low probability is two. The value is "150,450", the number of random numbers that are big hits at high probability is 16, and the value is "50 to 57,350 to 357". That is, when the probability is low, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and when the probability is high, the jackpot probability is 16/300. The high-probability time refers to a state in which a jackpot is achieved by a predetermined probability fluctuation symbol and the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value, that is, a so-called "probability change", which is a normal time (low probability time). Refers to the time when it is not in such a probabilistic state. Further, at the time of high probability (probability change state), after the end of the probability change jackpot or the latent probability variation jackpot (after the jackpot 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened for 16 rounds, for example), the next jackpot or a predetermined number of times It will continue until the fluctuation occurs. In this embodiment, the probabilistic state is assumed to be continued until 100 fluctuations are made after the end of the jackpot round.

The jackpot symbol counter C2 is a symbol at the time of a jackpot when the fluctuation of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is stopped (in this embodiment, the final display symbol after the fluctuation display of the first segment display unit 40a). ) Is determined. In this embodiment, the jackpot symbol counter C2 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "99", reach the maximum value (that is, "9"), and then return to "0". There is. The jackpot symbol counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 25) described later) as in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 described above, and the game ball is a start winning device 33a for special figure 1. , It is stored in the holding ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 wins a prize.

A jackpot lottery table using the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot symbol counter C2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11A is a special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, and FIG. 11B is a special figure 2 jackpot lottery table.

As shown in (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "0" to "9", the first symbol is displayed. The first segment display unit 40a of the device 40 stops at the third symbol, and the decorative symbols are aligned with the “7” symbol as described later. Next, when the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "10" to "49", the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is second. It stops at a symbol, and the decorative symbols are aligned with odd symbols other than "7" such as "1", "3", "5", and "9". Further, when the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "50" to "99", the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is the first symbol. Stop at, and align with even-numbered symbols such as "2", "4", "6", and "8". When the jackpot random number counter C1 is off, the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops at the fourth symbol regardless of the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2, indicating that the decorative symbol is off. It will be a combination.

As shown in (b), in the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "0" to "19", the first symbol is displayed. The first segment display unit 40a of the device 40 stops at the third symbol, and the decorative symbols are aligned with the “7” symbol as described later. Next, when the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "20" to "49", the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is second. It stops at a symbol, and the decorative symbols are aligned with odd symbols other than "7" such as "1", "3", "5", and "9". Further, when the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "50" to "99", the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is the third symbol. Stop at, and align with even-numbered symbols such as "2", "4", "6", and "8". When the jackpot random number counter C1 is off, the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops at the fourth symbol regardless of the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2, indicating that the decorative symbol is off. It will be a combination.

The relationship between the jackpot symbol and the hit type will be explained. This relationship is common to the special figure 1 big hit lottery table and the special figure 2 big hit lottery table. If the jackpot symbol is a "7" symbol, the hit type is 16 rounds, which is a 16R probability variation jackpot with a probability variation state. If the jackpot symbol is an odd number symbol of "1", "3", "5", "9", the hit type is 8R probable jackpot with 8 rounds. If the jackpot symbol is an even number symbol of "2", "4", "6", "8", the hit type is divided into 8 rounds, and the 8R normal jackpot without a probability change state is obtained.

The relationship between the hit type and the ending time will be explained. The opening time is the time for performing the opening effect from the start of the jackpot game state to the start of the first round. The opening time is set to 10 seconds, which is common to all hit types. The opening time is the same for the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpot lottery tables.

The relationship between the hit type and the ending time will be explained. The ending time is the time for performing the ending effect from the end of the final round to the start of the next gaming state. In the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, the ending time of the 16R probability variation jackpot is set to 35 seconds, and the ending time of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is set to 25 seconds. In the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table, the ending time of the 16R probability variation jackpot is set to 30 seconds, and the ending time of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is set to 20 seconds. The ending time of the special figure 2 jackpot is set to be 5 seconds shorter than the ending time of the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table. As a result, at the end of the jackpot round based on the winning of the special drawing 1 starting winning device 33a, while showing more information to the player, the continuation is based on the winning of the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b. By shortening the ending production time when two or more big hits occur, the player can feel that the same production can be understood by issuing the same production once, and the same production can be repeated many times. Giving can be reduced.

The relationship between the hit type and the number of games with support status will be explained. The support state means that after the jackpot round game is completed, the result of the lottery of the normal symbol is more likely to be won so that the game ball can be more easily won in the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 than in the normal game state. , It is a state in which the opening time of the electric accessory is lengthened or the number of times of opening is increased. The support state is a game state in which a right-handed strike is performed. In the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, the support states of 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set to 100 times. In the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table, the support state of the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot is set to 100 times, but the support state of the 8R normal jackpot is set to 0 times.

Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "238", reach the maximum value (that is, 238), and then return to "0". In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 causes the decorative symbol to reach on the third symbol display device 42, and then the final stop decorative symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach decorative symbol to stop. Similarly, after the reach occurs, the final stop decorative symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach decorative symbol, and the "reach other than the front and rear detachment" and the "complete detachment" where the reach does not occur are drawn by lottery. For example, C3 = 0 to 201 corresponds to complete deviation, C3 = 202 to 208 corresponds to front and rear deviation reach, and C3 = 209 to 238 corresponds to non-front and rear deviation reach. The content of the lottery (reach lottery) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is whether the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability or a high probability, and the fluctuation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40 is not activated. It may be set individually depending on whether it is in operation or in operation, how many balls are reserved for operation at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol, and the like. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 25) described later), and the game ball wins the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. It is stored in the holding ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the same timing.

Further, among the three variable type counters CS1 to CS3, the variable type counter CS1 is added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 198", reaches the maximum value (that is, "198"), and then becomes "0". The variable type counter CS2 is configured to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "240") by adding 1 in order within the range of "0 to 240", for example. The variable type counter CS3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 162", reach the maximum value (that is, "162"), and then return to "0". In the following description, the variation type counter CS1 will be appropriately referred to as a “first variation type counter”, the variation type counter CS2 may be referred to as a “second variation type counter”, and the variation type counter CS3 may be appropriately referred to as a “third variation type counter”. ..

The first variation type counter CS1 determines a rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols such as the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., and the type of complete deviation. .. Subsequently, one further variation pattern from the variation pattern group thus determined by the first variation type counter CS1 is determined by the second variation type counter CS2.

The variation pattern of the decorative symbol for special figure 1 is determined by using the variation pattern selection table of the main decorative symbol shown in FIG. The same applies to the variation pattern of the decorative pattern for the special figure 2.

That is, when the jackpot symbol counter C2 is any of "0" to "9", the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "30", "31" to "140" or "141" to "141" to " If it is "198", the super reach group (big hit super reach group) is determined. Specifically, when the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "30" and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", the jackpot super reach A (variation time: 30 seconds). Is determined, and if the second variation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", the jackpot super reach B (variation time: 30 seconds) is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "31" to "140" and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", the jackpot super reach C (variation time: 60 seconds) is determined, and the first variation type counter CS2 is determined. 2 If the fluctuation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", the jackpot super reach D (variation time: 60 seconds) is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "141" to "198" and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", the jackpot super reach E (variation time: 120 seconds) is determined, and the first variation type counter CS1 is determined. 2 If the fluctuation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", the jackpot super reach F (variation time: 120 seconds) is determined. The jackpot super reach A and C are determined to notify the jackpot suggestion information suggesting the possibility of winning the jackpot by pressing the decision button 81 within a predetermined validity period as a special effect, and the jackpot super reach E is the jackpot. It is decided to notify the suggestion information and execute the revival effect that is performed when changing from the temporary stop out of reach to the jackpot combination.

If the jackpot symbol counter C2 is any of "10" to "39" or "40" to "89" and the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "65", the normal reach group (big hit normal reach) The group) is determined, and if it is "66" to "132" or "133" to "198", the super reach group (big hit super reach group) is determined. Specifically, when the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "65" and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", the jackpot normal reach A (variation time: 20 seconds) is If the second variation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", the jackpot normal reach B (variation time: 20 seconds) is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "66" to "132" and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", the jackpot super reach A (variation time: 30 seconds) is determined, and the first variation type counter CS1 is determined. 2 If the variable type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", the jackpot super reach B is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "133" to "198" and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "121", the jackpot super reach C (variation time: 60 seconds) is determined, and the first variation type counter CS1 is determined. 2 If the fluctuation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", the jackpot super reach D (variation time: 60 seconds) is determined. The frequency of occurrence is almost the same for jackpot normal reach A, jackpot super reach A and B, and jackpot normal reach C and D. The jackpot normal reach A and the jackpot super reach A and C are determined to notify the jackpot suggestion information using the decision button 81.

Next, if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any one of "0" to "201", the complete deviation is determined, and if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any one of "202" to "208", the front / rear deviation is normal. Either REIT or non-front-rear super reach is determined, and if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any of "209" to "238", either non-front-rear normal reach or non-front-rear super reach is determined. In this way, when the jackpot lottery is missed, it is set so that it is likely to be completely missed.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any of "0" to "201", the detailed fluctuation pattern type is determined as follows. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100", the complete deviation A (variation time: 10 seconds) is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150", the complete deviation B (variation time: 15 seconds) is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "151" to "198", the complete deviation C (variation time: 20 seconds) is determined. In addition, even in the case of complete deviation A, B, C, the jackpot suggestion information using the decision button 81 may be notified. Therefore, it is not possible to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot or a miss, only by the presence or absence of notification of the jackpot suggestion information.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any one of "202" to "208", the detailed fluctuation pattern type is determined as follows. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100", the front-rear deviation normal reach A (variation time: 20 seconds) is determined. Further, when the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150", the front-rear deviation super reach A (variation time: 30 seconds) is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "151" to "170", the front-rear deviation super reach C (variation time: 60 seconds) is determined. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "171" to "198", if the fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0" to "199", the front and rear deviation super reach E and F (variation time: 100 seconds) are determined. Will be done. Similarly to the above, the front-rear normal reach A and the front-rear super reach A and C may or may not notify the jackpot suggestion information. The fluctuation time (100 seconds) of the front-back off Super Reach E and F corresponds to a pattern in which the jackpot Super Reach E and F pretend to have a revival effect and end with a loss result. Therefore, even in the jackpot super reach E and F, it is difficult for the player to discriminate the result of the variable display until the revival effect is performed, except when suggested by the jackpot suggestion information.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any one of "209" to "238", and when the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100", it deviates from the front and rear, and the normal reach A (variation). Time: 20 seconds) is determined, and when the first variation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150", the point that the super reach A (variation time: 30 seconds) is determined is the stop pattern. This is the same as when the selection counter C3 is any one of "202" to "208". When the first variation type counter CS1 is "151" to "198", the super reach C (variation time: 60 seconds) is determined except for the front and rear. The normal reach A, which is out of the front and rear, and the super reach A, C, which is out of the front and back, may also notify the jackpot suggestion information using the enter button 81, as described above.

The variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of the variable type counters CS1 to CS3 are acquired at the time of the start winning process.

The size and range of each of the above-mentioned counters are merely examples and can be arbitrarily changed. However, it is desirable that the jackpot random number counter C1, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 all have different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

Next, an example of the variable display effect of the main decorative symbol SZ will be described. FIG. 13 (a) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot normal reach A and the out-of-order normal reach A, and FIG. 13 (b) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot super reach A and the out-of-order spar reach A.

First, the jackpot normal reach A and the off normal reach A will be described. In the third symbol display device 42, the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed on the front surface of the normal background (that is, the normal screen 43a is displayed). Based on the occurrence of the start winning prize, the variable display of the main decorative symbol SZ is started. This fluctuation display is high-speed fluctuation (that is, the screen 43c during high-speed fluctuation is displayed). During high-speed fluctuations, jackpot suggestion information may be notified. Whether or not to perform the notification may be determined by lottery based on the value of the variable type counter CS2. As for the notification of the jackpot suggestion information, first, an image prompting the pressing of the decision button 81 during high-speed fluctuation is displayed, and by pressing the decision button 81 while displaying this image, an image suggesting the possibility of a jackpot result is obtained. Is displayed. For example, if the image "Chance!" Is displayed, it suggests that there is a high possibility that the result will be a big hit. As a result, when an image prompting the press of the decision button 81 is displayed during high-speed fluctuation, the player presses the decision button 81 in order to know whether or not the jackpot result is likely to occur. After the notification image is erased, the main decorative symbols SZ in the right and left columns are stopped and displayed in the reach combination (that is, the normal reach display screen 43f is displayed), and the combination of either the jackpot or the out-of-reach is confirmed and displayed. (That is, the all symbol stop screen 43e is displayed).

Instead of the image suggesting the possibility of this jackpot result, the movable accessory may be driven by pressing the enter button 81.

Next, the jackpot super reach A and the missed super reach A will be described. Based on the occurrence of the start winning prize, the high-speed fluctuation of the main decorative symbol SZ is started. An image prompting the press of the decision button 81 is displayed during high-speed fluctuation, and an image suggesting the possibility of a big hit result is displayed by pressing the decision button 81. After the main decorative symbol SZ is stopped and displayed in the reach combination, the symbol indicating the reach combination is changed to the development symbol HZ, and the reach development effect is executed (that is, the development reach display screen 43g is displayed). For example, if the player PY in the reach development effect clears the mission, a big hit result is obtained, and if the player PY fails in the mission, the reach is lost. After such an effect, the combination of either the jackpot by the developed symbol HZ or the out-of-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and then confirmed and displayed by the main decorative symbol SZ.

Another example of the variable display effect will be described. FIG. 14 (a) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot normal reach C and the off-normal reach C, and FIG. 14 (b) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot super reach E and the out-of-order super reach E.

First, the jackpot super reach C and the missed super reach C will be described. In Super Reach C, the reach development effect is executed for a longer time than in Super Reach A. For example, in Super Reach C, the confrontation effect between the player PY and the enemy character TK in the reach development effect is displayed. Further, in Super Reach C, as a part of the button suggestion effect, a selection image for performing a predetermined selection and determination using the determination button 81 and the selection button 82 is displayed. Specifically, at the start of the confrontation effect, the character selection effect using the decision button 81 and the selection button 82 is executed. For example, a plurality of selectable player PYs are displayed, a favorite player PY is selected by the selection button 82, and the decision button 81 determines the player PY. For the enemy character TK displayed after selecting the player PY, an appropriate character is determined according to the possibility (expectation degree) of a jackpot result. As a result, the relationship between the player PY and the enemy character TK suggests whether the player PY is likely to win (whether or not it is likely to result in a big hit). When the player PY and the enemy character TK are decided, they attack each other. In the case of a jackpot result, an image that convinces the player PY of victory (an image in which the surroundings of the player PY shine) is displayed. If the result is out of reach, an image that predicts that the player PY will be defeated (an image in which the surroundings of the enemy character TK glows black) is displayed. After such an effect, the combination of either the jackpot by the developed symbol HZ or the out-of-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and then confirmed and displayed by the main decorative symbol SZ.

Instead of an image that the player PY is convinced of victory, a movable accessory may be driven.

Next, the jackpot super reach E and the missed super reach E will be described. In Super Reach E, the reach development effect is executed for a longer time than in Super Reach A. For example, in Super Reach E, a confrontation effect is also displayed in the reach development effect. In the confrontation effect, the character selection effect is executed. If the result is out of reach, an image is displayed that predicts the defeat of the player PY. In the case of a big hit result, an image prompting the player PY to press the enter button 81 is displayed after the image predicting the defeat is displayed. When the enter button 81 is pressed, the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 violently blinks with strong light emission (strong light emission blinking screen 43g-1). After the display screen 42a blinks, an image convincing the player PY's victory is displayed, the jackpot combination by the development symbol HZ is stopped and displayed, and then the main decorative symbol SZ confirms the display.

Instead of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 repeatedly blinking violently with strong light emission, the movable accessory may be driven by pressing the enter button 81.

Next, the ending effect will be described. FIG. 15 is a table for determining an ending effect pattern.

After the jackpot round game is completed, the third symbol display device 42 gives the player a rest, congratulates the player on reaching the final round, and suggests or informs the player of useful information for the game. , An ending effect that displays an image for notifying various cautions is displayed. In this embodiment, as the ending effect, images combined in a predetermined pattern are displayed. The ending information 44j constituting the ending effect pattern includes, for example, the next game state suggestion information 44w (“one more time” or “chance” in the figure, which suggests that the game will shift to the probabilistic state or the time saving state after the end of the jackpot round game. ”), Manufacturer information 44x indicating the manufacturer (indicated as“ logo ”in the figure), and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y (“prepaid card” in the figure) that alerts the user to forgetting to remove the prepaid card. (Note) and pachinko and pachislot are immersive prevention information 44z (indicated as "moderately enjoyed" in the figure) to warn that the game is moderately enjoyable. The next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the insertion prevention information 44z are displayed for 10 seconds each, and the manufacturer information 44x is displayed for 5 seconds.

The ending effect of the 16R probability variation jackpot of Special Figure 1 is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the immersive prevention information 44z are displayed in that order in 35 seconds. In the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot of Special Figure 2, the ending effect is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the immersive prevention information 44z are displayed in that order in 30 seconds.

The ending effect of the 8R probability variation jackpot in Special Figure 1 is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y are displayed in that order in 25 seconds. The ending effect of the 8R probability variation jackpot in Special Figure 2 is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y are displayed in that order in 20 seconds. The ending effect of the 8R normal jackpot of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is the same as the ending effect of the 8R probability variation jackpot of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, but the next game state suggestion information 44w is a "chance" (next It suggests that the game state becomes a time saving state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol of the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of "0" to "250", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250), the counter returns to "0". The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 22) described later), and is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right normal symbol start winning device 34. .. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153".

In particular, when the second symbol random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second symbol random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the second symbol random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 22) described later. , It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing (see FIG. 19) described later. The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 22) described later in this embodiment), and the RAM 503 reaches the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start winning device 34. It is stored in the second symbol hold storage area.

That is, the RAM 503 also has a second symbol hold storage area, which is an area different from the hold ball storage area, and has one execution area for the second symbol and four hold areas for the second symbol (second symbol). A second symbol hold storage area consisting of symbol hold 1st to 4th areas) is provided, and in each of these areas, according to the winning history of the game ball to the normal symbol start winning device 34, Each value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series.

Further, the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5 is updated once every time the second symbol control process of the normal process in FIG. 19 described later is executed once, and the value thereof is the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol of the counter buffer. The second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5, which was updated and acquired in the buffer and was updated and acquired in the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol buffer when the second symbol random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol holding ball storage area, is also the second symbol. It is stored in the hold ball storage area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10, when the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is unsuccessful, "x" is drawn based on the value of the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5 in the second symbol holding ball storage area. The display unit 41b is lit and displayed. It should be noted that the second symbol variation display result may be performed based only on the second symbol random number counter C4 without providing the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5. That is, if the second symbol random number counter C4 is won, the display unit 41a on which "○" is drawn is lit and displayed, and if the second symbol random number counter C4 is unsuccessful, the display unit 41b on which "x" is drawn is lit and displayed.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 26. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a signal. For convenience of explanation, here, first, a timer interrupt process, a start winning process executed in the timer interrupt process, a look-ahead lottery process executed in the start winning process, and a look-ahead lottery process. NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then the main processing will be described.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 22, first, in step S601, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S602, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“599” in the present embodiment), it is cleared to “0”, and the initial value second symbol random number counter. CINI2 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" at the time of 1 increment after the counter value reaches the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 10).

Further, in the following step S603, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment, "599" and "9", respectively. Clear to "0" at the time of 1 increment after reaching "250"). Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 10).

After that, in step S604, the start winning process associated with winning the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is executed. This start winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23, which will be described later.

After that, in step S605, the launch control process is executed. Hereinafter, this launch control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Specifically, in step S721, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the launch permission signal S7 from the launch control device 312 is ON, as shown in FIG. If the launch permission signal S7 is ON, the process proceeds to step S722, and if it is OFF, this process ends. In step S722, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 outputs the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9 to the launch control device 312, controls the launch of the game ball by the launch device 229, and proceeds to step S723. In step S723, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a launch operation command indicating that the game ball launch operation has been performed. After performing the firing control process in this way, the CPU 501 temporarily ends the timer interrupt process.

The start winning process performed by the main control device 261 will be described with reference to FIG. 23.

In step S701, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines from the detection information of the operation port switch whether or not the game ball has won the start winning device 33a for the special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2. If the prize is won, the process proceeds to step S702, and if not, the present process is terminated.

In step S702, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the number of operation-holding balls N of the first symbol display device 40 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the number of operation-holding balls N is less than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S703, otherwise the process ends. In step S703, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 increments the number of operation-holding balls N by one. In step S704, the main control device 261 converts the number N of operation hold balls incremented in step S703 into a hold ball storage area designation command, and outputs the command to the sub control device 262 together with the look-ahead variation pattern designation command described later. Set to.

In step S705, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 acquires a random number related to the winning of the first symbol and the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the third symbol. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 updated in step S603 are set in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. It is stored in the first of the empty areas of the first to fourth reserved areas.

In step S706, the main control device 261 executes a look-ahead lottery process that is performed prior to the variation start process shown in FIG. 19 described above.

The look-ahead lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

In step S711, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a look-ahead lottery for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not the result of the look-ahead lottery is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the mode at that time (whether it is a probabilistic state or a normal state). The hit value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is as described above.

In step S712, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the result of the look-ahead lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area is set. Decide which one to use.

In step S713, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance a fluctuation pattern (big hit effect pattern) at the time of a big hit. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 confirms the values of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 in the same order as the fluctuation start processing described above. Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined in advance.

If it is determined in step S711 that the result of the look-ahead lottery is not a big hit, in step S714, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the stop symbol that the result of the look-ahead lottery is stopped and displayed as a symbol.

In step S715, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance a variation pattern (disengagement effect pattern) at the time of disconnection, and sets the deviation variation pattern in the variation pattern designation command. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 confirms the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area of the RAM 503 in that order, and determines the fluctuation pattern. Determine in advance.

In step S716, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance the addition of the effect time, that is, the addition of the effect time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S713 or the deviation variation pattern determined in step S715. .. More specifically, based on the value of the variable type counter CS3, the decorative symbol (third symbol) in the intermediate decorative symbol row on the third symbol display device 42 stops slipping, resulting in an increase in the effect time (the intermediate decoration). A variation pattern is pre-determined, including an increase in the time it takes for the decorative symbol in the symbol sequence to slip and appear to stop.

In step S717, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 issues a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in advance in step S713, or a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the deviation fluctuation pattern determined in step S505. Set.

In step S718, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed through steps S712 and S713, the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S712 (“first specific hit symbol”, “second specific hit symbol”). If a decorative symbol designation command corresponding to "specific hit symbol" or "non-specific hit symbol") is set and steps S714 and S715 have been passed, the first symbol display device 40 determined in advance in step S714 is removed. Set the decorative symbol specification command corresponding to the symbol.

In step S719, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the effect time addition designation command corresponding to the effect time addition determined in advance in step S716, and ends this process.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main control device 261 when the power is turned off is stored in the backup area of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 26. The NMI interrupt process of FIG. 26 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main controller 261. Power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the main control device 261 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output, and the NMI interrupt processing is executed within this predetermined time.

In the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 26, in step S801, the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area. In this embodiment, the power failure occurrence information is flagged and stored in the backup area.

Next, the main processing performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the initial setting process associated with the power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Further, in step S102, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 waits for the control devices on the sub side (sub control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to be in an operable state, for example, for about 1 second, to perform weight processing. To execute. In the following step S103, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 permits RAM access.

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the RAM erasing switch 323 provided on the power supply monitoring board 261b is pressed (ON), and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S105, and when it is turned on. If there is, the process proceeds to step S113. In the following step S105, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not the power failure occurrence information flag is set). Further, in step S106, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates the RAM determination value, and in the following step S107, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 matches the RAM determination value with the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off. Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. It is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 are correctly saved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like). Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the used RAM area is cleared and the RAM 503 initialization process (step). S113 etc.). That is, in step S113, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 clears the used area of the RAM 503 to “0” and executes the initialization process of the RAM 503.

In the following step S114, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a payout initialization command. As described above, the payout initialization command is output to the payout control device 311 when the main control device 261 is initialized.

Further, in step S115, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a command at the time of turning on the power to the sub control board 262a. Since this command at the time of turning on the power includes a command for determining the model of the pachinko machine, the model can be determined based on the command content on the sub side such as the sub control board 262a or the display control device 45. ..

Further, in step S116, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the initial setting of the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit). In step S117, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt enable and shifts to a normal process (see FIG. 17) described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the power is restored on condition that the power failure occurrence information is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Execute the process (process at the time of power failure recovery). That is, in step S108, the power outage occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a payout return command to the payout control device 311 and instructs the payout control device 311 to start payout control. Although the details will be described later, when the payout control device 311 receives the payout return command from the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 returns and starts the payout control.

In step S110, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a command for causing the control device on the sub side to be duplicated in the gaming state when the power is turned off, and in step S111, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is CTC (Counter). / Timer Circuit) Initial setting is executed. Further, in step S112, interrupt permission is set, and then the process proceeds to normal processing (see FIG. 17) described later. For example, even if the power is cut off during the normal processing, the power is turned off after the last step of the normal processing (the step of "RAM access prohibited" shown in FIG. 17) is executed. Will be executed from step S201, which is the first step of normal processing.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S207 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S210 and S211 are executed in the remaining time.

In FIG. 17, first, in step S201, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs an external output process of transmitting output data such as a command updated in the previous process to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of the prize detection information is determined, and if there is the prize detection information, the prize ball payout command corresponding to the number of acquired game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 311. Further, since the decorative symbol (third symbol) is also variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 42 in conjunction with the first symbol variation display (variation display of the first segment display unit 40a) of the first symbol display device 40. However, when displaying the variation of the first symbol of the first symbol display device 40, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, a total stop command (confirmation command), and the like are transmitted to the sub control device 262 in the external output processing.

In this pachinko machine 10, at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol, the external output of normal processing is performed in the order of fluctuation pattern specification command → effect command (command for specifying change of fluctuation time, etc.) → decorative symbol specification command. A predetermined number of commands (for example, three) are sent each time a process is performed (that is, three commands are sent every 4 msec), and a total stop command is sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses. In addition, after the fluctuation of the first symbol starts, a predetermined number (for example, three) of each external output processing of the normal processing is performed in the order of the fluctuation pattern designation command → the effect command → the decorative symbol designation command (that is, three every 4 msec). The command may be sent (by each), and the all stop command may be sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses.

The variation pattern designation command is a command for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 so as to display and execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the transmitted variation pattern designation command.

The decorative symbol designation command is for designating whether the variable display effect of the decorative symbol (third symbol) on the third symbol display device 42 is the first big hit, the second big hit, the third big hit, or the off. It is a command. The decorative symbol designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 is a third symbol display device so that the display result of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol becomes the result (first jackpot, second jackpot, third jackpot) according to the transmitted decorative symbol designation command. Display control of 42.

The all stop command is a command for instructing the stop of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The all stop command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 so as to stop and display the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the transmitted all-stop command.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sends a fluctuation pattern designation command and an effect command (command for designating a change of the fluctuation time, etc.) to the sub control device 262 in the external output process (step S201) of the normal process. May be sent. That is, it is determined which time to set the fluctuation time addition (addition time due to the sliding effect of the decorative symbol described above) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS3, and such addition time is appropriately set in the sub control device 262. Directing commands are used to direct. Therefore, after the start of the fluctuation of the first symbol, a predetermined number (for example, three) of each external output processing of the normal processing is performed in the order of the fluctuation pattern designation command → the effect command → the decorative symbol designation command (that is, three every 4 msec). A command is sent (by each), and a full stop command may be sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses.

Next, in step S202, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the update of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3. Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in the present embodiment) and then incremented by 1, they are "0", respectively. Clear to. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area shown in FIG. 10 of the RAM 503.

In the following step S203 of FIG. 17, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal, and the lower plate full tank signal received from the payout control device 311. After that, in step S204, the first symbol variation process for displaying the variation of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40 is executed. By this first symbol variation processing, a jackpot determination and a setting of a variation pattern of the first symbol are performed. However, the details of the first symbol variation processing will be described later.

In step S205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the next game state setting process for setting the jackpot lottery probability in the next game state after the end of the jackpot game state. The details of the next game state setting process will also be described later.

After that, in step S206, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes a large winning opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the big hit round game state. That is, the large winning opening 32a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and whether the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 32a has elapsed or whether the specified number of game balls have won the large winning opening 32a for each round. judge. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the opening of the large winning opening 32a in that round is stopped and closed, and if there is a remaining round, the opening of the large winning opening 32a is repeatedly executed for the remaining number of rounds.

Further, in step S207, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 41. Briefly, on condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start winning device 34, the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired each time, and the display units 41a and 41b of the second symbol display device 41 are displayed. The second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second symbol random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 receives a start prize for special symbol 2 as shown in step S208. The opening process of the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 which opens the device 33b for a predetermined time is performed. Although the explanation is omitted, the second symbol random number counter C4 is also updated by the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 22, like the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. ing.

Further, in step S209, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not the power-off occurrence information flag is set). If the power-off occurrence information is not set, the process proceeds to step S210, and if the power-off occurrence information is set, the process proceeds to step S213.

After that, in step S210, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the initial value random number counter CINI1, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are repeatedly updated (steps S211 and S212). ). That is, in step S211, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value is incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value ("599" in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. Similarly to this, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment) and then incremented by 1. do. Then, the update value of the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Further, in step S212, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1, and the counter values are incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value (“198”, “240”, “162” in the present embodiment). Clear each to "0". Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) and the initial value Value The second symbol random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4) can be updated at random.

Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is set in step S209 and the process proceeds to step S213, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt prohibition. Subsequently, in step S214, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power supply has been quickly cut off to another control device. Subsequently, in step S215, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the output of the control signal. Subsequently, in step S216, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates the RAM determination value and stores it in the backup area. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Subsequently, in step S217, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 prohibits RAM access. After that, it goes into an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

Next, the first symbol variation process in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 18, in step S401, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit. The jackpot includes a special game displayed on the third symbol display device 42 at the time of the jackpot and a predetermined time after the end of the special game. In the following step S402, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the variation display of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40 is in progress. Then, if the jackpot is not in progress and the fluctuation display of the first symbol is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S403, and the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has the number N of operation pending balls of the first symbol display device 40 larger than "0". Determine if not. At this time, if the jackpot is in progress or the number of balls on hold for operation N is "0", this process is terminated as it is.

Further, if neither of the jackpots nor the fluctuation display of the first symbol is displayed and the number of pending balls N> 0, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 subtracts "1" from the number of operation-holding balls N. In step S405, a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold ball storage area to the execution area side in order. The data in each area is shifted in the order of the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd Uria, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area, and so on.

After that, in step S406, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the fluctuation start process. Here, the fluctuation start process will be described in detail using the flowchart of FIG. 19. In step S501, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area. Whether it is a big hit or not is determined based on it. Specifically, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the mode at that time (whether it is a probabilistic state or a normal state), and as described above, at the time of normal low probability. Of the numerical values "0" to "599" of the jackpot random number counter C1, "150,450" is the hit value (2 pieces), and at high probability, "50,150,350,450" is the hit value (4 pieces). be.

When the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot, in step S502, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area, that is, the first symbol display. It is determined which of the first symbol to the third symbol is displayed on the first segment display unit 40a of the device 40. That is, the jackpot corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is based on the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table or the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table (see FIG. 11) showing the correspondence between the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the symbol. Obtain a symbol ("first jackpot symbol", "second jackpot symbol", or "third jackpot symbol").

Next, in step S503, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines a fluctuation pattern (big hit effect pattern) at the time of a big hit. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 uses the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the value of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 without using the stop pattern selection counter C3. Check in order and determine the fluctuation pattern.

That is, based on the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2, the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 is displayed by the "stop pattern 3" of the normal jackpot (non-specific hit), or the third symbol display device 42. It is determined whether to display the decorative pattern with the "stop pattern 4" of the probability variation jackpot (specific hit). The type of the "stop pattern 3" or the "stop pattern 4" determined in this way is further determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1. That is, a rough variation pattern group of the decorative symbol such as the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. is determined. Subsequently, one variation pattern is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 from the variation pattern group of the roughly decorative symbols determined in this way. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the elapsed time until the final stop decorative symbol (intermediate decorative symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs is set to a predetermined time, and the finer decorative symbol is set. Determine the variation mode. In the case of a jackpot, the following relationships, that is, the relationship between the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 The relationship with the stop symbol time is predetermined by a table for jackpots and the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that it is not a big hit, in step S504, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 uses a fourth symbol to indicate an out-of-line symbol, that is, the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40. Set to the stop symbol to display the stop.

Next, in step S505, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines a variation pattern (disengagement effect pattern) at the time of disconnection, and sets the deviation variation pattern in the variation pattern designation command. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 confirms the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area of the RAM 503 in that order, and determines the fluctuation pattern. decide.

That is, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, after the reach of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 occurs, the final stop decorative symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach decorative symbol and stops. "Stop pattern 1", which is "Stop pattern 2" which is "Reach other than front and rear disengagement" where the final stop decorative symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach decorative symbol, and "Complete disengagement" where reach does not occur. It is determined which stop pattern to use, which is "stop pattern 0". For example, when the determined stop pattern is, for example, "stop pattern 1" which is the front-rear out-of-reach reach, normal reach and super reach from the front-back out-of-reach change pattern group based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. A variation pattern in which the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) is specified, such as the above, is determined, and a rough variation pattern group of the decorative symbol is determined. Here, it is assumed that the normal reach is decided. Subsequently, one further variation pattern is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 from the normal reach variation pattern group of the roughly decorative pattern determined in this way. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the elapsed time until the final stop decorative symbol (intermediate decorative symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs is set to a predetermined time, and the finer decorative symbol is set. Determine the variation mode. In the case of deviation, the following relationships, that is, the relationship between the numerical value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2. The relationship between the stop symbol time and the stop symbol time is defined in advance by a table or the like for disengagement.

In the present embodiment, as one of the above-mentioned disengagement tables, for example, at a low probability, in the state of the fluctuation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40, at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol. Some are adopted when the number of pending operations of the first symbol is "0", and when the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is "0 to 201", it corresponds to no reach (completely off), and " "202-208" corresponds to the front-rear reach, and "209-238" corresponds to the reach other than the front-rear reach.

Subsequently, in step S506, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the effect time addition, that is, the determination of the addition of the effect time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S503 or the deviation variation pattern determined in step S505. conduct. More specifically, based on the value of the variable type counter CS3, the decorative symbol (third symbol) in the intermediate decorative symbol row on the third symbol display device 42 stops slipping, resulting in an increase in the effect time (the intermediate decoration). A variation pattern is determined, including the increase in the time it takes for the decorative symbol in the symbol sequence to slip and appear to stop.

Further, in step S507, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 issues a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in step S503, or a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the deviation fluctuation pattern determined in step S505. Set.

Subsequently, in step S508, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed through steps S502 and S503, the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S502 (“first specific hit symbol”, When a decorative symbol designation command corresponding to "second specific hit symbol" or "non-specific hit symbol") is set and steps S504 and S505 have been passed, the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S504 Set the decorative symbol specification command corresponding to the out-of-order symbol.

Subsequently, in step S509, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets an effect time addition designation command corresponding to the effect time addition determined in step S506.

Returning to the description of FIG. 18, if step S402 is YES, that is, if the fluctuation display of the first symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S407, and the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the first symbol has elapsed. To determine. The fluctuation time of the first symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the effect time addition determined as described above using FIG. 19, that is, the first symbol is determined according to the fluctuation pattern of the first symbol. The fluctuation time of is determined, and when the fluctuation time elapses, step S407 is positively determined. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S408, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S409.

Then, in step S408, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 updates the variation display of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 40. That is, the variable display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is continued, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S409, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the variation display of the first symbol and sets the stop symbol of the first symbol to the display symbol. That is, when the first jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 19, the first segment display unit 40a is represented by the first symbol after the variation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40. Stop display. When the second jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 19, after the fluctuation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40, the first segment display unit 40a is stopped and displayed by the second symbol. do. When the third jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 19, after the fluctuation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40, the first segment display unit 40a is stopped and displayed by the third symbol. do. When the symbol is determined to be out of alignment in step S504 of FIG. 19, the first segment display unit 40a is stopped and displayed by the fourth symbol after the fluctuation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 (. It means off).

Subsequently, in step S410, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a total stop command for instructing the stop of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 42. This process ends.

Next, the next game state setting process in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S561, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the probability variation jackpot has been achieved based on the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2. If it is a probabilistic jackpot, the process proceeds to step S562, and if not, the process proceeds to step S564.

In step S562, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpot lottery table shown in FIG. 11 to the value at the time of high probability, and proceeds to step S563. In step S563, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a high-probability support state transition command and ends this process. As a result, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 refers to the value at the time of high probability as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the next jackpot determination.

In step S564, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not a normal jackpot has been achieved based on the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2. If it is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S565, and if not, this process ends.

In step S565, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpot lottery table to the value at the time of low probability, and proceeds to step S566. As a result, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 refers to the value at the time of low probability as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the next jackpot determination.

In step S566, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the reference destination in step S564 is the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table. If the reference destination is the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, the process proceeds to step S567, and if not, the process proceeds to step S569. In step S567, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a low probability support state transition command. The low-probability support state transition command is a command indicating the occurrence of 100 time-saving states after the end of the normal jackpot jackpot round game.

In step S568, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the reference destination in step S564 is the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table. If the reference destination is the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table, the process proceeds to step S569, otherwise the process ends. In step S569, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a low-probability state transition command. The low-probability state transition command is a command indicating that there is no time reduction after the end of the jackpot round, which is usually a jackpot.

Next, the opening / closing process of the large winning opening in step S206 described above will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process.

In step S581, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the round start flag is turned on in step S553 described above. If the round start flag is on, the process proceeds to step S583, otherwise the process ends. In step S583, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the nth round (or the first round if it is the first). If it is the start timing of the nth round, the process proceeds to step S585, otherwise the process ends.

In step S585, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 opens the large winning opening 32a and proceeds to step S587. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns on the solenoid to open the door of the large winning opening 32a in the variable winning device 32. In step S587, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the nth round. The end timing of each round, that is, the opening time of the big winning opening 32a is predetermined based on the value of the big hit symbol counter C2. When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 90 to 99, the opening time of the jackpot 32a is set to a short time so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter. In the case of other values of the jackpot symbol counter C2, a sufficient time is set for the upper limit number of game balls to enter.

If it is the end timing of the nth round in step S587, the process proceeds to step S589, otherwise the process ends. In step S589, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 closes the large winning opening 32a and proceeds to step S591. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns off the solenoid in order to close the door of the large winning opening 32a in the variable winning device 32. The closing time of the large winning opening 32a between each round, that is, the interval time between rounds is predetermined.

In step S591, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the final round. If it is the final round, the process proceeds to step S593, otherwise the process returns to step S583. In step S593, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns off the round start flag and ends this process.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S901, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the stack address and the interrupt mode. Further, in step S902, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 permits RAM access, and in step S903, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets an external interrupt vector.

After that, in step S904, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 513. Further, in step S905, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 calculates the RAM determination value, and in the following step S906, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, that is, the backup is effective. Determine the sex. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. It is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

Subsequently, in step S907, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs the initial setting of the RAM 513 at the time of power recovery. Specifically, when the main control device 261 is initialized, a payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 is the initial payout from the main control device 261. Upon receiving the conversion command, the RAM 513 is initially set at the time of power recovery in step S907. That is, the RAM area is initialized, and the control of the payout of the game ball is started.

Therefore, when the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (ON) when the power is turned on, the main control device 261 is initialized, and the payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311. Therefore, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 based on the payout initialization command from the main control device 261.

Subsequently, in step S908, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs initial setting of peripheral devices of the CPU 511. Specifically, the CPU peripheral device is a timer control device called a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit), and the CTC is set to a predetermined value to generate a timer interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms).

Subsequently, in step S909, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the interrupt permission and shifts to the payout control process described later.

On the other hand, when the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S904, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S906, the payout control device 311 is similarly used. The CPU 511 clears the entire area of the RAM 513 to "0" (step S910), and performs the initialization process (step S911).

Next, the flow of the payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

In FIG. 28, in step S1001, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 acquires and stores a command from the main control device 261. Here, as the command to be stored, 15 types of prize ball commands (15 types of prize ball commands for instructing the payout of 1 to 15 pieces) and the start of payout control to the payout control device 311 are instructed. There are 17 types of commands, including a payout return command for the purpose and a payout initialization command for instructing the payout initialization to the payout control device 311.

In step S1002, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not the payout permission has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not the payout return command or the prize ball command has been received. Further, in step S1003, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 checks the state return switch (not shown) and executes the state return operation when it is determined that the state return operation has started.

After that, in step S1004, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes the setting of the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower plate 15 is full, the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set and the lower plate is not full. , Execute the setting of the lower plate full tank release state.

Further, in step S1005, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes the setting of the tank ball-less state or the tank ball-less release state according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, and when the tank ball is lost, the setting of the state without a tank ball is executed, and when the state without a tank ball is lost, the state without a tank ball is released. Perform the settings.

After that, in step S1006, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not there is a state of notifying, and if there is a state of notifying, the 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 311 notifies.

In steps S1007 to S1009, the prize ball payout process is executed. In this case, if the prize balls cannot be paid out and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1001 is not "0" (both steps S1007 and S1008 are NO), the process proceeds to step S1009 and the prize ball control process (described later). FIG. 29) is started. If the prize balls cannot be paid out or the total number of prize balls is 0 (YES in any of steps S1007 and S1008), the process proceeds to the ball rental process.

After that, in steps S101 to S1012, the ball rental payout process is executed. In this case, if the ball lending cannot be paid out and the ball lending request from the card unit is received (NO in step S1010 and YES in S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012 and the ball lending control process (described later). FIG. 30) is started. Further, if the ball lending is not payable or the ball lending request is not received (YES in step S1010 or NO in S1011), the subsequent vibe motor control (step S1013) is executed.

In step S1013, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes control (vibe motor control) of the vibrator 360 (see FIG. 3). After that, in step S1014, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. If a power failure occurs, the process proceeds to step S1015, and if not, the process returns to step S1001. In step S1015, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the power-off occurrence information, and in step S1016, the RAM determination value is created. After that, it goes into an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

Here, in the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 29, in step S1101, the payout motor 358a is driven to pay out the prize balls. In the following step S1102, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1103, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 28.

If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1104, and it is determined from the detection result of the payout count switch whether or not the game ball is normally counted. If the count of the game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1105, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 28.

Further, if the count of the game balls is normal, the process proceeds to step S1106, and it is determined whether or not the count number of the game balls by the payout count switch reaches the total number of prize balls and the payout is completed. If the payout is completed, the payout motor 358a is stopped in step S1107, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 28.

Further, in the ball lending control process shown in FIG. 30, in step S1201, the payout motor 358a is driven to pay out the ball lending. In the following step S1202, whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1203, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 28.

If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1204, and whether or not the game ball is normally counted is determined from the detection result of the payout count switch. If the count of the game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1205, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 28.

Further, if the count of the game balls is normal, the process proceeds to step S1206, and it is determined whether or not the count number of the game balls by the payout count switch reaches a predetermined number of rented balls (25 balls) and the payout is completed. If the payout is completed, the payout motor 358a is stopped in step S1207, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 28.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the state of the payout control device 311 when the power is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like is stored in the backup area of the RAM 513 due to the NMI interrupt. Similarly, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the payout control device 311 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control during execution. The NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 26 is started. The contents are as described with reference to FIG.

Next, the main process and the normal process of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal process executed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262.

First, in step S2001, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 executes the initial setting process accompanying the power-on. Specifically, port setting (port I / O switching and initial value output), timer setting (1 millisecond interval timer, liquid crystal command strobe output timer), and interrupt setting (subcommand strobe interrupt) are performed. ..

Further, in step S2002, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the power off processing is incomplete. Specifically, whether or not the various lamps (annular illumination unit 102, central illumination unit 103, etc.) of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are all turned off and the speaker is in a mute state. Determine. Then, if the power off processing is not completed, the process proceeds to step S2004, otherwise the process proceeds to step S2003.

Subsequently, in step S2003, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is destroyed, and if it is destroyed, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2007. .. In step S2004, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a RAM area read / write check of the sub control device 262. Then, in step S2005, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is normal. If the RAM of the sub control device 262 is normal, the process proceeds to step S2006, and if it is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2006, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 writes the data for the RAM destruction check for each area of the RAM 553, and sets the RAM destruction check data for determining that the data is destroyed if there is a read abnormality.

Then, in step S2007, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the power is turned on after the power is turned off. If the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the process proceeds to step S2008, otherwise the process proceeds to step S2009.

In step S2008, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 clears the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area. Specifically, the unprocessed RAM area is an area for storing information that causes a problem in the system when the data is cleared, and is an area of information that is desired to be retained except when the RAM area is destroyed. For example, a subcommand reception buffer and power-on information can be mentioned. When the main control device 261 turns off the power and the sub control device 262 resets (when a power cut notification command is received from the main control device 261), the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area is cleared.

In step S2009, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets interrupt enable. In step S2010, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the initial value of the RAM of the sub control device 262. In step S2011, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the effect initialization flag to "1" and shifts to the normal process shown in FIG. 32.

In step S2012, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 notifies the RAM abnormality and enters an infinite loop. For example, notification such as turning on a predetermined lamp unconditionally can be mentioned.

As shown in FIG. 32, in step S2101, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed from the start of the normal process. If 1 ms or more has passed, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2110.

In step S2102, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the lamp output process. Specifically, the lamp output is performed according to the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol (third symbol) on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S2103, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 gives a power-on notification. Specifically, a power-on command is used to notify for 30 seconds. Specifically, in the power-on notification, the third symbol marking device 42 displays an image notifying the power-on, and the illumination unit 300 lights the lamp in a pattern notifying the power-on.

In step S2104, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a customer waiting effect. Specifically, the title / still image is switched. That is, a so-called demo screen is displayed.

In step S2105, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the hold quantity display update process of the first symbol change. Specifically, this hold quantity display update process is a process for also performing the display corresponding to the hold lamp 40c of the first symbol display device 40 on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S2106, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring / effect processing. Specifically, this frame button input monitoring / effect processing is a pachinko machine provided with a frame button that can be pressed by the player (for example, the upper selection button 71, the lower selection button 72, the frame button 80, etc. shown in FIG. 1). This is for producing a machine-specific effect by pressing the frame button on the machine. Therefore, this process is not necessary for pachinko machines that do not have such a frame button.

In step S2107, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the lamp editing process. Specifically, the process of editing the lamp lighting pattern in the illumination unit 300 corresponding to (synchronizing with) the variation pattern production of the decorative symbol in the third symbol display device 42 is performed.

In step S2108, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs sound editing / output processing. Specifically, the process of sounding (synchronizing) the sound corresponding to (synchronizing) the variation pattern production of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 (outputting voice, music, sound effect, etc.) is performed.

In step S2109, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the effect execution management process. Specifically, time management or the like for synchronizing the lamp, the sound, and the liquid crystal display (the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42) is performed.

When this liquid crystal display (for example, the reach display effect of the jackpot / off super reach A to E) is synchronized with the effect of operating the movable illuminated portion in the game board 30 described later as a movable accessory, the display variation An accessory operation pattern specification command corresponding to the pattern specification command is set and transmitted to the drive control unit that operates the movable accessory.

In step S2110, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a process of updating the value of a random number for determining the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be performed by the third symbol display device 42 and the effect of the voice lamp. Specifically, this random number takes a value of, for example, "0" to "32767", and returns to "0" when the upper limit value "37268" is reached.

In step S2111, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives a command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 performs a process corresponding to each command.

Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits a display command obtained by converting the fluctuation pattern designation command into a command to the display control device 45. The fluctuation pattern specification command may be output as it is. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the decorative symbol designation command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits a stop display command obtained by converting the decorative symbol designation command into a command to the display control device 45. Further, when a notice command is generated in addition to the stop display command in the command conversion of the decorative symbol designation command, the notice command is also transmitted to the display control device 45. As this notice command, for example, the presence or absence of the appearance of a school of fish as a notice can be mentioned. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the total stop command (confirmation command) from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits the total stop command to the display control device 45 as it is.

Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command from the main control device 261, the lamp lighting command obtained by converting the fluctuation pattern designation command into a command is used to control the lighting unit 300. Send to the device. Further, the voice output command obtained by converting the fluctuation pattern designation command into a command is transmitted to the sound output control device 46 that controls the sound output unit 24.

In step S2112, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a command output process for outputting a command to the display control device 45 or the like. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 transmits, for example, various commands such as the above-mentioned display command and stop display command to the display control device 45.

In step S2113, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is destroyed. If the RAM is not destroyed, the process returns to step S1401, and if the RAM is destroyed, an infinite loop is entered.

Here, the customer waiting effect processing of step S2104 shown in FIG. 32 by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect processing by the sub control device 262.

In step S2221, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not 30 seconds or more have passed since the power was turned on. If 30 seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2222, and if not, this process ends. In step S2222, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a command for displaying the normal screen on the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to step S2223. In step S2223, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the normal screen display flag to 1.

In step S2224, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the launch operation command has been received. If it has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2225, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2229.

In step S2225, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the normal screen is displayed. If 60 seconds have passed, the process proceeds to step S2226, and if not, this process ends. In step S2226, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a demo screen display command for displaying the demo screen on the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to steps S2227 and S2228.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the demo screen display flag to 1 in step S2227, sets the normal screen display flag to 0 in step S2228, and ends this process.

In step S2229 described above, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the demo screen display flag is 1. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step S2230, otherwise the process ends. In step S2230, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a normal screen display command for displaying the normal screen on the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to steps S2231 and S2322.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the normal screen display flag to 1 in step S2231 and sets the demo screen display flag to 0 in step S2322 to end this process.

Here, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing of step S2106 shown in FIG. 32 by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub control device 262.

As shown in FIG. 34, the sub control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring / effect processing. Specifically, first, in step S2301, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the decision button input monitoring / effect processing. Specifically, when the player is required to operate the decision button 81 to instruct the execution of a predetermined effect on the display screen 42a, the predetermined effect is responded to by the player pressing the decision button 81. It is displayed that the execution is instructed. For example, when the press of the enter button 81 is requested, the image corresponding to the enter button 81 and the character image of "press!" Are displayed.

In step S2302, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs selection button input monitoring / effect processing, and ends this processing. Specifically, when the player is required to operate the selection buttons 82 and 83 to instruct a predetermined selection on the display screen 42a, the player responds to the selection operation of the selection buttons 82 and 83. Indicates that a given selection is being made. For example, when requesting that the selection buttons 82 and 83 be pressed, an image to be selected (for example, a plurality of character images) that prompts the user to press the selection buttons 82 and 83 and "Please select a character" are displayed. A character image is displayed.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned decision button input monitoring / effect processing will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the decision button input monitoring / effect processing.

In step S2311, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 monitors the input of the enter button 81. In step S2312, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to the determination step of step S2313 or lower when the press of the enter button 81 is detected, and ends this process otherwise.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a normal screen display flag of 1 (step S2313), a demo screen display flag of 1 (step S2314), and a high-speed fluctuation flag of 1. (Step S2315), whether or not the jackpot opening flag is 1 (step S2316), and whether or not the jackpot ending flag is 1, and if none of them is 1, the process proceeds to step S2321.

In step S2321, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the button suggestion effect flag is 1. The button suggestion effect flag is set to 1 during the period in which the image requesting the press of the enter button 81 is displayed in the button suggestion effect, and is set to 0 when the period ends (the request to press the enter button 81 ends). .. If the button suggestion effect flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S2322. If not, this process ends. In step S2322, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the decision button 81 has been pressed during the display period of the press request image of the decision button 81, sets the button suggestion effect execution command, and ends this process. ..

Return to step S2313. In the determination step from step S2313 to step S2318, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not it is the timing at which the volume change operation can be executed.

Specifically, in the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262, the normal screen display flag is 1 (the normal screen is being displayed) in step S2313, or the demo screen display flag is 1 (the demo screen is being displayed) in step S2314. ), Or if the high-speed changing flag is 1 in step S2315 (the main decorative symbol SZ is changing at high speed), the process proceeds to step S2320. In step S2320, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display specific operation screen display command for displaying the specific operation screen. The specific operation screen is a screen for operating the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24.

If the jackpot opening flag is 1 (during the opening effect) in step S2316, the process proceeds to step S2317. In step S2317, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not 5 seconds have passed from the start of the opening effect in order to determine whether or not it is time to display the specific operation screen during the opening effect. .. If 5 seconds have passed, the process proceeds to step S2320, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2318.

If the jackpot ending flag is 1 (during the ending effect) in step S2318, the process proceeds to step S2319. In step S2319, 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect elapses in order to determine whether or not the timing at which the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 cannot display the specific operation screen (for example, the volume operation screen) during the ending effect is reached. Determine if you did. If 3 seconds have not passed before the end of the ending effect, the process proceeds to step S2320 described above, and the display specific operation screen display command is set. If this is not the case, the process proceeds to step S2321 described above, but since it is determined whether or not, this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the selection button input monitoring / effect processing described above will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the selection button input monitoring / effect processing.

In step S2331, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 monitors the inputs of the selection buttons 82 and 83. In step S2332, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the pressing of the selection buttons 82 and 83 is detected. If the press is detected, the process proceeds to step S2333, and if not, the present process ends.

In step S2333, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the specific operation screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. If it is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2334, otherwise the process proceeds to step S2335. In step S2334, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a selection operation command that reflects the result of the selection operation on the specific operation screen. Specifically, the volume level is increased or decreased.

In step S2335, it is determined whether or not the button suggestion effect selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. If it is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2334, and if not, the present process ends. In step S2334, similarly to the above, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a selection operation command that reflects the result of the selection operation on the button suggestion effect operation screen. Specifically, one of the options is selected on the suggestion effect screen in which the options (such as the selection of the player PY described above using FIG. 14) are shown. This is the end of this process.

Next, the effect execution management process of step S2109 shown in FIG. 32 by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

In step S2401, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the read-ahead variation pattern designation command reception processing. The processing at the time of receiving the look-ahead fluctuation pattern specification command will be described below. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead variation pattern designation command reception processing by the sub control device 262.

In step S2411, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the read-ahead variation pattern designation command has been received. If the look-ahead variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2412, and if not, the present process ends.

In step S2412, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the hold ball storage area designation command has been received. If the hold ball storage area designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2413, and if not, this process ends.

In step S2413, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 stores the look-ahead variation pattern designation command received this time in the hold ball storage area designated by the hold ball storage area designation command. The RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 is provided with a hold ball storage area corresponding to the hold ball storage area (execution area and the first to fourth hold areas) provided in the RAM 503 of the main control device 261. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the received command in any of the first to fourth hold areas designated by the look-ahead variation pattern designation command.

In step S2414, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 refers to the hold display pattern selection table and determines the hold display pattern corresponding to the look-ahead variation pattern designation command received this time. In step S2415, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 converts the determined hold display pattern into a display hold display command, and transmits this display hold display command and the above-mentioned hold ball storage area designation command to the display control device 45. Set so that it can be output. This is the end of this process.

<Open / close mode (big hit) display setting process>
Returning to the effect management execution process shown in FIG. 37, in step S2402, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the open / close mode (big hit) display setting process. This open / close mode (big hit) display setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 39.

In step S2431, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2432 if it has received the opening command, and proceeds to step S2434 otherwise.

In step S2432, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the display opening command.

In step S2434, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to step S2435 if the ending command has been received, and ends this process otherwise.

In step S2435, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the display ending command and ends this process.

<Variable display mode setting process>
Returning to the effect management execution process shown in FIG. 37, in step S2403, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the variation display mode setting process. This variation display mode setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 40.

In step S2471, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to step S2472 if it has received the variation pattern designation command, and proceeds to step S2480 if it has not received it.

In step S2472, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 executes a process of shifting the data stored in the holding ball storage area provided in the RAM 553. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth hold areas of the hold ball storage area toward the execution area side. Specifically, the data in each area such as 1st hold area → execution area, 2nd hold area → 1st hold area, 3rd hold area → 2nd hold urea, 4th hold area → 3rd hold area. Is shifted.

In step S2473, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display variation pattern designation command for displaying the decorative symbol variation corresponding to the variation pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553 on the third symbol display device 42. Then, the process proceeds to step S2474. The display variation pattern specification command is, for example, jackpot normal reach A, B, jackpot super reach A to E, front and rear out normal reach A, B, front and back out, super reach A to D, out of front and back, normal reach A, B, and out of front and back. This is a display command for executing decorative symbol variation display with variation patterns such as reach A to D and complete deviation A to F.

In step S2474, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is a command with a button suggestion effect. Specifically, in the variation pattern designation command, the presence / absence of the button suggestion effect is determined by using the value of the variation type counter CS2 and the main decorative symbol variation pattern selection table. If there is a button suggestion effect, the process proceeds to step S2475, and if not, this process ends.

In step S2475, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display button suggestion effect designation command for displaying the button suggestion effect on the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to step S2476. In step S2476, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the button suggestion effect flag to 1.

In step S2477, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the decorative symbol designation command has been received. If the decorative symbol designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2478, and if not, this process ends. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the end timing of the fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern designation command has been reached, instead of determining whether or not the decoration symbol designation command has been received. You may. In this case, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command, the fluctuation time is read from the command, the fluctuation time is measured by the timer, and the end timing of the fluctuation time is grasped.

In step S2478, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a stop display command (confirmation command) for stopping (confirming) the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and performs this process. finish.

<Variable display mode setting process>
Returning to the effect management execution process shown in FIG. 37, in step S2404, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the next game state display mode setting process. The next game state display mode setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 41.

In step S2491, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the high-probability / support state transition command has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2492, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2493.

In step S2492, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the third symbol display device 42 to explicitly or implicitly notify the player of the transition to the high-probability / support state. Set the migration command and end this process.

In step S2493, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the low probability / support state transition command has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2494, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2495.

In step S2494, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 indicates to the third symbol display device 42 that the player is explicitly or implicitly notified of the transition to the low-probability / support state. Set the migration command and end this process.

In step S2495, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the low probability state transition command has been received. If the low-probability state transition command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2494, and if not, this process ends.

In step S2494, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display low-probability state transition command that displays the third symbol display device 42 to explicitly or implicitly notify the player of the transition to the low-probability state. Then, this process is terminated.

Next, the normal processing of the display control device 45 and the switching processing of the display mode and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a normal process of the display control device. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a switching process such as a display mode by the display control device.

As shown in FIG. 42, in step S3001, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a command input process for inputting various commands transmitted from the sub control device 262, and proceeds to step S3002. Examples of these various commands include a display command, a stop display command, a display opening command, a display ending command, a demo start command, and a symbol sequence fluctuation start command.

In step S3002, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a display mode switching process (display of symbol sequence variation, jackpot opening, jackpot ending, etc.), and proceeds to step S3003. Here, the switching process of the display mode and the like will be described with reference to FIG. 43.

As shown in FIG. 43, in step S3101, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a normal screen display command has been received. If the normal screen display command is received, the process proceeds to step S3102, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3103. The display command is a command transmitted from the sub-control device 262, and is a command for permitting the display of the normal screen on the third symbol display device 42 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, or after the jackpot round is completed. This is a command for returning the display mode of the third symbol display device 42 to the normal mode for displaying the normal screen.

In step S3102, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the normal screen on the third symbol display device 42. As shown in FIG. 9, the normal screen is a screen in which the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ are stopped and displayed in a manner that does not form a jackpot combination on the front side of the normal background image. The normal background image is stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45.

In step S3103, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the demo screen display command has been received. If the demo screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3104, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3105. The demo screen display command is a command received from the sub control device 262, and is a command for instructing the player to switch from the normal screen to the demo screen when a predetermined time elapses without firing the game ball. Is.

In step S3104, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the demo screen on the third symbol display device 42. The demo screen is an image that introduces the method of the game and the features of the game, and is stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45.

In step S3105, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display variation pattern designation command has been received. If the display variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3106, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3107.

In step S3106, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 starts the fluctuation of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ of the three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R shown in FIG. 9, and finally stops and displays the variable display. The display control of the third symbol display device 42 is performed so as to perform the above. Specifically, the variable display control of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ is a control for executing steps S3003 to S3007, which will be described later. The symbol sequence variation display process executed in step S3106 will be described later.

In step S3107, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display specific operation screen display command set in step S2320 described above has been received. If the display specific operation screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3108, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3109.

In step S3108, the CPU 521 of the display control device performs a specific operation screen display process described later.

In step S3109, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display opening command has been received. If the display opening command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3110, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3111.

In step S3110, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start displaying the jackpot opening image. The jackpot opening image is an image that is displayed after the decorative symbol variation display is confirmed by the jackpot combination, and is an image that congratulates the jackpot winning. Further, when the display of the jackpot opening is finished, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 continuously starts displaying the jackpot round image. The jackpot round image is an image displayed during the jackpot round, and is, for example, a privilege image that can be seen only during the jackpot round. The jackpot opening image and the jackpot round image are stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45. The jackpot opening round display process executed in step S3110 will be described later.

In step S3111, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display ending command has been received. If the display ending command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3112, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3113. In step S3112, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start displaying the jackpot ending image. The jackpot ending image is stored in the video RAM of the display control device 45. The jackpot ending display process executed in step S3112 will be described later.

In step S3113, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display high probability / support state transition command has been received. If the high-probability display support state transition command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3114, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3115.

In step S3114, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the high-probability / support state transition display process described later.

In step S3115, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display low probability / support state transition command has been received. If the low-probability display support state transition command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3116, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3116, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the display low probability / support state transition process described later. This is the end of this process.

Returning to FIG. 42, in step S3003, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the stop symbol and proceeds to step S3004. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines a predetermined stop symbol from the selectable stop symbol group determined by the display variation pattern designation command received from the sub control device 262. If it is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, a predetermined stop symbol is determined from the odd symbol or the even symbol. If it is a deviation variation pattern, a predetermined stop symbol is determined from the front-back deviation symbol, the deviation symbol other than the front-rear, and the complete deviation.

In step S3004, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to step S3005.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern designation command received from the sub control device 262. For example, when the command indicates the jackpot normal reach A, the variable display mode corresponding to the jackpot normal reach A is determined. Each of the above-mentioned variable display modes is stored in the program ROM of the display control device 45.

In step S3005, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines an auxiliary effect (display mode of a suggestion image such as a message provided and displayed to the player), and proceeds to step S3006. The suggestion image is an image suggesting that the symbol variation display executed by the third symbol display device 42 may be a jackpot combination.

In step S3006, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display image of the third symbol display device 42.

Specifically, when the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the symbol variation display image on the third symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol sequences L, M are in accordance with the variation display mode determined in step S3004. , R, the third symbol display device 42 is displayed and controlled so that the symbol variation display of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ is finally stopped and displayed according to the stop symbol determined in step S3003. ..

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also performs display image control for displaying a jackpot round image on the third symbol display device 42. If it is a jackpot round image, an image showing the current number of rounds is displayed together with a privilege image displayed during the jackpot round. Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also performs display image control for displaying the resident image on the third symbol display device 42 if there is a resident image displayed on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S3007, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the hold display control for executing the hold display on the third symbol display device 42.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a process corresponding to the display hold display command received from the sub control device 262. When the display hold display command received from the sub control device 262, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 reads the hold display execution program corresponding to the hold display pattern indicated by the received display hold display command from the program ROM 552 and executes it. .. In the hold display execution program, the execution pattern of the hold display in the first to fourth hold display areas and the execution pattern of the hold display in the hold display area are predetermined.

Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a process of shifting the hold display displayed in the hold display area each time the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is completed. Specifically, when the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is completed, the hold display in the execution display area is deleted, and the first hold display area → the execution display area, the second hold display area → the first hold display area, and the third hold The hold display is shifted in the order of display area → second hold display area, fourth hold display area → third hold display area. When the number of reserved balls is 0, the reserved ball is displayed in the execution display area.

In step S3008, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the specific operation period notification process for notifying the period during which the specific operation such as volume change can be executed on the third symbol display device 42. The specific operation period notification process will be described later.

In step S3009, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a right-handed notification process for causing the player to perform a right-handed operation on the third symbol display device 42. The right-handed notification process will be described later.

In step S3010, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the next game state proximity status notification process for notifying the third symbol display device 42 that the next game state is approaching. The next game state proximity status notification process will be described later.

In step S3011, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs other processing such as demo display.

In step S3012, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed from the start of the normal process. If 1 ms or more has passed, the process returns to step S3001, and if not, the process returns to step S3008.

Next, the symbol sequence variation processing described above in step S3106 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the symbol sequence variation processing.

In step S3201, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 causes the third symbol display device 42 to display the high-speed fluctuations of the right, middle, and left main decorative symbols Sz for a predetermined time. In step S3202, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high-speed fluctuation flag indicating that the high-speed fluctuation is in progress to 1. The high-speed fluctuating flag is set in RAM 523.

In step S3203, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the variable display being executed includes reach. Specifically, it is determined based on the received display variation pattern specification command. If there is a reach, the process proceeds to step S3204, and if there is no reach, the process proceeds to step S3211.

In step S3204, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is reach timing. If it is reach timing, the process proceeds to step S3205, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3208. In step S3205, the left and right main decorative symbols Sz are stopped at a predetermined reach combination, and the central main decorative symbol Sz is continuously changed. Since the high-speed fluctuation ended at the time of this reach display, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high-speed fluctuation in-progress flag to 0 in step S3206, and in step S3207, the reach variation indicating that the reach is in progress. Set the medium flag to 1.

In step S3208, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the stop display command has been received. If the stop display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3209, otherwise the process ends. In step S3209, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 stops the main decorative symbol Sz during the reach variation, and stops the right, middle, and left main decorative symbols Sz in a predetermined combination. If there is no effect to change again at this point, the stop symbol is confirmed. As a result, in step S3210, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the reach variation flag to 0.

In step S3211, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a stop display command has been received in the non-reach variable display. If the stop display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3212, otherwise the process ends. In step S3212, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 stops the right, middle, and left main decorative symbols Sz in a predetermined combination. If there is no effect to change again at this point, the stop symbol is confirmed. As a result, in step S3213, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high-speed fluctuation flag to 0. This is the end of this process.

Next, the specific operation screen display process shown in step S3108 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a specific operation screen display process.

In step S3221, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the specific operation screen on the third symbol display device 42 based on the reception of the display specific operation screen display command in step S3107 described above. The specific operation screen is a screen in which the player operates the selection buttons 82 and 83 to raise or lower the volume.

In step S3222, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the player has received the selection operation command based on pressing the selection buttons 82 and 83. If the selection operation command is received, the process proceeds to step S3223, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3224. In step S3223, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a display for changing the volume on the third symbol display device 42 according to which of the selection buttons 82 and 83 is operated.

In step S3224, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a decision command based on the player pressing the decision button 81 has been received. If the decision command is received, the process proceeds to step S3225, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3226. In step S3225, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the display on the specific operation screen. That is, if the enter button 81 is pressed without pressing the selection buttons 82 and 83 while the specific operation screen is being displayed, the display of the specific operation screen is terminated.

In step S3226, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not 30 seconds have passed from the start of the display of the specific operation screen. If 30 seconds have passed, the process proceeds to step S3225 and the display of the specific operation screen is terminated. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3227.

In step S3227, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is 5 seconds before the high-speed fluctuation stop. If it is 5 seconds before the high-speed fluctuation stop, the process proceeds to step S3225, and the display of the specific operation screen is terminated. That is, the display of the specific operation screen is forcibly terminated 5 seconds before the stop of the high-speed fluctuation.

In step S3228, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect. If it is before the end 3 of the ending effect, the process proceeds to step S3225, and the display of the specific operation screen is ended. That is, the display of the specific operation screen is forcibly terminated 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect.

Next, the jackpot opening round display process shown in step S3110 described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening round display process.

In step S3231, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the jackpot opening image on the third symbol display device 42 based on the reception of the display opening command in step S3109 described above. Subsequently, in step S3232, during the period of this opening effect, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the opening right-handed explanatory information for explaining the game method in the next round game on the third symbol display device 42.

Subsequently, in step S3233, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the end timing of the opening effect has arrived. If it is the end timing of the opening effect, the process proceeds to step S3234, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3234, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display of the opening image and displays the jackpot round image. In step S3235, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the jackpot round image and displays the right-handed hit information during the round to notify the player that the right-handed hit is performed during the jackpot round. The display mode of the right-handed information during this round is displayed in a manner conspicuous to the player on the third symbol display device 42. Here, since it is displayed larger than the right-handed information displayed during the non-round, which will be described later, it is called an enlarged display.

In step S3236, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has won 10 balls (winning detection) at the large winning opening 32a (the detection switch) during one round, or the opening period of the large winning opening 32a is 30. Determine if seconds have passed. If 10 balls are won or 30 seconds open, the process proceeds to step S3237, otherwise the process returns to step S3234. In step S3237, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the jackpot round is the final round. If it is the final round, the process proceeds to step S3238, otherwise the process returns to step S3234.

In step S3238, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display of the jackpot round image. Subsequently, in step S3239, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display (enlarged display) of the right-handed information during the round. This is the end of this process.

Next, the jackpot ending display process shown in step S3112 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending display process.

In step S3241, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the jackpot ending image on the third symbol display device 42 based on the reception of the display ending command in step S3111 described above. Further, in step S3242, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the jackpot round flag indicating that the jackpot ending effect is being executed to 1.

Further, in step S3243, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the ending specific operation acceptance flag indicating that the specific operation is being accepted during the ending period to 1, and proceeds to step S3244. The specific operation is a volume change operation executed by pressing the enter button 81 during the ending period.

In step S3244, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the high probability / support state transition flag or the low probability / support state transition flag is 1. If the high probability / support state transition flag or the low probability / support state transition flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S3245, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3251.

In step S3245, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 notifies the player that the game method in the high probability / support state, etc., which shifts after the ending effect, is right-handed. Display on 42. This ending right-handed information is displayed in a manner that is less noticeable to the player than the right-handed information during the round. For example, the right-handed information during the ending is displayed in a sufficiently smaller size than the right-handed information during the round. In addition to displaying right-handed information during the ending, a countdown display that counts down the ending period is also performed.

In step S3246, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is 3 seconds before the end of the ending period. If it is 3 seconds before the end of the ending period, the process proceeds to step S3247, and if not, this process ends.

In step S3247, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 uses the right-handed information during the ending to display the next game state proximity information to the third symbol display device 42 to notify the player that the next game state is approaching. .. The next game state is a game state that shifts after the end of the ending effect, and here, it is a high probability / support state.

Further, in step S3248, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the ending specific operation acceptance flag indicating that the acceptance of the specific operation during the ending period has been completed in response to the fact that it is 3 seconds before the end of the ending period. Set to 0 and proceed to step S3249.

In step S3249, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the end timing of the ending period has come. When the end timing of the ending period is reached, the process proceeds to step S4250, and if not, the present process is terminated.

In step S4250, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display of the next game state proximity information using the right-handed information during the ending. At the same time, the countdown display of the ending period ends when the count time expires. In step S4251, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the jackpot ending flag to 0. This is the end of this process.

Next, the high-probability / support state transition display process shown in step S3114 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a high probability / support state transition display process.

In step S3261, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the high probability / support state transition flag is 0 based on the reception of the display high probability / support state transition command in step S3113 described above. do. That is, it is determined whether or not the game state at the time of winning the probability change jackpot was a high probability / support state. If the high-probability / support state transition flag is 0 (that is, the probability-changing jackpot is won in the low-probability state), the process proceeds to step S3622, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3263.

In step S3622, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high probability / support state transition flag to 1. In step S3623, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the jackpot ending flag is 0. If the jackpot ending flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S3264, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3266.

In step S3264, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the background screen at the time of transition to the high probability / support state on the third symbol display device 42. In step S3265, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the right-handed information in the high probability / support state on the third symbol display device 42. The high-probability / support state right-handed information is displayed in a manner that makes it more noticeable to the player than the ending right-handed information. For example, the right-handed information in the high probability / support state is enlarged and displayed from the right-handed information in the ending.

In step S3226, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the high probability / support state. In this embodiment, the high probability / support state is assumed to end with the number of fluctuations: 100 times. If it is the end timing of the high probability / support state, the process proceeds to step S3267, and if not, the present process is terminated.

In step S3267, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the enlarged display of the right-handed information in the high probability / support state. In step S3268, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high probability / support state transition flag to 0. This is the end of this process.

Next, the low-probability / support state transition display process shown in step S3116 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a low probability / support state transition display process.

In step S3271, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the high probability / support state transition flag is 1 based on the reception of the low probability / support state transition flag in step S3115 described above. If the high probability / support state transition flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S3272, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3274.

In step S3272, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high probability / support state transition flag to 0, and proceeds to step S3273. In step S3273, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the low probability / support state transition flag to 1.

In step S3274, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the jackpot ending flag is 0. If the jackpot ending flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S3275, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3276.

In step S3275, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the screen in the low probability / support state on the third symbol display device 42. Further, in step S3276, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the right-handed information in the low probability / support state on the third symbol display device 42. The low-probability / support state right-handed information is displayed in a manner more conspicuous to the player than the ending right-handed information, like the high-probability / support state right-handed information.

In step S3277, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the end timing of the low probability / support state has arrived. If it is the end timing of the low probability / support state, the process proceeds to step S3278, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3279.

In step S3278, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the right-handed information in the low probability / support state from the third symbol display device 42. In step S3279, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the low probability / support state transition flag to 0. This is the end of this process.

Next, the specific operation period notification process shown in step S3008 described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating a specific operation period notification process.

In step S3301, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a normal screen display command has been received. If the normal screen display command is received, the process proceeds to step S3302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3302, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the information during the specific operation period on the third symbol display device 42. The information during the specific operation period is information for notifying the player that the specific operation using the enter button 81 can be executed. The specific operation is, for example, an operation of pressing the enter button 81 to display the operation screen for changing the volume.

In step S3303, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the demo screen display command has been received. If the demo screen display command is received, the process proceeds to step S3302 to display the information during the specific operation period, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3304.

In step S3304, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display opening command has been received. If the display opening command is received, the process proceeds to step S3305. If not, the process proceeds to step S3306.

In step S3305, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the information display timing during the specific operation period described above has been reached in the jackpot opening effect. The display timing of the information during the specific operation period in the jackpot opening effect is the timing 5 seconds after the start of the jackpot opening effect. If it is the display timing, the process proceeds to step S3302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3306.

In step S3306, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display variation pattern designation command has been received. If the display variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3307, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3307, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the high probability / support state transition flag is 1. When the high probability / support state transition flag is 1, since the high probability / support state is in progress, a specific operation such as volume change cannot be performed. Therefore, this process is terminated, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3308.

In step S3308, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the end-of-term proximity information of the specific operation period on the third symbol display device 42. The end-of-specification proximity information of the specific operation period is information that informs the player that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching. The specific operation is, for example, an operation for changing the volume.

In step S3309, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the display of the proximity information at the end of the specific operation period. When the end timing is reached, the process proceeds to step S3310, and if not, the present process is terminated.

In step S3310, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the end-of-term proximity information of the specific operation period from the third symbol display device 42, and ends this process.

In step S3311, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display ending command has been received. If the display ending command is received, the process proceeds to step S3312, and if not, this process ends.

In step S3312, the CPU 521 of the table control device 45 determines whether or not the high probability / support state transition flag or the low probability / support state transition flag is 1. That is, it is determined whether or not the game state to be transferred next to the ending effect is a high probability / support state or a low probability / support state. If the high-probability / support state transition flag or the low-probability / support state transition flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S3308, and the end-of-term proximity information of the specific operation period is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. If neither the high probability / support state transition flag nor the low probability / support state is 1 (0), the process proceeds to step S3313.

In step S3313, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 shifts to the normal low-probability state after the end of the ending effect, so that the information during the specific operation period is transmitted to the third symbol display device 42 during the ending period as well as during the jackpot round. indicate. This is the end of this process.

Next, the display mode of the third symbol display device 42 during the specific operation period will be described with reference to FIG. 51. 51 (a) to 51 (e) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the third symbol display device 42 during the specific operation period.

During the period when the normal screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, the player presses the enter button 81 to perform a specific operation such as changing the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24. The period. The sound output from the sound output unit 24 is a sound output at the start of the variation display on the third symbol display device 42, such as during the variation display, during the jackpot game state, or during the advantageous gaming state after the end of the jackpot. be.

The third symbol display device 42 is specified to notify the player that a specific operation such as a volume change can be executed during the period when the normal screen 43a is displayed as shown in (a). Information 44a is displayed during the operation period. For example, it is the character information of "volume changeable" displayed on the upper right of the normal screen 43a of the third symbol display device 42.

Further, the third symbol display device 42 displays the information 44a during the specific operation period even during the period when the demo screen 43b is displayed as shown in (d). The demo screen 43b may be a still image or a moving image.

When the player presses the enter button 81 during the period in which the information 44a during the specific operation period is displayed on the normal screen 43a or the demo screen 43b, the third symbol display device 42 is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 as shown in (b). The specific operation screen 44b for the volume change operation is displayed. The specific operation screen 44b may be displayed in place of the normal screen 43a or the demo screen 43b, or may be displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the normal screen 43a or the demo screen 43b.

The specific operation screen 44b includes a change information display unit 44c in which information that can be changed by the specific operation is displayed, and an operation method display unit 44d that indicates the method of the specific operation to the player. The change information display unit 44c is a volume display unit that indicates the current volume and the range in which the volume can be changed in the case of a volume change operation screen, for example. The operation method display unit 44d is a volume change method display unit that illustrates an operation method of volume change using, for example, the enter button 81 and the selection buttons 82 and 83. In the operation method display unit 44d, as a volume changing method, the volume is determined by pressing the enter button 81, the volume is decreased by pressing the left selection button 82, and the volume is increased by pressing the right selection button 83. Is illustrated.

When the player presses the right selection button 83, the change information display unit 44c changes the current volume (the volume of the third stage of the five stages) to the next higher volume as shown in (c). The situation is displayed. When the player presses the left selection button 82, the change information display unit 44c displays a state in which the current volume is changed to the next lower volume.

When the player presses the enter button 81, the third symbol display device 42 displays the normal screen 43a instead of the specific operation screen 44b as shown in (e).

Next, a display mode during the specific operation period during the high-speed fluctuation of the main decorative symbol Sz will be described with reference to FIG. 52. 52 (a) to 52 (h) are diagrams for explaining the display mode during the specific operation period during the high-speed fluctuation of the main decorative symbol Sz.

As shown in (a), the normal screen 43a is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, and the information 44a during the specific operation period indicating "volume can be changed" is displayed on the upper right of the normal screen 43a. There is. When the start condition is satisfied, as shown in (b), the display screen 42a displays the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c instead of the normal screen 43a. At the same time that the normal screen 43a is switched to the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c, the information 44a during the specific operation period is switched to the proximity information 44f at the end of the specific operation period. The end-of-specification proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is information for notifying the player that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching. For example, information that suggests that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching is added to the information 44a during the specific operation period. Specifically, for example, as shown in (b) to (d), the surroundings of the character image of "volume changeable" blinks in different colors at predetermined time intervals, suggesting that the end timing is approaching. do. The blinking display may be displayed at regular time intervals, but may be displayed at shorter intervals as the end timing approaches. As a result, the player can realize that the end timing is approaching, although the specific operation is being performed.

As shown in (e), the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is deleted at a predetermined timing before the high-speed fluctuation ends. That is, the operation of changing the volume (pressing the enter button 81) is possible even during high-speed fluctuation, but must be executed during the period in which the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is displayed at the latest. The timing at which the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is deleted is the timing immediately before the screen 43c during high-speed fluctuation is switched to the left symbol stop screen 43d (see (e) and (f)). As a result, it is possible to reliably show the player whether the fluctuation display during high-speed fluctuation is completely off or reach.

The left symbol stop screen 43d becomes the all symbol stop screen 43e after a predetermined time. When the stop symbol is completely removed on the all symbol stop screen 43e, the all symbol stop screen 43e returns to the normal screen 43a as shown in (i) unless the start condition is not held as shown in (g). .. As shown in (i), the normal screen 43a is the same as the all symbol stop screen 43e, but the information 44a is displayed again during the specific operation period. On the other hand, even if the stop symbol is completely off on the all symbol stop screen 43e, if the start condition is suspended as shown in (h), the high-speed change from the all symbol stop screen 43e as shown in (j). The middle screen 43c is replaced, and the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is displayed, and the display mode after (b) described above is repeated.

In this way, the player can recognize to what timing during the high-speed fluctuation the specific operation such as the volume change is possible by looking at the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period.

Next, the display mode during the specific operation period after the reach is established will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (o) are diagrams for explaining the display mode during the specific operation period after the reach is established.

In the normal reach display screen 43f shown in (a) and the advanced reach display screen 43g shown in (b), the volume cannot be changed during the reach display period, so that the information 44a is hidden during the specific operation period. On the all symbol stop screen 43e shown in (c), it is shown that the result of the reach display is a jackpot combination. Information 44a is hidden during the specific operation period even while the all symbol stop screen 43 is displayed. After the jackpot combination is confirmed, the all symbol stop screen 43 is switched to the opening screen 43h. After the opening information 44f (for example, character information for congratulating the player such as "Congratulations") for notifying the player of the establishment of the jackpot is displayed on the opening screen 43, the round game shown in (e) is displayed. 44g of right-handed explanation information during the opening (for example, character information "Aim at the right" and an illustration of a right arrow) is displayed, which explains the operation method inside to the player during the opening. Even while the opening screen 43 is being displayed, the information 44a is not displayed during the specific operation period during the periods (d) and (e). This is to ensure that this information is shown to the player.

The information 44a during the specific operation period continues to be displayed from the timing of the end of the display period of the opening right-handed information 44g shown in (e) to the end of the jackpot round state. That is, in the period at the end of the display period of the right-handed information 44g during the opening and the period from the start of the jackpot round state shown in (f) to the end of the jackpot round state shown in (g), the information 44a during the specific operation period. Is displayed.

Specifically, on the round screen 43i shown in (g), the right-handed hit information 44h during the round indicating that the player is right-handed during the jackpot round state and the progress of the jackpot round state are displayed. The information 44a during the specific operation period is displayed together with the round number information 44i shown. The right-handed information 44h during the round is, for example, information that clearly indicates that the right-handed character is right-handed in large characters or illustrations. The round number information 44i indicates that it is the first round.

Further, on the round screen 43i shown in (h), the information 44a during the specific operation period is displayed together with the right-handed information 44h during the round and the round number information 44i indicating the final round (16th round).

After the end of the final round, the round screen 43i is replaced with the ending screen 43j shown in (i). On the ending screen 43j, ending information 44j indicating that it is the ending period is displayed. Further, on the ending screen 43j, countdown information for counting down the ending time is displayed.

The ending information 44j includes, for example, the ending countdown information 44v shown in (i) to (o), the next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (i), the manufacturer information 44x shown in (j), and (k) ( It is composed of the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y shown in l) and the immersive prevention information 44z shown in (m) to (o).

The ending countdown information 44v is a display for counting down the ending time. The ending countdown information 44v is counted down, for example, by 1 second with the passage of time. For example, (i) is displayed as "ending time: 35 seconds after" because it is immediately after the start of the ending period, and (j) is displayed as "ending time: 25 seconds after" because 10 seconds have passed from the start of the ending. In (k), "Ending time: 20 seconds after" is displayed because 15 seconds have passed from the start of the ending, and in (l), "Ending time: 19 seconds after" is displayed because 16 seconds have passed from the start of the ending. , (M) displays "Ending time: 3 seconds after" because 32 seconds have passed from the start of the ending, and (n) displays "Ending time: 2 seconds after" because 33 seconds have passed since the start of the ending. In o), since 34 seconds have passed from the start of the ending, "Ending time: 1 second after" is displayed.

The next game state suggestion information 44w suggests that the game state after the end of the ending period is a probabilistic state, or suggests that it is a normal state with a support state. Here, it is suggested that the next high probability / support state occurs due to the character information "one more time". Next, when a low probability / support state occurs, the text information "chance!" Is displayed. The next game state suggestion information 44w is displayed for, for example, 10 seconds.

The manufacturer information 44x is, for example, a logo indicating the manufacturer (for example, character information such as "SANYO"). The manufacturer information 44x is displayed for, for example, 5 seconds. The card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is, for example, an illustration showing a prepaid card and a character image such as "Please be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card". The card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is displayed for, for example, 10 seconds. The immersive prevention information 44z is character information such as, for example, "Pachinko and pachislot are games that are moderately enjoyed." The entanglement prevention information 44z is displayed for, for example, 10 seconds.

In this way, a series of ending information 44j is displayed on the ending screen 43j for 35 seconds.

On the ending screen 43j, the ending right-handed information 44k, which is displayed in a mode that is less noticeable to the player than the round-time right-handed information 44h, is displayed. For example, the ending right-handed information 44k is displayed in a size sufficiently smaller than the round-time right-handed information 44h. As a result, the player is given the illusion that the right-handed game during the round is over. This makes it easier to prevent the player from hitting right during the ending period.

On the ending screen 43j, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is displayed. The specific operation period proximity information 44e is displayed, for example, from the start timing of the ending effect shown in (i) of the ending effect to the final timing of the ending effect shown in (l). If the jackpot that includes the ending period is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot with a support status, the specific operation cannot be performed during the high-probability or low-probability support status that is transferred after the end of the ending period. For example, when the sound output from the sound output unit 24 in the high-probability or low-probability support state is larger than the previous game state in order to arouse the interest of the player, the ending period is changed. Since it is the last opportunity of, displaying that the end timing of the voice change operation is approaching can help the player to play comfortably.

The next game state proximity information 44l is displayed on the ending screen 43j. The next game state proximity information 44l is information for notifying the player that the timing for shifting to the next game state is approaching. For example, the next game state proximity information 44l is information that blinks and displays the periphery of the right-handed hitting information 44k during the ending. The next game state proximity information 44l is displayed for 3 seconds before the end of the ending period while the immersive prevention display 44z shown in (m) to (o) is being displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that the right-handed display may be restarted.

Next, the display mode during the specific operation period after the establishment of the reach following FIG. 53 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. 54 (a) to 54 (o) are diagrams for explaining the display mode during the specific operation period after the establishment of the reach following FIG. 53.

As shown in (a), after the ending effect of the probability variation jackpot state is completed, the high probability state screen 43k is displayed on the display screen 42a. The high-probability state screen 43k is the same as the normal screen 43a in that the main decorative symbol Sz is displayed, but the background image is displayed in such a manner that the color and display contents can be clearly distinguished from the normal screen 43a. .. On the high-probability state screen 43k, right-handed information 44m in the high-probability / support state is displayed. The right-handed information 44m in the high-probability / support state is displayed in a more conspicuous mode (enlarged mode) to the player than the right-handed information 44k during the ending.

Due to the above-mentioned ending right-handed information 44k, next game state proximity information 44l, and ending countdown information 44v, the player mistakenly performs a right-handed operation at an unnecessary timing during the ending production, and the game ball becomes a waste ball. That can be reduced. Further, based on this information, the game ball can be launched at the start timing of the high probability / support state shown in (a).

As shown in (b) to (f), the high-probability / support state right-handed information 44m includes the high-probability / support state screen 43c, the high-probability state reach display screen 43f, and all symbols after shifting to the high-probability / support state. It continues to be displayed on the stop screen 43e. The right-handed information 44m in the high probability / support state is hidden in accordance with the opening screen 43h shown in (g). After displaying the opening right-handed explanatory information 44 g shown in (j), the round right-handed right-handed information 44h is displayed.

Here, as shown in (f), the reach variation in the high probability state is determined by a combination (for example, "666") indicating an 8R normal jackpot without a support state (0 times). Therefore, since the next game state is a low probability state without a support state, the ending screen 43l shown in (k) to (m) does not display the ending right-handed information 44k or the next game state proximity information 44l. The ending countdown information 44v is displayed. With this ending countdown information 44v, it is possible to reduce the demerit caused by the player starting the left-handed game for the next game state during the period of the ending effect. That is, when a left-handed game is performed during the ending production period, the prize ball is paid out by winning the starting prize device 33a for Special Figure 1, but the ball is also entered into the out opening without winning, so the ball is held. May be reduced. If the end timing of the ending time can be appropriately grasped by the ending countdown information 44v, such a situation can be reduced.

On the ending screen 43l, the next game state proximity information 44l is not displayed, and the information 44a continues to be displayed during the specific operation period.

As shown in (n), when the ending effect is finished, the normal screen 43a, which is a low probability state without a support state, is displayed. The information 44a during the specific operation period continues to be displayed until this timing. As shown in (o), when the normal screen 43a is replaced with the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c, the information 44a during the specific operation period is displayed as the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period when there is a hold. After that, the screen display will be the same as that shown in FIGS. 52 (c) and later.

In this way, an appropriate mode is determined depending on whether the gaming state generated after the end of the ending effect is a high probability / support state (similar to the low probability / support state) or a low probability state without a support state. Since the right-handed information and the information 44a during the specific operation period are displayed in, the player can easily understand the timing when the right-handed operation is required and the timing when the voice can be changed.

Next, a display mode when the decision button 81 is left pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (g) are diagrams for explaining a display mode when the enter button 81 is left pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation.

As shown in (a), while the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c is being displayed, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is displayed, and the character image of "volume can be changed" is displayed blinking. When the player presses the decision button 81 at this timing, the specific operation screen 44b is displayed as shown in (b). The high-speed fluctuating screen 43c may be displayed transparently behind the specific operation screen 44b. You can perform specific operations with confidence while confirming that high-speed fluctuations are in progress.

After the specific operation screen 44b is displayed, if the player leaves the selection buttons 82 and 83 unoperated as shown in (c) and (d), the specific operation screen 44b is also displayed. The proximity information 44e at the end of the operation period is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the specific operation period will end unless a specific operation such as changing the volume is performed.

Nevertheless, when the player leaves the selection buttons 82 and 83 unoperated, the specific operation screen 44b is hidden before the left symbol stop screen 43d is displayed as shown in (e). As a result, the player can surely show the all symbol stop screen 43e shown in (f) and the normal reach display screen 43f shown in (g) even when the specific operation screen 44b is left displayed. ..

Next, a display mode when the decision button 81 and the selection buttons 82 and 83 are pressed during the specific operation period during the high-speed fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. 56. 56 (a) to 56 (g) are diagrams illustrating a display mode when the enter button 81 and the select buttons 82 and 83 are pressed during the specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation.

As shown in (a), when the player presses the enter button 81 while the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c is being displayed, the specific operation screen 44b is displayed. As shown in (b), when the selection buttons 82 and 83 are operated while the specific operation screen 44b is being displayed, the volume change is displayed on the change information display unit 43c. When the player presses the enter button 81 in this state, the screen returns to the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c at that timing as shown in (d). As a result, it is possible to sufficiently show the fluctuation display from the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c to the left symbol stop screen 43d shown in (e), the all symbol stop screen 43e shown in (f), or the normal reach screen 43f shown in (g). can.

If a specific operation is performed while the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c is being displayed, the specific operation may be set so that the specific operation cannot be performed during the period after the specific operation is performed once. This is because the time for high-speed fluctuation is short, so even if the specific operation screen 44b is displayed again, there is a high possibility that sufficient time for executing the specific operation is not left. On the other hand, when the specific operation is performed while the round screen 43i is being displayed, the specific operation screen 44b may be displayed again because there is sufficient time left to perform the specific operation again.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
When the gaming state shifts from the jackpot round gaming state to the next high probability / support state or low probability / support state, the start of the next high probability / support state, etc. from the end timing of the round game in the jackpot round gaming state. Until the timing, the display control device 45 executes the jackpot ending effect of displaying the ending screen 43j on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, and the display control device 45 performs the process of step S3241 in the jackpot ending process.
Ending right-handed information 44k that suggests to the player that the start timing of the game state that requires right-handedness such as the next high probability / support state or low probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. The display control device 45, which displays the next game state proximity information 44l and the ending countdown information 44v, has a function of performing the processes of steps S3244 to S3251 in the jackpot ending process.

According to such a configuration, when the gaming state shifts from the jackpot round gaming state to the next high probability / support state or low probability / support state, the next round game from the jackpot round gaming state ends. Until the start timing of the high probability / support state, etc., the display control device 45 executes the jackpot ending effect of displaying the ending screen 43j on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 in the process of step S3241 in the jackpot ending process. do. During the execution of the jackpot ending effect, the display control device 45 starts the game state in which right-handed hitting is required, such as the next high probability / support state or low probability / support state, in the process of step S3247 in the jackpot ending process. Displays the ending right-handed information 44k, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v, which suggests to the player that has not arrived. As a result, the player is in the jackpot round game state at the present time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed, in other words, the present time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is not yet in the next high probability / support state. Is easier to recognize. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is the next high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine described in (A1) above.

In addition, the jackpot round gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
The high probability, support state, etc. is a game state that is advantageous for the player different from the jackpot round game state, and the player acquires an advantageous game value when the player operates the game ball launch handle 18. Is a game state that enables
The right-handed information 44k during the ending, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v are information that suggests to the player that the start timing such as the high probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. Is.

According to such a configuration, the next high probability / support state, etc., which shifts from the jackpot round gaming state which is advantageous for the player, is an advantageous gaming state different from the jackpot round gaming state, and the player plays the game. It is a gaming state in which it is possible to acquire an advantageous gaming value by operating the ball launching handle 18. Therefore, the player can easily operate the game ball launching handle 18 for obtaining an advantageous game value based on the misunderstanding that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a high probability, a support state, or the like. Since this operation is performed during the jackpot round game state, the player cannot acquire this advantageous game value. However, during the execution of the jackpot ending effect, the ending right-handed information 44k, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v suggesting to the player that the start timing of the high probability / support state has not arrived. Since it is notified, it is difficult to misunderstand that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a high probability, a support state, or the like. Further, since it is possible to suppress the operation of the game ball launching handle 18 by misunderstanding that the other advantageous game value can be obtained, it is possible to reduce the waste of the operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a high probability, a support state, or the like. For example, the gaming machine described in (A2) above.

Further, in the jackpot round game state, the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 triggered by the ball entering the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is the jackpot result. Based on the above, it is a gaming state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times, in which one round is from the opening state to the closing state of the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32.
The jackpot ending effect is the next high probability, support state, etc. from the timing 3 seconds before the end of the ending period after the time when the jackpot 32a of the variable winning device 32 is closed in the final round of the jackpot round game state. This is an effect at the end of the round game state in which a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 until the start timing.

According to such a configuration, the jackpot round gaming state is the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 triggered by the ball entering the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. Is a game state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times, with one round from the opening state to the closing state of the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32, based on the result of the big hit. The jackpot ending effect is the next high probability, support state, etc. from the timing 3 seconds before the end of the ending period after the time when the jackpot 32a of the variable winning device 32 is closed in the final round of the jackpot round game state. This is an effect of displaying a predetermined image on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 until the start timing. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is the next high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine described in (A3) above.

Further, it is a ball-entry means that changes between an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the entry of the ball triggers a big hit lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. For start winning device 33b and
It is provided with a normal symbol start opening 34, which is a ball entry means for the game ball to enter, and the entry of the ball triggers a normal symbol lottery to operate the special figure 2 start winning device 33b.
The high probability, support state, etc. is a support game state in which the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the entry of the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is likely to be the winning result for operating the electric accessory of the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. And
The right-handed information 44k during the ending, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v suggest to the player that the start timing of the high probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. Is.

According to such a configuration, the start winning device 33b for Special Figure 2 is a ball-entry means that changes between an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. It triggers a big hit lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. The normal symbol start opening 34 is a ball entry means for the game ball to enter, and the entry serves as an opportunity for the ordinary symbol lottery to operate the electric accessory of the special figure 2 start winning device 33b. The high probability / support state is a support game state in which the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the entry of the starting port 34 for the normal symbol is likely to be the winning result of operating the electric accessory of the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. .. The right-handed information 44k during the ending, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v suggest to the player that the start timing of the high probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. Is. As a result, the player wants to put the game ball into the starting port 34 for the normal symbol as soon as possible in the high probability / support state, etc., and therefore during the execution of the jackpot ending effect before shifting to the high probability / support state, etc. It is easy to accidentally fire a game ball. In this regard, by looking at the next game state proximity information 44l, etc. during the execution of the jackpot ending effect, the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a high probability, support state, etc. is reduced. can do. For example, the gaming machine described in (A4) above.

Further, the high probability / support state is a gaming state in which the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be a jackpot result is higher than that in the normal gaming state.
The right-handed information 44k during the ending, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v suggest to the player that the start timing of the high probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. be.

According to such a configuration, the high probability / support state is a gaming state in which the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be a jackpot result is higher than that in the normal gaming state. The next game state proximity information 44l or the like suggests to the player that the start timing of the high probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine described in (A5) above.

Further, in the high probability / support state, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be the jackpot result and the probability that the result of the actuation lottery by the actuation lottery means will be a specific result are higher than in the normal gaming state. It is a high-probability game state with higher support,
The right-handed information 44k during the ending, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v suggest to the player that the start timing of the high probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. be.

According to such a configuration, in the high probability / support state, the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes a specific result and the probability that the result of the ordinary symbol lottery by the starting port 34 for the ordinary symbol becomes the winning result are usually. It is a game state that is higher than the game state of. The next game state proximity information 44l or the like suggests to the player that the start timing of the high probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine described in (A6) above.

Further, in the jackpot ending effect, a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined ending effect pattern.
When the result of the big hit lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the big hit result, the ending effect pattern is displayed in a different pattern according to the type of the big hit result.
The right-handed information 44k during the ending, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v have the start timing of the next high probability / support state, etc. until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the ending effect pattern. It suggests to the player that it has not arrived.

According to such a configuration, in the jackpot ending effect, a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined ending effect pattern. When the result of the big hit lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the big hit result, the ending effect pattern is displayed in a different pattern depending on the type of the big hit result. Therefore, conventionally, when the player misunderstands that the end timing of the display time of a certain image (for example, an image showing the manufacturer information) in the jackpot ending effect is the end timing of a series of jackpot ending effects. , Misunderstanding that the display time of the following image (for example, the image showing the card removal prevention information or the image showing the immersive prevention information) has been shifted to the next high probability / support state, etc. May benefit. However, in the present invention, the next game state proximity information 44l or the like does not reach the start timing of the next high probability / support state or the like until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the ending effect pattern. To the player. As a result, during the jackpot ending effect, the start timing of the next game state has not arrived due to the next game state proximity information 44l until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined ending effect pattern. As suggested, the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantages is reduced. For example, the gaming machine described in (A7) above.

Further, immediately after the end of the final round in the jackpot round game state, information suggesting to the player that the start timing of the next high probability / support state or the like has not arrived may be displayed. For example, the right-handed information 44h during the round is replaced with the right-handed information 44k during the ending immediately after the end of the final round in the jackpot round state. It is suggested to the player that the start timing of the next high probability / support state has not arrived during the period when the right-handed information 44k is displayed during the ending.

According to such a configuration, the right-handed information 44k during the ending suggests to the player that the start timing of the next high probability / support state, etc. has not arrived immediately after the end of the final round in the round game state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused as a result of erroneously recognizing that the game has shifted to the next high probability / support state immediately after the end of the final round in the round game state. For example, the gaming machine described in (A15) above.

Further, at the same time as the execution of the jackpot ending effect, information suggesting to the player that the start timing of the next high probability / support state or the like has not arrived may be displayed. For example, it is suggested to the player that the right-handed information 44k during the ending does not reach the start timing of the next high probability / support state at the same time as the execution of the jackpot ending effect.

According to such a configuration, the right-handed information 44k during the ending suggests to the player that the start timing of the next high probability, support state, etc. has not arrived at the same time as the execution of the jackpot ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused as a result of misunderstanding that the game is shifting to the next game state at the same time as the execution of the jackpot ending effect. For example, the gaming machine described in (A16) above.

Further, the next game state proximity information 44l is obtained during the execution of the jackpot ending effect and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the execution of the jackpot ending effect (3 seconds before the end of the ending period. For example, 16R probability variation (special 1) jackpot. In the case of the ending effect, 32 seconds after the start of the ending effect), it is suggested to the player that the start timing of the next high probability / support state has not arrived.

According to such a configuration, the player is informed that the start timing of the next high probability, support state, etc. has not arrived after a predetermined time has elapsed from the execution of the jackpot ending effect during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. Since it is a suggestion, it is a disadvantage that occurs as a result of misunderstanding that the jackpot ending effect is being executed, but after a predetermined time has passed from the execution of the jackpot ending effect, it has shifted to the next high probability, support state, etc. Can be reduced. For example, the gaming machine described in (A17) above.

Further, as described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
A decision button 81 by the player within a predetermined period (for example, a period from the start of display of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c of the identification information fluctuation display to 5 seconds before the stop of the high-speed fluctuation, a period up to 3 seconds before the end in the ending period, etc.) When the operation of is performed, at least the specific operation screen 44b for volume control for performing the volume control operation using the enter button 81 is displayed, and the display of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c during the identification information fluctuation display. Medium Step S3221 in the specific operation screen display process of the display control device 45, which does not display the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume when the enter button 81 is operated outside the predetermined period (for example, the reach display period). Processing and
A display control device that notifies the player of the end-of-specification period proximity information 44e that suggests to the player that the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b for volume control has not arrived during a predetermined period. It includes the process of step S3308 in the specific operation period notification process of 45.

According to such a configuration, the display control device 45 stops the high-speed fluctuation from the start of the display of the high-speed changing screen 43c of the identification information fluctuation display within a predetermined period in the process of step S3221 in the specific operation screen display processing. When the player operates the enter button 81 during the period up to 5 seconds before the end period or the period up to 3 seconds before the end of the ending period, at least the volume adjustment operation using the enter button 81 is to be performed. When the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume of the above is displayed and the enter button 81 is operated outside the predetermined period (for example, the period after the end of the reach display period or the ending period is 3 seconds), The specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is not displayed. In the process of step S3308 in the specific operation period notification process, the display control device 45 informs the player that the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume has not arrived during the predetermined period. The player is notified of the suggested end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period. As a result, the player has not yet reached the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment at the present time during the identification information fluctuation display, in other words, the current time during the identification information fluctuation display is the volume. It becomes easy to recognize that the specific operation screen 44b for adjustment can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume can be displayed at the present time. For example, the gaming machine described in (B1) above.

In addition, the specific operation period end proximity information 44e includes a specific operation possible period notification image (for example, character information such as "volume changeable") that notifies that the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment is a displayable period. ..

According to such a configuration, the specific operation period end proximity information 44a is a specific operation possible period notification image (for example, "volume can be changed") that notifies that the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment is a displayable period. Character information) is included. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the predetermined period during the display of the high-speed changing screen 43c during the display of the identification information variation is the period during which the volume adjustment operation can be performed. For example, the gaming machine described in (B2) above.

Further, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is, for example, when the specific operation screen 44b for volume control is displayed within a predetermined period during the display of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c during the identification information fluctuation display, after that. A non-notification period may be provided in which the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is not notified.

According to such a configuration, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is displayed on the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment within a predetermined period during the display of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c during the identification information fluctuation display. In that case, after that, a non-notification period is provided in which the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is not notified. As a result, the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment is frequently displayed within a predetermined period during the display of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c during the identification information variation display (that is, the specific operation screen for the player to adjust the volume). By performing the operation of displaying 44b), it is possible to reduce that the identification information variation display is not sufficiently seen by the player. For example, the gaming machine described in (B4) above.

Further, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period may be continuously notified, for example, when the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed within the jackpot ending period.

According to such a configuration, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period may be continuously notified, for example, when the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed within the jackpot ending period. When the jackpot ending period is long, the player can easily correct the content even after performing a specific operation for displaying the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume. For example, the gaming machine described in (B5) above.

The proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is also displayed while the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is being displayed.

According to such a configuration, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is displayed even during the display of the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume. As a result, the player recognizes the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b even when he / she is looking at the specific operation screen 44b after seeing the end proximity information 44e of the specific operation period and operating the enter button 81. It becomes easier to do. For example, the gaming machine described in (B6) above.

Further, even while the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is being displayed, the image being displayed during a predetermined period (for example, the screen during high-speed fluctuation 43c) can be visually recognized.

According to such a configuration, the image being displayed can be visually recognized during a predetermined period even while the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is being displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize what the image being displayed (for example, the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c) will look like during the display of the specific operation screen 44b during a predetermined period. For example, the gaming machine described in (B7) above.

Further, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period can be displayed within the display period of the high-speed changing screen 43c during the identification information fluctuation display period, and the high-speed changing screen 43c is displayed even during the identification information fluctuation display period. After the period has passed, it cannot be displayed.

According to such a configuration, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period can be displayed within the display period of the high-speed changing screen 43c during the identification information fluctuation display period, and is high-speed even during the identification information fluctuation display period. After the display period of the changing screen 43c has elapsed, the display is disabled. As a result, even during the identification information fluctuation display period, after the end of the high-speed fluctuation period, the period is the period that the player wants to see / the player wants to see (variation display result display and reach effect). Is displayed, which can reduce inconvenience. For example, the gaming machine described in (B8) above.

Further, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is a case where the jackpot round game state shifts to the next high probability / support state, etc., and the specific operation screen 44b cannot be displayed in the next high probability / support state, etc. If so, it can be displayed during the ending effect in the jackpot round game state.

According to such a configuration, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is a case where the jackpot round game state shifts to the next high probability / support state, etc., and the specific operation is performed in the next high probability / support state, etc. When the screen 44b cannot be displayed, it can be displayed during the ending effect in the jackpot round game state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the inconvenience caused by the inability to adjust the volume after the jackpot round game state shifts to the next high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine described in (B9) above.

Further, as described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
In the jackpot round game state, the process of step S3235 in the jackpot opening round display process of the display control device 45, which notifies the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed hitting, and
In the next high probability / support state or low probability / support state that occurs after the end of the jackpot round game state, the height of the display control device 45 that notifies the player that the game is to be played by right-handed. The processing of step S3265 in the probability / support state transition display processing or the processing of step S3276 in the low probability / support state transition display processing,
When shifting from the jackpot round game state to the next high probability / support state, etc., from the end timing of the right-handed game in the jackpot round game state to the start timing of the next high probability / support state, etc., the third symbol display device 42 The process of step S3241 in the jackpot ending process of the display control device 45, which executes the jackpot ending effect of displaying the ending information 44j on the display screen 42a of the display control device 45, is provided.
In the process of step S3235 in the jackpot opening round display process, the display control device 45 notifies the right-handed hit in the first mode (for example, the enlarged right-handed hit information 44h in the round) during the right-handed game in the jackpot round game state. In the process of step S3244 in the jackpot ending display process, while the jackpot ending effect is being executed, the right in the second mode (reduced display of right-handed information in the ending 44k) changed to a mode different from the first mode. Make a hit notification.

According to such a configuration, the display control device 45 notifies the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed in the jackpot round game state in the process of step S3235 in the jackpot opening round display process. Notify. The display control device 45 has the next high probability that occurs after the end of the jackpot round gaming state in the process of step S3265 in the high probability / support state transition display process or the process of step S3276 in the low probability / support state transition display process. In the support state or the like, right-handed notification is performed to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed. When the display control device 45 shifts from the jackpot round game state to the next high probability / support state in the process of step S3241 in the jackpot ending process, the display control device 45 starts from the end timing of the right-handed game in the jackpot round game state to the next. Until the start timing of the high probability / support state, etc., the jackpot ending effect of displaying the ending information 44j on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 is executed. In the process of step S3235 in the jackpot opening round display process, the display control device 45 performs a right-handed notification in the first mode (enlarged display) during the right-handed game in the jackpot round game state, and steps in the jackpot ending display process. In the process of S3244, during the execution of the jackpot ending effect, the right-handed notification is performed in the second mode (reduced display) changed to a mode different from the first mode. As a result, the player is currently in the jackpot round game state due to the difference in the notification mode between the right-handed notification that is performed until the jackpot ending effect is executed in the jackpot round game state and the right-handed notification that is being executed during the jackpot ending effect. It is easy to notice that the jackpot ending effect is being executed, not the right-handed game, and it is not the execution timing of the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the current time during which the jackpot ending effect is being executed is the execution timing of the right-handed game. For example, the gaming machine described in (C1) above.

Further, the jackpot round game state is 1 from the opening state to the closing state of the jackpot 32a of the variable winning device 32 based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 being the jackpot result. It is a round game state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times. The following high probability / support state is an advantageous gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot round gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, based on the result of the jackpot lottery being the jackpot result. The jackpot ending effect is executed from the end timing of the final round in the jackpot round gaming state to the start timing of the next high probability / support state when shifting from the jackpot round gaming state to the high probability / support state. be. The display control device 45 performs a right-handed notification in the first mode (enlarged displayed round right-handed information 44h) during the jackpot round game, and during the execution of the jackpot ending effect, the second mode (reduced display ending). Right-handed information 44k) is used to notify right-handed.

According to such a configuration, the jackpot round game state is closed after the jackpot 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. It is a round game state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times until the state is set to one round. The following high probability / support state is an advantageous gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot round gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, based on the result of the jackpot lottery being the jackpot result. The jackpot ending effect is executed from the end timing of the final round in the jackpot round gaming state to the start timing of the next high probability / support state when shifting from the jackpot round gaming state to the high probability / support state. be. The display control device 45 performs a right-handed notification in the first mode (enlarged display) during the jackpot round game, and performs a right-handed notification in the second mode (reduced display) during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. As a result, the player is currently executing the jackpot ending effect, not during the jackpot round game, due to the difference in the notification mode between the right-handed notification during the jackpot round game and the right-handed notification during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. , It becomes easy to notice that it is not the execution timing of the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the current time during which the jackpot ending effect is being executed is the execution timing of the right-handed game in a high probability / support state or the like. For example, the gaming machine described in (C2) above.

Further, the right-handed notification mode (second mode) in the jackpot ending effect is less noticeable to the player than the right-handed notification mode (first mode) in the jackpot round gaming state. For example, the ending right-handed information 44k is a display mode smaller than the round-time right-handed information 44h.

According to such a configuration, the right-handed notification mode (second aspect) in the jackpot ending effect is less noticeable to the player than the right-handed notification mode (first aspect) in the jackpot round gaming state. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize that the execution timing of the right-handed game is during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. The disadvantage caused by misidentification can be reduced. For example, the gaming machine described in (C4) above.

Further, in the process of step S3247 in the jackpot ending display process, the display control device 45 has the second to first aspects in the final stage of the jackpot ending effect (for example, the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect to the end). Right-handed notification is performed in the third aspect suggesting that the player returns to. For example, the next game state proximity information 44l in which the right-handed information 44j is blinked and displayed during the ending is displayed.

According to such a configuration, in the process of step S3247 in the jackpot ending display process, the display control device 45 is the first in the final stage of the jackpot ending effect (for example, the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect to the end). Right-handed notification is performed in the third aspect, which suggests returning from the second aspect to the first aspect. As a result, right-handed notification can be quickly resumed at the timing when the jackpot ending effect shifts to the next high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine described in (C5) above.

The display pattern of the ending information 44j may be further increased as compared with the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the display pattern of the ending information 44j is different depending on the hit type and the fluctuation pattern type. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 (a) is a special figure 1 jackpot lottery table of the second embodiment, and FIG. 57 (b) is a special figure 2 jackpot lottery table. FIG. 58 is a table for setting an ending effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "0" to "9", the decorative symbols are aligned with "7", which is a 16R probability variation jackpot. .. When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "10" to "39", the decorative symbols are 8R with odd symbols excluding "7" such as "1", "3", "5", and "9". It is a probability change jackpot. When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "40" to "89", the decorative symbol is an 8R normal jackpot with even-numbered symbols such as "2", "4", "6", and "8". When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "90" to "99", it is a 2R probability variation jackpot in which the decorative symbols are aligned with "341". Support status is attached 100 times even for 2R probability change jackpot.

As shown in (b), in the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "0" to "19", the decorative symbols are aligned with "7", which is a 16R probability variation jackpot. When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "20" to "49", the decorative symbols are 8R with odd symbols excluding "7" such as "1", "3", "5", and "9". It is a probability change jackpot. When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "50" to "89", the decorative symbol is an 8R normal jackpot with even-numbered symbols such as "2", "4", "6", and "8". When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "90" to "99", it is a 2R probability variation jackpot in which the decorative symbols are aligned with "341". Support status is attached 100 times even for 2R probability change jackpot.

The display control device 45 determines the jackpot type and the fluctuation pattern type based on the display variation pattern designation command and the stop display command received from the sub control device 262. Since the stop display command is a command conversion of the decorative symbol specification command, it includes information for identifying the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 58, the ROM 522 of the display control device 45 stores an ending effect pattern setting table in which the jackpot type, the variation pattern type, and the ending effect pattern are associated with each other. The correspondence between the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern type, and the ending effect pattern will be described. In the following, the case where the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting winning device 33a is a big hit is referred to as "special 1", and the lottery result based on the winning of the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b is called a big hit. This case is called "special 2".

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 1) and the fluctuation pattern type is Super Reach C, D (variation time: 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 35 seconds, and the ending effect pattern is It is a pattern that is displayed in the order of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the insertion prevention information 44z. This ending effect pattern is the same as the ending effect pattern described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 53. This ending effect pattern is the effect pattern most often seen by the player in the case of a 16R probability variation (special 1) jackpot.

The display time of the next game state suggestion information 44w is 10 seconds, the display time of the manufacturer information 44x is 5 seconds, the display time of the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is 10 seconds, and the immersive prevention information 44z. The display time is 10 seconds. In FIG. 58, the next game state suggestion information 44w is abbreviated as "one more time" from the display content, the manufacturer information 44x is abbreviated as "logo" from the display content, and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is abbreviated as "logo" from the display content. It is abbreviated as "prepaid card", and the immersive prevention information 44z is abbreviated as "moderately enjoyed" from the displayed contents.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 1) and the fluctuation pattern type is super reach A, B (variation time: 30 seconds), an ending effect pattern different from the above is adopted. That is, the pattern is displayed in the order of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the privilege video 44n. The bonus video 44n is a video that cannot be seen during the reach or the jackpot round, and is a video that attracts the player's interest. Since it is rare that the 16R probability change (special 1) jackpot is achieved in Super Reach A and B, the player's satisfaction can be enhanced by showing the privilege video 44n instead of the immersive prevention information 44z.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 1) and the fluctuation pattern type is Super Reach E, F (variation time: 120 seconds), an ending effect pattern different from the above is adopted. That is, the pattern is displayed in the order of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the light emission gaze prevention information 44o. The light emission gaze prevention information 44o is, for example, character information such as "Please be careful not to keep looking at strong light" or an illustration corresponding thereto. If you get a 16-probability change (Special 1) jackpot in Super Reach E and F, the fluctuation time is long, a confrontation video that emits a strong light in the development reach production is displayed, and it is intense at the end of the development reach production. Since the screen (strong light emitting flashing screen 43g-1 described with reference to FIG. 14) is accompanied by a revival effect that causes a heavy burden on the player's eyes, the light emitting gaze prevention information is used instead of the immersive prevention information 44z. By showing 44o, the player stops gazing at the screen during the period when the light emitting gaze prevention information 44o is displayed to rest his eyes, or after moving to the next game state, from the screen more than before. It is possible to make it easier to take measures in consideration of the burden on the eyes such as separating the face. In FIG. 58, the light emission gaze prevention information o is abbreviated as "strong light" from the display content.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 2) and the fluctuation pattern type is super reach A, B, super reach C, D, super reach E, F, it is the above-mentioned 16R probability variation (special 1). It is basically the same as the ending effect pattern in the case of Super Reach A, B, Super Reach C, D, Super Reach E, F, except that the manufacturer information 44x is omitted. As a result, even in the case of a special 2 big hit, it is possible to show the player an ending effect that takes into consideration the difference in the variation pattern type. Further, by omitting the manufacturer information 44x from the ending effect pattern in the case of the special 2 big hit, it is possible to shorten the time burden given to the player when the big hits such as the special 2 big hit occur continuously. ..

The jackpot type is 8R probability variation (special 1), and the fluctuation pattern types are normal reach A, B (variation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (variation time: 30 seconds), super reach C, D (variation time). : 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 25 seconds, and the ending effect pattern is a pattern displayed in the order of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y. be.

The jackpot type is 8R probability variation (special 2), and the fluctuation pattern types are normal reach A, B (variation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (variation time: 30 seconds), super reach C, D (variation time). : 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 20 seconds, and the ending effect pattern is a pattern displayed in the order of the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y.

The jackpot type is 8R normal (special 1), and the fluctuation pattern types are normal reach A, B (variation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (variation time: 30 seconds), super reach C, D (variation time). : 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 25 seconds, and the ending effect pattern is a pattern displayed in the order of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y. be. In FIG. 58, the next game state suggestion information 44w is a character image of "chance!", Which suggests that the next game state is a low probability (normal) state but the support state is attached 100 times. Is abbreviated as.

The jackpot type is 8R normal (special 2), and the fluctuation pattern types are normal reach A, B (variation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (variation time: 30 seconds), super reach C, D (variation time). : 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 20 seconds, and the ending effect pattern is a pattern displayed in the order of the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y. In FIG. 58, the next game state suggestion information 44w is a character image of "See you again!", Which suggests that the next game state is a low probability (normal) state and does not have a support state. Let's meet. "

When the jackpot type is 2R probability variation (special 1), the variation pattern type is a pattern (variation time: 15 seconds) that aligns with "341" without going through the reach, and the ending time is predetermined to be 5 seconds. The ending effect pattern is, for example, a pattern in which only the manufacturer information 44x is displayed. Even if the manufacturer information 44x is displayed after the symbols are aligned in "341", it is difficult for the player to notice that it is in the jackpot state, so the player shifts to the high probability / support state in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to notice. Can be made to.

When the jackpot type is 2R probability variation (special 2), the variation pattern type is a pattern (variation time: 15 seconds) that aligns with "341" without going through the reach, and the ending time is predetermined to be 5 seconds. The ending effect pattern is a pattern in which only the privilege information 44p is displayed. The privilege information 44p is, for example, a moving image or a still image suggesting the current setting information in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting. Regardless of whether or not the player notices the jackpot state, if the current setting information can be known, the high probability and support state after that can be further enjoyed.

Since the 2R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability / support state without clearly indicating the fact to the player, the next game state suggestion information 44w is not set in the ending effect pattern. In addition, the 2R probability variation jackpot is set to a short time so that it is difficult for the game ball to open the big winning opening 32a of each round, so there is no prize ball payout, so the card removal forgetting prevention information 44z is also an ending effect. Not set in the pattern. Further, since the fluctuation time of the 2R probability variation jackpot is short and it is difficult for the player to be absorbed in the game, the insertion prevention information 44z is not set in the ending effect pattern.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to show the ending effect that is predicted to be the most appropriate for the player at that time according to the jackpot type and the fluctuation pattern type.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment,
The jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images.
The ending effect pattern differs depending on the type of jackpot round game state.

According to such a configuration, the jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images, and the ending effect pattern depends on the type of the jackpot round gaming state. By being different, it is possible to show the player a combination of images preferable to the player according to the type of the jackpot round gaming state as a jackpot ending effect. For example, the gaming machine described in (A8) above.

Further, the jackpot ending effect according to the jackpot round game state of a predetermined type (for example, 16R probability variation (special 1)) has a predetermined ending effect pattern in which a plurality of types (for example, 4 types) of images are combined in a predetermined combination. death,
The jackpot ending effect according to the jackpot round game state of another type (for example, 8R probability variation (special 1)) is different by reducing one or more images among the plurality of types of images included in the predetermined combination pattern. The ending effect pattern is composed.
Further, the jackpot ending effect according to the jackpot round game state of another type (for example, 2R probability variation (special 1)) reduces a plurality of (for example, 3 types) of the plurality of types of images included in the predetermined combination pattern. As a result, another ending effect pattern is constructed.

According to such a configuration, the jackpot ending effect according to a predetermined type of jackpot round game state has a predetermined combination pattern in which a plurality of types of images are combined in a predetermined combination, and another type of jackpot round game. In the jackpot ending effect according to the state, another combination pattern is constructed by reducing one or a plurality of images among the plurality of types of images included in the predetermined combination pattern. As a result, for the gaming machine, the processing load when determining the jackpot ending effect according to the type of jackpot round gaming state is reduced. Further, since the combination pattern of the jackpot ending effect is determined for each type of the jackpot round gaming state, it becomes easy to provide the player with the jackpot ending effect associated with the type of the jackpot round gaming state. For example, the gaming machine described in (A9) above.

In addition, the jackpot ending effect is one in which a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination.
When the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the jackpot result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the type of the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot result.
The right-handed information 44k during the ending, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v have the start timing of the next high probability / support state, etc. until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. It suggests to the player that it has not arrived.

According to such a configuration, in the jackpot ending effect, a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. When the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the jackpot result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination depending on the type of the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot result. As a result, the same jackpot result as the jackpot result that generates a certain kind of jackpot round game state is obtained, but when the type of variation pattern leading to the jackpot result is different, the same jackpot ending effect is displayed. The disadvantage can be reduced. Further, regarding the next game state proximity information 44l and the like, the player is informed that the start timing of the next high probability / support state has not arrived until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. As suggested, even if the same jackpot result is displayed but different jackpot ending effects are displayed, the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantage is reduced. For example, the gaming machine described in (A10) above.

In addition, the jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images.
The ending effect pattern differs depending on the length of time during which the identification information variation display effect based on the variation pattern is performed.
For example, in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, which is clearly shorter than other jackpots, the time is shorter than the ending effect of other jackpots because one type of ending effect pattern is used.

According to such a configuration, the jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images, and the ending effect pattern is an identification information variation display effect based on the variation pattern. It is possible to show the player a combination of images preferable to the player as a jackpot ending effect according to the length of time of the identification information variation display effect, because the combination of images is different depending on the length of time that is performed. For example, the gaming machine described in (A11) above.

In addition, the jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images.
The ending effect pattern differs depending on the degree of expectation that a jackpot result will occur in the identification information variation display effect based on the variation pattern.
For example, in the case of the spar reach E and F having the highest jackpot expectation, the ending effect pattern including the light emission gaze prevention information 44o is displayed because the fluctuation time is the longest and the screen blinks violently.

According to such a configuration, the jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images, and the ending effect pattern is an identification information variation display effect based on the variation pattern. By differently depending on the degree of expectation that the jackpot result will occur in the above, it is possible to show the player a combination of images that is preferable for the player according to the degree of expectation that the jackpot result will occur in the identification information variation display effect as the jackpot ending effect. .. For example, the gaming machine described in (A12) above.

Further, as for the ending effect pattern, the result of the big hit lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that triggers the entry into the special figure 1 start winning device 33a is the big hit result, or the special figure 2 start winning device 33b is used. The combination of a plurality of types of images in the jackpot ending effect differs depending on whether the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that triggers the entry of the ball is the jackpot result.
For example, the special 1 jackpot ending effect pattern includes the manufacturer information 44x, but the special 2 jackpot ending pattern does not include the manufacturer information 44x. Further, for example, in the case of the 8R normal jackpot, when the ball enters the special figure 2 start winning device 33b, the support state is not attached, so the content of the next game state suggestion information 44w is added to the special figure 1 starting winning device 33a. It is different from the case where the ball enters the ball.

According to such a configuration, the ending effect pattern is determined by whether the result of the big hit lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that triggers the entry into the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 is the big hit result, or for special figure 2. The combination of a plurality of types of images in the jackpot ending effect differs depending on whether the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that triggers the entry into the start winning device 33b is the jackpot result. As a result, it is possible to show the player a combination of images that is preferable for the player as a jackpot ending effect according to the difference in the trigger of the jackpot lottery. For example, the gaming machine described in (A14) above.

In the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the display pattern of the ending information 44j is different depending on the hit type and the variation pattern type, but the display pattern of the ending information 44j may be different depending on other conditions. Specifically, in this embodiment, the display pattern of the ending information 44j is different depending on the situation until the current jackpot occurs. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 (a) is a special figure 1 jackpot lottery table of the third embodiment, and FIG. 59 (b) is a special figure 2 jackpot lottery table. FIG. 60 is a table for setting an ending effect pattern.

In this embodiment, different ending effect patterns are set according to the situation until the current jackpot occurs (the jackpot occurrence situation). The jackpot occurrence status is the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot to the jackpot, the type of the jackpot immediately before, and the like.

The relationship between the hit type and the ending time will be explained. The ending time of Example 1 was set according to the hit type (difference between special figure 1 big hit and special figure 2 big hit and difference in the number of big hit rounds), but the ending time of this embodiment is set according to special figure 1. It remains different depending on the difference between the jackpot and the special figure 2 jackpot. That is, the ending time of the special figure 1 jackpot is 35 seconds for all of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the 8R normal jackpot. The ending time of the special figure 2 jackpot is 30 seconds for all of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the 8R normal jackpot.

Next, the relationship between the probability change continuation of the hit type and the number of electric support will be described. In the first embodiment, the probability change continuation and the number of electric support of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 probability change jackpot were 100 times, but in this embodiment, the probability change continuation and the number of electric support of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 probability change jackpot were 100 times. Is different in that it is until the next time.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 1) and the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot to the jackpot is less than 100 times, the ending effect pattern is the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, forgetting to remove the card. This is a pattern displayed in the order of prevention information 44y and privilege video 44n. It is possible to increase the satisfaction of being a big hit with a small number of fluctuations from the previous big hit.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 1) and the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot to the jackpot is 100 or more and less than 200, the ending effect pattern is the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, It is a pattern displayed in the order of the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y and the first insertion prevention information 44z1. The first immersive prevention information 44z1 is the same text information as the immersive prevention information 44z of the first embodiment, that is, "Pachinko and pachislot are games that are moderately enjoyed."

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 1) and the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot to the jackpot is 200 times or more, the ending effect pattern is the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, forgetting to remove the card. This is a pattern displayed in the order of prevention information 44y and second entanglement prevention information 44z2. The second immersive prevention information 44z2 is stronger than the first immersive prevention information 44z1 and appeals to the player to prevent immersiveness. It is an illustration that appeals.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 2), the ending effect pattern is the next game status suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information regardless of whether the previous jackpot is 16R or 8R jackpot. It is a pattern displayed in the order of 44y and the privilege video 44n. The fact that the jackpot is a special figure 2 jackpot means that the jackpot was won during a high probability / support state or a low probability / support state. In other words, there is a possibility that the jackpot has been won because the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot is not so large, and it is possible that the prize ball won in the previous jackpot has not been significantly reduced to reach the jackpot. In addition, the prize ball won by the jackpot is unlikely to be lower than the prize ball won by the previous jackpot. Therefore, in this situation, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by increasing the satisfaction of the player by showing the privilege video 44n, rather than appealing for the prevention of immersiveness.

When the jackpot type is 8R probability variation (special 1), the ending effect pattern is as follows, as in the case of 16R probability variation (special 1) described above, if the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot to the jackpot is less than 100 times. The game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the privilege video 44n are displayed in this order. If the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot to the jackpot is 100 or more and less than 200, the first immersive prevention information 44z1 is displayed instead of the privilege video 44n as in the case of the 16R probability variation (special 1) described above. .. If the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot to the jackpot is 200 or more, the second sinking prevention information 44z2 is displayed instead of the first sinking prevention information 44z1 as in the case of the 16R probability variation (special 1) described above. ..

When the jackpot type is 8R probability variation (special 2) and the previous jackpot is 16R probability variation (special 1) (special 2), the ending effect pattern is the next game status suggestion information 44w, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, privilege. The images are displayed in the order of 44n. Although the prize balls won in the jackpot are lower than the prize balls won in the previous jackpot, the player has still plenty of balls to hold because he has won 16 rounds of prize balls in the previous jackpot. Because there is a possibility.

The jackpot type is 8R probability variation (special 2), but the ending effect pattern when the previous jackpot is 8R probability variation (special 1) (special 2) and 8R normal (special 1) is the next game state suggestion information 44w, The card removal forgetting prevention information 44y and the first insertion prevention information 44z1 are displayed in this order. The prize ball won by the jackpot is the same as the prize ball won by the previous jackpot, but since the prize ball for 8 rounds is only won by the previous jackpot, there is no room for the player's ball. Because there is a possibility.

The ending effect pattern when the jackpot type is 8R normal (special 1) is the same as the ending effect pattern when the jackpot type is 8R probability variation (special 1).

When the jackpot type is 8R normal (special 2), the ending effect pattern is that the previous jackpot was 16R probability variation (special 1) (special 2), 8R probability variation (special 1) (special 2), 8R normal (special 1). Even so, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the second digging prevention information 44z2 are displayed in this order. This is because even if the previous jackpot is any of the above jackpots, it will be returned to the state of low probability and no support after the jackpot, so there is a possibility that the number of balls held will be greatly reduced from now on.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to show the ending effect that is predicted to be the most appropriate for the player at that time according to the situation from the previous jackpot to the jackpot.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment,
The jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images.
The ending effect pattern differs depending on the number of executions of the identification information variation display effect from the occurrence of the previous jackpot round gaming state to the next occurrence of the jackpot round gaming state.

According to such a configuration, the jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images, and the ending effect pattern is generated in the previous jackpot round game state. Since the previous jackpot round game state occurs, the next jackpot round game state occurs because it differs according to the number of times the identification information variation display effect is executed from then until the next jackpot round game state occurs. It is possible to show the player a combination of images preferable to the player as a jackpot ending effect according to the number of times the identification information variation display effect is executed. For example, the gaming machine described in (A13) above.

The gaming machine of the first embodiment displays the information 44a during the specific operation period as the end-of-specification proximity information 44e by blinking the information 44a. May be displayed. This will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (a1) to (a3) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the end-of-term proximity information of the specific operation period in the fourth embodiment, and (b1) to (b3) are different from (a1) to (a3). It is a figure explaining the display mode of.

Here, it is assumed that this high-speed fluctuation is completely out of alignment and the fluctuation time is 20 seconds. The high-speed fluctuation time is 15 seconds, and only the information 44a during the specific operation period is displayed up to the first 5 seconds, and the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is displayed from 5 seconds later to 15 seconds. Since the high-speed fluctuation ends after 15 seconds have elapsed, it is assumed that the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period disappears.

As shown in (a1), the high-speed changing screen 43c is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 from the start of the fluctuation to the fifth second. When 5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in (a2), the information 44a during the specific operation period is blinked and displayed in the upper right corner of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c. Information 44e1 is displayed. At the same time, the second specific operation period end proximity information 44e2 is displayed in a display mode different from that of the first specific operation period end proximity information 44e1 to notify the player that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching.

Specifically, as shown in (a2), on the left side of the proximity information 44e1 at the end of the first specific operation period, for example, the second specification represented by the character information "10 seconds later. Change the volume as soon as possible". The proximity information 44e2 at the end of the operation period is displayed. If time information is added, it will be easier for the player to understand. When 15 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the high-speed fluctuation ends, and as shown in (a3), the left symbol stop screen 43d is displayed, and the first specific operation period final proximity information 44e1 and the second specific operation period final proximity information 44e2 are non-existent. Be displayed.

With such second specific operation period end-end proximity information 44e2, the player can clearly understand that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching.

Next, another display mode will be described with reference to (b1) to (b3).

As shown in (b1), on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, the information 44a during the specific operation period is displayed on the upper right of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c. As shown in (b2), the information 44a during the specific operation period is displayed as the third specific operation period end-end proximity information 44e3, which is displayed faintly with the passage of time. When the high-speed fluctuation approaches the end, as shown in (b3), the third specific operation period end-end proximity information 44e3 completely disappears on the left symbol stop screen 43d.

With such third specific operation period end-end proximity information 44e3, the player can intuitively understand that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the second specific operation period final proximity information 44e2 indicates the remaining time of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b for volume control. Includes terminal proximity information 44e2 (for example, a text image such as "10 seconds later. Change volume as soon as possible"). It may be suggested without including the time information, such as "Change the volume as soon as possible".

According to such a configuration, the specific operation period final proximity information 44e indicates (suggests) the remaining time of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b for volume control, and the second specific operation period final proximity information 44e2 (for example, "" 10 seconds left. Text images such as "Change volume as soon as possible" and "Change volume as soon as possible") are included. As a result, the player can easily recognize the remaining time of the period during which the specific operation can be performed in the predetermined period during the identification information variation display. For example, the gaming machine described in (B3) above.

The gaming machine according to the first embodiment displays the next gaming state proximity information 44l by blinking the right-handed right-handed information 44k during the ending at the end of the ending period, but the next gaming state proximity is displayed in a different manner. Information 44l may be displayed. This will be described with reference to FIG. 62. 62 (a1) to (a3) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the next game state proximity information 44l in the fifth embodiment, and (b1) to (b3) are different from (a1) to (a3). It is a figure explaining the display mode of.

As shown in (a1), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays the ending screen 43j at the timing when the entanglement prevention information 44z is displayed. Similar to the first embodiment, right-handed information 44k during the ending is displayed on the upper left of the ending screen 43j. The right-handed information 44k during the ending is displayed as the first next game state proximity information 44l1 by blinking and displaying as shown in the first embodiment as shown in (a2).

At this time, on the right side of the first next game state proximity information 44l1, the start timing of the next game state is approaching (in other words, the current game) in a manner different from that of the first next game state proximity information 44l1. The second next game state proximity information 44l2 that informs the player that the end timing of the state is approaching is displayed. Specifically, the second next game state proximity information 44l2 informs that it is not yet time to start right-handed in the next game state (high probability / support state or low probability / support state). It is character information such as "yo".

As shown in (a3), the first next game state proximity information 44l1 and the second next game state proximity information 44l2 are hidden at the timing when the high probability state screen 43k at which the next game state is started is switched. It is said that. On the high-probability state screen 43k, instead of the first next game state proximity information 44l1 and the second next game state proximity information 44l2, the high-probability / support state right-handed information 44m is displayed. ing.

From such a second next game state proximity information 44l2, the player can clearly understand that the start timing of the next game state is approaching.

Next, another display mode will be described with reference to (b1) to (b3).

As shown in (b1), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays the ending screen 43j at the timing when the entanglement prevention information 44z is displayed, and the right-handed information 44k during the ending is displayed. As shown in (b2), the right-handed hitting information 44k during the ending is displayed blinking and displayed as the first next game state proximity information 44l1. At this time, on the right side of the first next game state proximity information 44l1, the third next game state proximity information 44l3, which is illustration information indicating that the next game state has not yet occurred, is displayed. The third next game state proximity information 44l3 is displayed as right-handed information 44k during the ending (at the timing shown in (b2), it is the first next game state proximity information 44l1). , It is an image showing how the image of the hand is stopped.

When the ending period ends, as shown in (b3), the first next game state proximity information 44l1 and the third next game state proximity information 44l3 are hidden, and the high probability state screen 43k and the high probability support Right-handed information 44m is displayed during the state.

With such a third next game state proximity information 44l3, the player can intuitively understand that the end timing of the ending period is approaching and the start timing of the next game state is approaching.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment,
The right-handed notification mode (second mode) in the jackpot ending effect is a mode in which it is more difficult for the player to perform a right-handed operation than the right-handed notification mode (first mode) in the jackpot round gaming state. For example, the second aspect is the ending right-handed information 44k indicated by the characters "right-handed" and the right-pointing arrow, and the first aspect is "not yet!" Displayed near the ending right-handed information 44k. It is the second next game state proximity information 44l2 shown by the character information of the character and the illustration of stopping the right-handed hit. The text information of "Not yet!" And the illustration that stops right-handed hitting can discourage the player from right-handed hitting operation.

According to such a configuration, the right-handed notification mode (first mode) in the jackpot ending effect is less likely to cause the player to perform the right-handed operation than the right-handed notification mode (second mode) in the jackpot round gaming state. It is an aspect. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize that the execution timing of the right-handed game is during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. The disadvantage caused by misidentification can be reduced. For example, the gaming machine described in (C3) above.

The next game state proximity information 44l may be displayed in a display mode different from that of Examples 1 and 5. Specifically, 44 liters of next game state proximity information having different contents from those of Examples 1 and 5 are displayed. This will be described with reference to FIG. 63. 63 (a) to 63 (e) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the next game state proximity information 441 of the sixth embodiment.

As shown in (a), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays the ending screen 43j at the timing when the entanglement prevention information 44z is displayed, and the right-handed information 44k during the ending is displayed. Three seconds before the end of the ending period, the right-handed information 44k during the ending gradually expands as shown in (b), so that the next game state (a game state requiring a right-handed hit) approaches. It is displayed as the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 that informs the player that the player is present. At the same time, on the right side of the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4, the fifth next game informs the player that the start timing of the next game state is approaching by counting down the time until the end of the ending period. The state proximity information 44l5 is displayed. In (b), "3" is displayed in the encircled character indicating that it is 3 seconds until the start of the next game state.

As shown in (c), when 1 second has passed from (b), the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 is expanded beyond the timing of (b). The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 is displayed as "2" in the encircled character indicating the remaining time of 2 seconds.

As shown in (d), when 1 second has passed from (c), the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 is further expanded than the timing of (b). The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 is displayed as "1" in the encircled character indicating the remaining time of 1 second.

As shown in (e), when the ending period ends and the next high probability / support state is started, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 and the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 are hidden. Then, the right-handed information 44m in the high probability / support state, which is larger than the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 shown in (d), is displayed.

With the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 and the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5, the player can know that the end timing of the ending period is approaching and the start timing of the next game state is approaching. It can be understood more intuitively.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment,
Further, the display control device 45 strikes right in the third mode, which suggests returning from the second mode to the first mode, at the final stage of the jackpot ending effect (for example, the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect to the end time). Notify. For example, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 that gradually enlarges the right-handed information 44j during the ending is displayed. In addition, the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5, which counts down the time from 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect to the end, is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the display control device 45 suggests that the display control device 45 returns from the second aspect to the first aspect at the final stage of the jackpot ending effect (for example, the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect to the end time). Right-handed notification is performed in the third aspect. As a result, right-handed notification can be quickly resumed at the timing when the jackpot ending effect shifts to the next high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine described in (C5) above.

The next game state proximity information 44l may be displayed in a display mode different from that of Examples 1, 5 and 6. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game ball launched based on the next game state proximity information 441 is the first opening of the electric accessory of the special figure 2 start winning device 33b in the next high probability / support state or the like. The next game state proximity information 44l is continuously displayed until a timing different from that of the first, fifth, and sixth embodiments so that the ball can be entered at the timing. This will be described with reference to FIG. (A) to (f) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the next game state proximity information 441 of the seventh embodiment.

As shown in (a), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays the ending screen 43j at the timing when the entanglement prevention information 44z is displayed, and the right-handed information 44k during the ending is displayed.

Since a large number of game balls have passed through the starting port 34 for the normal symbol due to the right-handed hit during the jackpot round, in (a), the four holding lamps 41c for holding the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 41 Indicates that all are on hold. After the end of the ending period, that is, at the same time as the next high probability / support state or low probability / support state occurs, the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts. In the supported state, the result of the lottery of ordinary symbols will be the winning result with almost all the probability. When the lottery of the first ordinary symbol is the winning result, the first opening timing of the electric accessory of the special figure 2 start winning device 33b in the next high probability / support state, etc. is the next high probability / support state, etc. Suppose it is 5 seconds after the start. The time until the game ball launched by the right-handed operation wins the opening prize device 33b for special figure 2 is 4 seconds after the launch.

Here, it is assumed that the display mode of the next game state proximity information 441 is set so that the player strikes right at the same time as the end of the ending period as in Examples 1, 5 and 6. Since the first game ball hit to the right at the end of the ending period passes through the starting port 34 for the normal symbol, the hold of the normal symbol increases. However, this first game ball does not win the special figure 2 start winning device 33b due to the time relationship described above. In this sense, this first game ball is wasted. The wider the time interval in the above-mentioned time relationship, the larger the number of game balls that are wasted.

In this respect, in this embodiment, the display timing of the next game state proximity information 441 is delayed so that the first game ball wins the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2. That is, as shown in (b), the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 and the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 start to be displayed from the timing 2 seconds before the end of the ending period. Specifically, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 becomes an enlarged image showing the high probability / support state right-handed information 44 m after 3 seconds from the reduced image showing the ending right-handed information 44k. As shown above, it is a display that gradually increases the right-handed information 44k during the ending. At this timing, the ending right-handed information 44k is one-fourth the size of the high-probability / supported right-handed information 44m. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 is a display that counts down the remaining time (3 seconds) from this timing to the restart of the right-handed hit in the next high-probability / support state. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 is displayed as "3" in the encircled characters.

As shown in (c), at the timing 1 second before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 has a high probability of right-handed information 44k during the ending and 3 minutes of right-handed information 44m during the support state. The display is enlarged to the size of 1. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 is displayed as "2" in the encircled characters.

As shown in (d), at the start timing of the next high probability / support state, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 changes the ending right-handed information 44k to the high-probability / support state right-handed information 44m 3 The display is enlarged to half the size. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 is displayed as "1" in the enclosing character.

As shown in (e), at the timing one second after the start of the next high probability / support state, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 sets the ending right-handed information 44k to the high probability / support state right. The display is enlarged to the same size as the hit information 44 m. That is, instead of the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4, the right-handed information 44m in the high probability / support state is displayed. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 erases the encircled characters. That is, the countdown has ended. At this timing, the player starts the right-handed operation.

As shown in (f), the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c is displayed at the timing of 5 seconds after the start of the next high-probability / support state. At this timing, the special figure 2 start winning device 33b is opened based on the winning result of the first ordinary symbol lottery. The game ball launched at the timing of (e) reaches the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 after 4 seconds, that is, 5 seconds after the start of the next high-probability / support state. In this way, after the player interrupts the right-handed hit during the ending period, the game ball first launched by the player is the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 at the first opening timing of the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. To win a prize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball first launched by the player from being wasted.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment,
The display control device 45 indicates that the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next high probability / support state is approaching, and the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 (for the next high probability / support state, etc.) (Countdown information up to the start timing of the right-handed operation) is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the display control device 45 notifies the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 indicating that the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next high probability / support state is approaching. .. This makes it easier to grasp the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next high probability / support state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by not being able to properly grasp the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine described in (C7) above.

The display control device 45 has the next high probability from the jackpot ending effect to the next high probability / support state (the period from 2 seconds before the end of the jackpot ending effect to the next high probability / 1 second after the start of the support state). -Displays the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 (countdown information) indicating that the start timing of the right-handed operation for the support state or the like is approaching.

According to such a configuration, in the jackpot ending effect, the display control device 45 indicates that the start timing of the next high probability / support state is approaching, and the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 (countdown information). Is notified. This makes it easier to grasp the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next game state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by not being able to properly grasp the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine described in (C8) above.

The next game state proximity information 44l may be displayed at a timing different from that of the seventh embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game ball launched based on the next game state proximity information 441 before the end of the ending period is electrically driven by the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 in the next high probability / support state. The next game state proximity information 44l is displayed until a timing different from that of the seventh embodiment so that the ball can be entered at the first opening timing of the accessory. This will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIGS. 65A to 65F are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the next game state proximity information 441 of the eighth embodiment.

As shown in (a), at the timing 6 seconds before the end of the ending period, the immersive prevention information 44z and the right-handed information 44k during the ending are displayed on the ending screen 43j.

When the lottery of the first ordinary symbol is the winning result, the first opening timing of the electric accessory of the special figure 2 start winning device 33b in the next high probability / support state is earlier than that of the seventh embodiment, for example. It is assumed that it is 2 seconds after the start of the next high probability / support state. The time until the game ball launched by the right-handed operation wins the opening prize device 33b for special figure 2 is 4 seconds after the launch, as in the seventh embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the display timing of the next game state proximity information 441 is earlier than that of the seventh embodiment so that the first game ball wins the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2. That is, as shown in (b), the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 and the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 start to be displayed from the timing 5 seconds before the end of the ending period. Specifically, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 starts expanding the right-handed information 44k during the ending from this timing. From this timing, the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 displays "3" in the encircled characters as a countdown display.

As shown in (c), at the timing 4 seconds before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 has a high probability of right-handed information 44k during the ending and 3 minutes of right-handed information 44m during the support state. Expand to the size of 1. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 displays "2" in the encircled characters as a countdown display.

As shown in (d), at the timing 3 seconds before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 has a high probability of right-handed information 44k during the ending and 3 minutes of right-handed information 44m during the support state. Expand to a size of 2. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 displays "1" in the encircled character as a countdown display.

As shown in (e), at the timing 2 seconds before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 has the same size as the right-handed information 44k during the ending with a high probability and the right-handed information 44m during the support state. Expand to that extent. That is, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 is replaced with the right-handed information 44m in the high probability / support state. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 erases the encircled characters as the countdown ends. At this timing, the player starts the right-handed operation.

As shown in (f), the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c is displayed at the timing of 2 seconds after the start of the next high-probability / support state. At this timing, the special figure 2 start winning device 33b is opened based on the winning result of the first ordinary symbol lottery. The game ball launched at the timing of (e) reaches the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 after 4 seconds, that is, 2 seconds after the start of the next high-probability / support state. In this way, after the player interrupts the right-handed hit during the ending period, the game ball first launched by the player is the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 at the first opening timing of the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. To win a prize.

As a result, the first opening timing of the electric accessory of the special figure 2 start winning device 33b in the next high probability / support state is earlier than that in the seventh embodiment, for example, from the start of the next high probability / support state. Even at the timing of 2 seconds later, it is possible to prevent the game ball first launched by the player from being wasted.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment.
In the jackpot ending effect (the period from 5 seconds before the end of the jackpot ending effect to 2 seconds before the end), the display control device 45 is approaching the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next high probability / support state. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 (countdown information) indicating that is notified.

According to such a configuration, the display control device 45 hits right for the next high probability, support state, etc. in the jackpot ending effect (the period from 5 seconds before the end of the jackpot ending effect to 2 seconds before the end). The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 (countdown information) indicating that the start timing of the operation is approaching is notified. As a result, the player can execute the right-handed operation for the next high probability, support state, etc. at an appropriate timing during the jackpot ending effect. For example, the gaming machine described in (C9) above.

This embodiment differs from the previous embodiments in that the sound output during the volume change operation is associated with the display effect. In addition, the display mode of the next game state proximity information is also different from the previous embodiments. This point will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of the ninth embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the information 44a during the specific operation period is the character information of "volume can be changed", and this character information functions as the end-of-specification period proximity information 44e that is displayed blinking at the end of the ending time. In the present embodiment, the information 44a during the specific operation period is character information of "the volume can be changed by pressing the button during the ending" as shown in (b) to (g). The end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is displayed as a seek bar or an indicator image indicating the elapsed time of the ending effect. As a result, when the seek bar or the indicator image approaches the end time, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the end of the specific operation period is approaching (that is, the start timing of the next gaming state is approaching).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the player presses any of the frame buttons 80, the ending screen 43j is switched to the specific operation screen 44b. That is, not only the decision button 81 but also the left selection button 82 and the right selection button 83 are pressed to switch to the specific operation screen 44b. That is, during the ending effect, unlike during the reach display effect and the jackpot round display effect, the operation means such as the frame button 80 is not operated, so that any of the information 44a is displayed during the specific operation period. If the operating means is operated, it is possible to facilitate the player's volume change operation by determining that the volume change operation has been performed. Of course, if the gaming machine is a gaming machine in which the hand is held over a predetermined area of the display screen 42a instead of pressing the frame button 80 during the reach display effect or the jackpot round display effect, the specific operation is performed by holding the hand over the display screen 42a. You may switch to the screen 45b.

During the ending period from (b) to (g), for example, during the display period of the entanglement prevention information 44z shown in (e), when any of the frame buttons 80 is pressed, as shown in (i), it is specified. Switch to the operation screen 44b. When the enter button 81 is pressed at the time of switching to the specific operation screen 44b, the immersive prevention information 44z "Pachinko and pachislot are games for moderate enjoyment" is output. As shown in (j), when either the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83 for changing the volume is operated on the specific operation screen 44b, the sound output unit 24 provides "pachinko" as the intrusion prevention information 44z. , Pachislot is a game to enjoy moderately. " This voice is output at the changed volume each time the player presses the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83 as the volume change operation.

As a result, after switching to the specific operation screen 44b, the player does not know what is displayed as the ending information 44j at that timing because the ending information 44j is hidden behind the specific operation screen 44b. However, the volume can be changed while listening to the voice corresponding to the ending information 44j that will be displayed when the volume is changed. Therefore, the ending information 44j can be transmitted to the player even if the volume change operation is performed during the ending effect period.

If the volume change operation is during the display period of the next game state proximity information 44w, the voice "one more time" is output, and if the display period is the manufacturer information 44x, the voice "SANYO" is output and the card is removed. During the display period of the forgotten prevention information 44y, the voice "Please be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card" is output.

Further, when the ending information 44j is changed to a different ending information 44j during the volume change (for example, when the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is changed to the insertion prevention information 44z), the voice corresponding to the changed ending information 44j is heard. (For example, the voice of "Pachinko and pachislot are games for moderate enjoyment" corresponding to the immersive prevention information 44z) is output. As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while listening to the voice corresponding to the ending information 44j displayed at the time of the change operation.

If the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined unrelated display effect (for example, a variable display effect that displays the screen 43c during high-speed fluctuation that cannot be output as audio), a sound that is not related to the display effect (“Volume 1”) , Volume 2 ”and“ Pi, Pi ”and other sound effects). As a result, when the display effect at the time of changing the volume is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated with each other, the player is given discomfort or inconvenience by forcibly associating the display effect with an inappropriate display effect. Can be prevented.

It should be noted that, for example, the immersive prevention information 44z may be slightly reflected behind the specific operation screen 44b. This reflection is such that the characters of the immersive prevention information 44z are not recognized. For example, at least a part of the specific operation screen 44b (for example, in the case of the entanglement prevention information 44z, the outline of the display information) is superimposed and displayed in a visible manner. Since the ending information 44j can be checked slightly while performing the volume change operation, it is possible to perform the volume change operation with confidence without worrying that the ending display effect may end during the volume change operation. can.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the display effect, the sound output unit 24 that outputs sound according to the display effect, and the operation by the player. The sound output control that can change the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24 based on the operation of the enter button 81, the left selection button 82, the right selection button 83, and the frame button 80 that constitute the frame button 80. The voice output control device 46 includes the device 46, and the voice output control device 46 makes the operation sound at the time of changing the volume a sound related to the ending display effect displayed during the period when the volume can be changed (for example, "pachinko" corresponding to the immersive prevention information 44z. , Pachislot is a game to enjoy moderately. " As a result, the player can change the volume while listening to the sound related to the ending display effect when the volume is changed, so that the player can improve the interest of the operation of changing the volume. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D1).

Further, the operation sound is changed from the ending display effect that displays the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y to the ending display effect that displays the immersive prevention information 44z when the ending display effect when the volume is changed is changed to a different display effect (for example, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is displayed). In the case), there is a sound related to the ending display effect after the change (for example, the sound of "Pachinko and pachislot are games for moderate enjoyment" corresponding to the immersive prevention information 44z). As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while listening to the sound related to the ending display effect displayed at the time of the change operation, so that the optimum volume can be set at the time of the change operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D2).

Further, the operation sound is a display effect when the volume is changed, which can be associated with a predetermined value (for example, an ending display effect that displays card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, immersive prevention information 44z, etc. that can be output as voice). In this case, the sound is related to the display effect, and the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated (for example, a variable display effect that displays the high-speed changing screen 43c that cannot be output as audio). Is a sound that is not related to the display effect (sound effects such as "volume 1, volume 2" and "pi, pi"). As a result, when the display effect at the time of changing the volume is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated with each other, the player is given discomfort or inconvenience by forcibly associating the display effect with an inappropriate display effect. Can be prevented. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D3).

Further, the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is such that at least a part (for example, the outline of the display information in the case of the immersive prevention information 44z) can be visually recognized behind the image for the volume change operation. It is displayed superimposed with. As a result, a sufficient area for displaying an image for the volume change operation can be secured, so that the volume change operation becomes easy. Also, while the player is performing the volume change operation, the display effect being displayed can be confirmed by the image displayed overlaid on the back, so the display effect may end during the volume change operation. You can change the volume with confidence without worrying about it. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D6).

In the above-described embodiment, the ending screen 43j (ending information 44j) was not displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 while the specific operation screen 44b was being displayed, but this is displayed in the present embodiment. doing. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of the tenth embodiment.

67 (a) to 67 (h) are the same as those in FIG. 66, and the common contents will be referred to the description thereof. The display area of the ending information 44j is wider than that of FIG. 66, and each ending information 44j is displayed in the same display area.

Next, as shown in (i) and (j), when the player presses the frame button 80, the specific operation screen 44b is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. On the specific operation screen 44b, the ending information 44j, the change information display unit 44c, and the operation method display unit 44d are displayed. The ending information 44j is displayed in a part of the display area of the ending information 44j on the ending screen 43j in a smaller size than when the ending screen 43j is displayed. For example, the entanglement prevention information 44z is displayed as the entanglement prevention information reduction display unit 44z3 in which the characters "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games" are made small enough to be recognized by the player. In the display area of the ending information 44j on the ending screen 43j, the reduced ending information 44j, the change information display unit 44c, and the operation method display unit 44d are displayed. In this way, by using the common display area for the ending screen 43j and the specific operation screen 44b, the switching of the display area becomes smooth, and the player can be shown in a cohesive manner.

Further, in accordance with the volume change operation, the voice corresponding to the ending information 44j is output at the changed volume. As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while watching the ending information 44j and listening to the voice corresponding to the ending information 44j. In addition, the player is worried that the ending display effect may end during the volume change operation because the ending information 44j being displayed can be confirmed in the reduced image while the volume change operation is performed. You can change the volume with confidence without having to.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 has an ending display effect (for example, immersive prevention information reduced display 44z3) and volume information (for example, change information indicating the volume) when the volume is changed. Display unit 44c) and can be displayed. As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while watching the ending display effect and listening to the sound related to the ending display effect, so that the player can improve the fun of the operation of changing the volume. can. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D4).

Further, the image of the ending display effect (for example, the immersive prevention information reduced display 44z3) displayed during the volume change operation is larger than the image of the ending display effect (for example, the immersive prevention information 44z) displayed before the volume change operation. This is a reduced image. As a result, the image of the ending display effect is reduced during the volume change operation, so that the volume change operation becomes easier. Also, the player can check the ending display effect being displayed in the reduced image while performing the volume change operation, so he is worried that the ending display effect may end during the volume change operation. You can change the volume with confidence without having to. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D5).

In the tenth embodiment, the ending information 44j was reduced and displayed, but in the present embodiment, the ending information 44j is displayed by a method different from this. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of the tenth embodiment.

(A) to (h) are the same as those in FIG. 66, and the common contents refer to the description thereof. In the ending information 44j, not only the character information but also the illustration information corresponding to the character information is displayed. Therefore, the display area of the ending information 44j is wider than that of FIGS. 66 and 67.

When any of the frame buttons 80 is pressed during the ending period from (b) to (g), for example, during the display period of the entanglement prevention information 44z shown in (e), as shown in (i) and (j). The screen switches to the specific operation screen 44b. In the third symbol display device 42, the ending information 44j and the change information display unit 44c are displayed side by side in substantially the same size during the volume change operation. That is, the display area of the ending information 44j before the volume change operation is divided into the display area of the ending information 44j after the volume change operation (for example, the immersive prevention information split display unit 44z4) and the display area of the change information display unit 44c. It is divided.

Specifically, the display area of the ending information 44j before the volume change operation includes a character information display area 44j1 in which character information is displayed in the upper half and an illustration information display area 44j2 in which illustration information is displayed in the lower half. It is provided. After the volume change operation, the character information display area 44j1 is left as it is, and the illustration information display area 44j2 is switched to the change information display unit 44c. By dividing the display area of the ending information 44j in this way, the display area of the ending information 44j can be continuously used even if the screen is changed. As a result, the switching of the display area becomes smooth, and the eyestrain of the player is reduced.

Operation method The reduced display unit 44d is provided in the display area of the change information display unit 44c. As a result, during the volume change operation, the player changes the volume while watching the ending information 44j arranged side by side next to the change information display unit 44c and listening to the sound related to the ending display effect. can.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 has an ending display effect (for example, immersive prevention information split display 44z4) and volume information (for example, change information indicating the volume) when the volume is changed. It can be displayed side by side with the split display unit 44c1). As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while watching the ending display effect arranged next to the change information division display unit 44c1 and listening to the sound related to the ending display effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the operation to be changed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D4).

In the above-described embodiment, the volume change operation is executed in the ending effect, but it may be executed in the jackpot round display effect. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period during the jackpot round game of Example 12.

In this embodiment, the information 44a during the specific operation period is the character information that "the volume can be changed by pressing and holding for 2 seconds or more". During the jackpot round display effect, a display effect that requires the operation of the frame button 80 is executed. Therefore, a long press of the frame button 80 for 2 seconds or longer is adopted as a method that does not overlap with the operation of the frame button 80. When an operating means other than the frame button 80 is used, a different operating method is used.

The operation sound when the volume is changed during the jackpot round display effect is the sound related to the jackpot round display effect displayed during the period when the volume can be changed (for example, the title guessing quiz display effect of the song is executed in the jackpot round display effect). If so, it is said to be the intro sound of the song to be asked or the chorus sound). For example, on the round screen 43i, as shown in (a), "Challenge the quiz, a special video can be seen with a correct answer rate of 50% or more" is displayed as the display effect 44h1 during the round. Next, as shown in (b), the quiz information 44h2 during the round is displayed as the display effect 44h1 during the round.

As shown in (b) and (c), the quiz information 44h2 during the round includes question information "1st question, what is the title of this song?" And option information "1. AAA, 2. BBB, 3. CCC ”and the operation information 44h3 during the round indicating the operation method of the frame button 80 in the quiz effect. In the quiz operation information 44h3 during the round, the normal pressing operation (pressing once) of the enter button 81 is the determination of the option, the normal pressing operation of the left selection button 82 is the movement to the bottom of the option, and the right selection button. It shows that the normal pressing operation of 83 is to move to the top of the options.

As shown in (d), when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 20 seconds) elapses from the quiz information 44h2 during the round, the quiz answer information 44h4 during the round is displayed. The quiz answer information 44h4 during the round indicates whether the option selected by the player is a correct answer or an incorrect answer. If the answer is incorrect, the cause may be that the volume is low. Therefore, as shown in (e), the volume change suggestion information 44h5 during the round is displayed. The volume change suggestion information 44h5 during the round is character information prompting the volume change operation, for example, "Try the volume change operation". After the volume change suggestion information 44h5 during the round is displayed in a short time of about 3 seconds, the second and subsequent questions are displayed as shown in (f) and (i).

When the frame button 80 is pressed and held for 2 seconds or longer, the screen switches to the specific operation screen 44b. In this embodiment, as shown in (g), the specific operation screen 44b displays the volume change suggestion information 44h5 during the round, the quiz information reduction display unit 44h6, and the operation method display unit 44d indicating the volume operation. When the volume change operation is performed by the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83, as shown in (h), the intro music or chorus voice corresponding to the quiz question is output at the changed volume.

As a result, the player can change the volume while listening to the sound related to the jackpot round display effect at the time of the volume change operation, so that the player can improve the interest of the operation of changing the volume. In addition, when the jackpot round display effect when the volume is changed is changed to a different display effect (for example, after the song given in the first question to the second question in the title guessing quiz display effect of the song), the operation sound is changed. (When changed), it is a sound related to the display effect after the change (for example, the intro sound of the song to be set in the second song or the sound of the chorus). As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while listening to the sound related to the jackpot round display effect displayed at the time of the change operation, so that the optimum volume can be set at the time of the change operation.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the jackpot round display effect, the sound output unit 24 that outputs sound in accordance with the jackpot round display effect, and the like. The voice output control device 46 includes a frame button 80 that can be operated by the player and a voice output control device 46 that can change the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24 based on the operation of the frame button 80. Is a sound related to the jackpot round display effect displayed during the period when the volume can be changed (for example, when the title guessing quiz display effect of the music is executed in the jackpot round display effect). , It is possible to use the intro sound of the music to be asked or the sound of chorus. This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound related to the jackpot round display effect when changing the volume. It is possible to improve the fun of the operation of changing the above. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D1).

In addition, when the jackpot round display effect when the volume is changed is changed to a different display effect (for example, after the song given in the first question to the second question in the title guessing quiz display effect of the song), the operation sound is changed. (When changed), it is a sound related to the display effect after the change (for example, the intro sound of the song to be set in the second song or the sound of the chorus). As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while listening to the sound related to the jackpot round display effect displayed at the time of the change operation, so that the optimum volume can be set at the time of the change operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D2).

In the above-described embodiment, the volume change operation has been described as an example of the specific operation of the present invention, but the specific operation may be an operation other than the volume change operation, for example, a character selection operation in a confrontation type reach display effect. good. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period during the reach display effect of the thirteenth embodiment.

When the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 shifts from a predetermined state to the next state, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 changes from a predetermined timing of the predetermined state to a predetermined timing of the next state. Up to, the transition display effect of displaying a predetermined image on the third symbol display device 42 is executed. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 shifts the reach display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 from the self-character selectable state of the confrontation type reach development effect to the confrontation execution state of the confrontation type reach development effect. In this case, from the self-character selection start timing in the self-character selection state shown in (a) to the confrontation start timing in the confrontation execution state shown in (d), as shown in (a) to (c), the third symbol display device. The own character selection effect for displaying the own character selection effect image on 42 is executed.

In the self-character selection effect, the first player PY1, the second player PY2, and the third player PY3 are displayed as self-characters that can be selected by the player, and each player introduces them in order while issuing a message that appeals their own characteristics. It is a display effect to be performed. Specifically, in the self-character selection effect, first, as shown in (a), the state in which the first player PY1 issues the first player information PYA that "decides flashy" is displayed, and then as shown in (b). The second player PY2 issues the second player information PYB "quietly decides", and finally the third player PY3 "decides moderately" the third player information PYC as shown in (c). The state of emission is displayed.

The first player information PYA suggests to the player that if the first player PY1 is selected, the subsequent reach display effect will be flashy for the effect of light, sound, and movable characters. The second player information PYA indicates to the player that if the second player PY2 is selected, the subsequent reach display effects will make these effects quieter. The third player information PYC indicates to the player that if the third player PY3 is selected, the subsequent reach development display effect controls the balance of these effects appropriately.

The first player information PYA to the third player information PYC are displayed in order within the selected time. If the player does not perform the selection operation even after the selection time has elapsed, as shown in (d), the character automatically selected by the lottery inside the game machine (for example, the first player PY1) is used. The confrontation reach with the enemy character TK is started.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 notifies the player of unarrival suggestion information suggesting to the player that the start timing of the next state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. Specifically, as shown in (a) to (c), the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 tells the player that the start timing of the confrontation execution state has not arrived during the execution of the display effect at the time of transition. The player is notified of the suggestion information 44a during the specific operation period and the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period.

In the information 44a during the specific operation period, for example, character information such as "a player can be selected with a button" is displayed, and it is displayed that the own character of the confrontation type reach can be selected by pressing any of the frame buttons 80. The end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is displayed as a seek bar or an indicator image indicating the remaining time for accepting the operation of the frame button 80 for the own character selection effect as an effective operation.

When the frame button 80 is effectively operated, the change information display unit 44c is displayed as shown in (e), (f), and (h). The change information display unit 44c displays the first player PY1, the second player PY2, and the third player PY3 that can be selected by the player. The player operates the left selection button 82 and the right selection button 83 to select a desired character. The period during which the selection operation is possible is notified to the player by the above-mentioned specific operation period end-end proximity information 44e. After selecting the desired character, if you wait until the start timing of the confrontation reach, the confrontation effect will start with the selected character. Alternatively, if the enter button 81 is operated, a waiting image such as "Please wait for a while" is displayed, and then the confrontation effect is started with the selected character.

As a result, the player can select the own character at the present time when the own character selection effect is being executed, in other words, the current time when the own character selection effect is being executed is not yet in the next confrontation execution state. Is easier to recognize. Therefore, there is a disadvantage (for example, unintended) caused by misunderstanding that the current time when the own character selection effect is being executed is the next confrontation execution state (or the start timing of the next confrontation execution state is approaching immediately before). By selecting the character, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of seeing the reach development effect that is different from the player's preference).

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the game state is changed from a predetermined state (a state in which the own character can be selected for the confrontation type reach development effect) to the next state (for example, a confrontation execution of the confrontation type reach development effect). When shifting to the state), the third symbol display device 42 is displayed from the predetermined timing of the own character selection state (self-character selection start timing) to the predetermined timing of the next confrontation execution state (for example, the confrontation start timing). The start timing of the next confrontation execution state is set during the execution function of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 that executes the transition display effect (self-character selection effect) for displaying the own character selection effect image and the execution of the own character selection effect. With the notification function of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 that notifies the player of non-arrival suggestion information (for example, the end-of-term proximity information 44e indicating the remaining time of the own character selection effect) that suggests to the player that it has not arrived. To be equipped. As a result, the player can select the own character at the present time when the own character selection effect is being executed, in other words, the current time when the own character selection effect is being executed is not yet in the next confrontation execution state. Is easier to recognize. Therefore, there is a disadvantage (for example, unintended) caused by misunderstanding that the current time when the own character selection effect is being executed is the next confrontation execution state (or the start timing of the next confrontation execution state is approaching immediately before). By selecting the character, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of seeing the reach development effect that is different from the player's preference).

In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the player PY displayed in the confrontation type reach display effect has a certain pattern of the first player PY1, the second player PY2, and the third player PY3, but the player PY is a big hit lottery. It may be changed to a different pattern depending on the result. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period during the reach display effect of the fourteenth embodiment.

When the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 shifts from a predetermined state to the next state, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 changes from a predetermined timing of the predetermined state to a predetermined timing of the next state. Up to, the transition display effect in which a plurality of types of images are continuously displayed in a predetermined combination on the third symbol display device 42 is executed. When the result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination depending on the type of the jackpot result. If the result is out of order, different combinations are displayed depending on the type of reach display effect that leads to the out-of-order result. That is, the transition display effects of this embodiment are displayed in different combinations depending on the type of jackpot result expected by the player.

For example, in the case of a reach display effect that normally expects a big hit, three player PY1 to player PY3 as in the thirteenth embodiment are continuously displayed, and the first player information PYA to the third player information PYC are continuously displayed. Is displayed. In the case of the reach display effect that expects a probabilistic jackpot, four player PY1 to player PY4 are continuously displayed, and the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD are continuously displayed. In addition, the display mode of a specific player, which is a reach display effect for expecting a normal jackpot and a reach display effect for expecting a probabilistic jackpot, may be different.

The end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is a seek bar or indicator that suggests to the player that the start timing of the next confrontation execution state has not arrived until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. It is an image. The first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD are displayed in order within the selection time indicated by the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period.

As a result, during the own character selection effect, the start timing of the next confrontation execution state has not arrived due to the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. Is suggested, and the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the start timing of the next confrontation execution state (or the start timing of the next confrontation execution state is approaching immediately before) (for example, an unintended character is selected) is selected. As a result, the risk of receiving a reach development effect that is different from the player's preference) is reduced.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 14th embodiment, the self-character selection effect is a plurality of types of images (for example, 1st player PY1 to 4th player PY4, 1st player information PYA to 4th player information PYD. ) Are continuously executed in a predetermined combination, and the predetermined combination is displayed in different combinations depending on the type of jackpot result expected from the player as a result of the jackpot lottery (for example, in the case of a probability variation jackpot). Is displayed from the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the first player information PYA to the third player information PYC are displayed), and the specific operation period end proximity information 44e is a plurality of types of images. Until the timing when the player finishes executing consecutively in a predetermined combination (for example, until the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD are displayed within the selected time in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the first player information PYA Until the third player information PYC is displayed within the selected time), it is suggested to the player that the start timing of the next confrontation execution state has not arrived. As a result, during the own character selection effect, the start timing of the next confrontation execution state has not arrived due to the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. Is suggested, and the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the start timing of the next confrontation execution state (or the start timing of the next confrontation execution state is approaching immediately before) (for example, an unintended character is selected) is selected. As a result, the risk of receiving a reach development effect that is different from the player's preference) is reduced. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (A21).

In the above-described embodiment, one pattern is determined for one type of jackpot ending display effect, but in this embodiment, one pattern is displayed for one type of jackpot ending display effect in a shorter time. The difference is that the pattern is determined. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of the fifteenth embodiment.

After the jackpot round gaming state shown in (a) ends, the display control device 45 controls to display the jackpot ending display effect on the third symbol display device 42 in a predetermined pattern. In this embodiment, the jackpot round gaming state shown in (a) is the jackpot round gaming state of the special figure 1 probability variation jackpot (16R), and the jackpot ending display effect is the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x. , Card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, privilege video 44n is displayed.

In the predetermined pattern, the predetermined display information (for example, the predetermined ending information 44j consisting of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y) has a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds) and is predetermined. The first pattern displayed in the display mode (display order of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y) and the display in which the predetermined ending information 44j is shorter than the predetermined display time. It has a second pattern that is displayed for a time (for example, 10 seconds) and in a display mode different from the predetermined display mode. The first pattern is a pattern to be displayed in the order as shown in FIG. 66 of the above-mentioned Example 9. The second pattern is the pattern of the jackpot ending display effect shown in (b) and subsequent steps. The details of the second pattern will be described later.

As described above, in this embodiment, the jackpot ending display effect can be executed with various variations in which the display time and the display mode for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j are different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the jackpot ending display production.

The first pattern and the second pattern are internally selected by the gaming machine by, for example, a lottery (a lottery performed by acquiring a random number based on the reception of a display variation pattern command) by the display control device 45. May be good. With this configuration, different patterns of ending effects can be executed even for the same jackpot type. Further, the player may be able to select whether to execute the jackpot round display effect in the first pattern or the second pattern at the beginning of the jackpot ending display effect. With this configuration, the jackpot ending display effect can be brought closer to the player's taste. Further, the jackpot ending display effect may be executed only in the second pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to show the player a jackpot ending display effect that has never existed before.

The second pattern will be described in a little more detail. The first pattern is a pattern in which the above-mentioned predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a composite state (simultaneously displayed) in which the predetermined ending information 44j displayed in the predetermined order is combined. It is a pattern that is displayed in the simultaneous display state). Specifically, in the second pattern, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, which were displayed in order in the first pattern, are simultaneously displayed as shown in (b). It is a pattern.

As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the jackpot ending display effect without impairing the identity of the contents of the jackpot ending display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern.

The length of the entire display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the entire display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern. Specifically, in the case of a 16R jackpot, the length of the entire display period is 35 seconds. As a result, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the bonus image 44n displayed at the end of the jackpot ending display effect is displayed by shortening the display time for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j described above. A new display effect can be executed by using the surplus time generated before the display.

The new display effect is, for example, the ending quiz display effect 44p1. In the ending quiz display effect 44p1, as shown in (c), the text information "Challenge the quiz, if you answer correctly, a special video" is displayed. The quiz is displayed as ending quiz information 44p2 as shown in (d) to (f). The operation during the quiz is displayed as the ending quiz operation information 44p3. These are the same as the in-round quiz information 44p2 and the in-round quiz operation information 44p3 shown in FIG. 69 of Example 12.

The answering time of the ending quiz is displayed as the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period. If the player does not answer within the answering time, it is considered that the preset option has been selected, and it is judged whether or not the answer is correct. Whether or not the quiz is correct is displayed as quiz answer information 44p4 during the ending, as shown in (g) and (k). If you answer the quiz correctly, the ending quiz correct answer privilege information 44p5 (video of special live music) will be displayed as a special privilege as a bonus video 44n, and if the quiz is incorrect, the ending quiz incorrect answer privilege information 44p7 (as a normal privilege) Normal live music video) is displayed.

If you press and hold any of the frame buttons 80 during the quiz according to the information 44a during the specific operation period (“Press and hold for 2 seconds or more to change the volume”), as shown in (i) and (j), the ending quiz information 44p2 Is reduced and displayed on the quiz information reduced display unit 44p6 during the ending, and the change information display unit 44c and the operation method display unit 44d are also reduced and displayed so that the volume can be changed while watching the quiz. When the volume is changed during the quiz, the intro and the chorus part of the song to be asked are output as in the case of the twelfth embodiment.

In this way, the new display effect that can be displayed by executing the jackpot round display effect of the second pattern can adjust the volume during the quiz, and the bonus video 44n after that depending on the correct or incorrect answer of the quiz. The content of is changed, and the content is related to the subsequent bonus video 44n. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the ending display effect that attracts the player's attention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 15th embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the jackpot ending display effect related to the game and the third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the jackpot ending display effect in a predetermined pattern. A display control device 45 that controls the display of the card is provided, and the predetermined pattern comprises predetermined display information (for example, next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y). The first pattern in which 44j) is displayed in a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds) and in a predetermined display mode (display order of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y). The predetermined ending information 44j has a second pattern in which the display time is shorter than the predetermined display time (for example, 10 seconds) and is displayed in a display mode different from the predetermined display mode. As a result, the jackpot ending display effect can be executed with various variations in which the display time and the display mode for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j are different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the jackpot ending display production. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E1).

Further, the first pattern is a pattern in which the above-mentioned predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a composite state in which the predetermined ending information 44j displayed in the predetermined order is combined. It is a pattern displayed in the simultaneous display state) displayed at the same time. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the jackpot ending display effect without impairing the identity of the contents of the jackpot ending display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E3).

Further, the length of the entire display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the entire display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern (for example, 35 seconds). .. As a result, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the bonus image 44n displayed at the end of the jackpot ending display effect is displayed by shortening the display time for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j described above. A new display effect (quiz display effect during ending 44p1) can be executed by using the surplus time generated until the display. This new display effect is such that the volume can be adjusted during the quiz, the content of the subsequent bonus video 44n changes depending on the correct or incorrect answer of the quiz, and the content is related to the subsequent bonus video 44n. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the ending display effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E4).

Further, the predetermined ending information 44j is ending effect information after the jackpot round game. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the ending effect after the jackpot round game. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E5).

In the 15th embodiment described above, new ending information (quiz display effect during ending 44p1) is displayed before the final ending information (privilege image 44n) to be displayed by executing the jackpot round display effect of the second pattern. However, in this embodiment, the ending information (privilege video 44n) to be displayed at the end is changed to a longer version by executing the jackpot ending display effect of the second pattern. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 16.

Specifically, by executing the jackpot ending display effect of the second pattern, as shown in (b), predetermined ending information 44j (next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y) ) Is displayed in the composite state for, for example, 10 seconds, and then the privilege video 44n is displayed in the remaining ending time (25 seconds) as shown in (c) to (h). Information 44a is displayed during the specific operation period at the beginning of the privilege video 44n. In the information 44a during the specific operation period, the character information "You can change the volume, the amount of light, and the sound quality by pressing and holding the music for a long time" is displayed. The information 44a during the specific operation period may be deleted after being pressed and held for a long time. When the frame button 80 is pressed and held, as shown in (d), the privilege video n is reduced and displayed on the privilege video split display unit 44n1, which of the volume, the amount of light, the sound quality, and "return" is changed. The change information display unit 44c that can be selected is displayed. When the volume is selected, the volume change information display unit 44c1 that can change the volume is displayed as shown in (e) and (i). When the light amount is selected, the light amount change information display unit 44c2 that can change the light amount is displayed as shown in (f) and (j). When the sound quality is selected, the sound quality change information display unit 44c3 that can change the sound quality is displayed as shown in (g) and (k). After changing the volume, light intensity, and sound quality by operating the left selection button 82 and the right selection button 83, pressing the enter button 81 returns to the change information display unit 44c. When "return" is selected in the change information display unit 44c, the state returns to the state in which the privilege video 44n is displayed on the full screen as shown in (h). It should be noted that, after returning to the change information display unit 44c and a predetermined second elapses, the privilege video 44n may be set to return to the state of being displayed on the full screen.

In this way, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j is shortened, and the generated surplus time is used to reduce the display time of the privilege video 44n. By making it possible to display the change information display unit 44c for changing the volume, light intensity, and sound quality during the display time of the privilege video 44n, the display can be performed after ensuring a long period during which the volume and the like can be adjusted. You can increase the variation of the production.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, the length of the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern and the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern It is the same as the length. As a result, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j (for example, ending countdown information 44v, next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y) is set. By shortening the display time, the display time of the privilege video 44n can be lengthened by utilizing the surplus time generated, and the change information display unit 44c for changing the volume, the amount of light, and the sound quality can be displayed during the display time of the privilege video 44n. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the display effect while securing a long period in which the volume and the like can be adjusted. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E4).

In the 15th and 16th embodiments described above, the jackpot ending display effect by the second pattern (composite display) is internally performed by the gaming machine, but in this embodiment, it is based on the operation of the player. The jackpot ending display effect is performed by the second pattern (composite display). This point will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 17.

In the jackpot ending display effect shown in (b) to (f), the display control device 45 controls to display an operation request image requesting the player to operate the frame button 80 during the jackpot ending display effect. Specifically, as shown in (b) and (c), the operation request image is the information 44a during the specific operation period to which the character information "volume, light amount, sound quality change reception time" is added. The information 44a during the specific operation period is a seek bar or an indicator image indicating the elapsed time (remaining time) of the volume change acceptance time (10 seconds).

The display control device 45 controls to display the operation display effect (volume, light amount, sound quality change display effect) using the frame button 80 during the jackpot ending display effect, triggered by the player's operation on the operation request image. When the player does not operate the frame button 80 with respect to the operation request image, if it is the special figure 1 probability variation jackpot (16R) by the spar reach C and D, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, After the display of the card removal prevention information 44y and the insertion prevention information 44z is completed, the game shifts to the next gaming state.

In the predetermined pattern, when the operation request image is displayed and the player does not perform an operation on the operation request image, the predetermined ending information 44j (for example, the special figure 1 probability variation jackpot (16R) by the spar reach C and D) ), The manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the insertion prevention information 44z) are displayed for a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds) and in a predetermined display mode (one by one in order). When one pattern and the operation request image are displayed and the player performs an operation on the operation request image, the predetermined ending information 44j has a shorter display time (for example, 5 seconds) than the first pattern and is the first. It has a second pattern in which the display mode is different from that of the one pattern (all at the same time), and a change display effect such as volume is executed after the display of the predetermined ending information 44j is completed.

As a result, when the frame button 80 is effectively operated for the operation request image, the jackpot ending display effect can be enjoyed by changing the volume and the like without significantly impairing the interest of the jackpot ending display effect. It is possible to improve the interest of.

The first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined ending information 44j (for example, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, insertion prevention information 44z) is displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds). The second pattern is a pattern in which predetermined ending information 44j displayed in a predetermined order is displayed in combination to shorten a predetermined display time (for example, all at the same time for 5 seconds). be.

Specifically, when the player's operation on the operation request image is performed in the middle of the volume changeable time, as shown in (g), "Wait a moment until the volume change operation" until the end timing of the volume changeable time. The post-specific operation standby information 44a3 indicating the character information "ne" is displayed. The predetermined ending display 44j displayed by the second pattern is displayed after the display of the standby information 44a3 after the specific operation is finished.

As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the change display effect such as the volume without impairing the identity of the contents of the jackpot ending display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern.

Further, the length of the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern and the length of the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern are the same time (35 seconds). As a result, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the generated surplus time (20 seconds) is used by shortening the display time (5 seconds) for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j. Therefore, a period (10 seconds) for displaying the volume change operation effect and a period (10 seconds) for displaying the privilege video 44n can be provided. The period for displaying the volume change operation effect is displayed as the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period with the character information "volume, light amount, sound quality changeable time". The end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is a seek bar or indicator image showing the elapsed time (remaining time) of the changeable time (10 seconds) such as the volume. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the change display effect such as the volume while securing the adjustable period of the volume and the like.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 17th embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 that displays the display effect related to the game including the jackpot ending display effect, and the frame that the player can operate according to the display effect. The display control device 45 includes a button 80 and a display control device 45 that controls the display of the display effect including displaying the jackpot ending display effect in a predetermined pattern on the third symbol display device 42. The operation request execution function that controls the display of the operation request image (information 44a during the specific operation period) that requests the operation of the frame button 80 during the jackpot ending display effect, and the frame triggered by the player's operation on the operation request image. It is equipped with an operation display effect execution function that controls the display of the operation display effect (volume, light amount, sound quality change display effect) using the button 80 during the jackpot ending display effect, and the predetermined pattern is the operation request image. When the display is displayed and the player does not perform an operation on the operation request image, the predetermined ending information 44j (for example, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the insertion prevention information 44z) is displayed for a predetermined display time. The player displays the first pattern displayed (for example, for 25 seconds) and in a predetermined display mode (one by one in order), the operation request image, and the information 44a and the operation request image during the specific operation period. When the operation is performed, the predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a display time shorter than that of the first pattern (for example, 5 seconds) and in a display mode different from that of the first pattern (all at the same time), and the predetermined ending information is displayed. It has a second pattern in which a change display effect such as a volume is executed after the display of 44j is completed. As a result, when the frame button 80 is effectively operated for the operation request image, the jackpot ending display effect can be enjoyed by changing the volume and the like without significantly impairing the interest of the jackpot ending display effect. It is possible to improve the interest of. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F1).

In addition, the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined ending information 44j (for example, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, entanglement prevention information 44z) is displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds). The second pattern is displayed in a composite state in which the predetermined display time is shortened by displaying the predetermined ending information 44j displayed in the predetermined order in combination (for example, all at the same time for 5 seconds). It is a pattern. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the change display effect such as the volume without impairing the identity of the contents of the jackpot ending display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F3).

Further, the length of the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern. As a result, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j is shortened, and the surplus time generated is used to adjust the volume and the like. It is possible to increase the variation of the change display effect such as the volume, etc. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F4).

Further, the predetermined ending information 44j is ending effect information after the jackpot round game. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the change display effect such as the volume performed during the ending effect after the jackpot round game. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F5).

In the above-described 17th embodiment, the jackpot round display effect by the second pattern is a pattern in which the display time of the predetermined ending information 44j is shortened by simultaneously displaying the predetermined ending information 44j, but in the present embodiment, the display time is shortened. The difference is that the display time is shortened in different display modes. This point will be advanced with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 18.

In the first pattern, as shown in (b) and (c), the predetermined ending information 44j (for example, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the insertion prevention information 44z) has a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds). Is a pattern displayed in a predetermined order (one by one), and the second pattern is as shown in (f) to (h) when the player performs an operation on the operation request image. In addition, the predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a shortened state in which the predetermined display time is shortened while maintaining the predetermined order.

Specifically, in the second pattern, the predetermined ending information 44j is the manufacturer information 44x (1 second), the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y (2 seconds), and the immersive prevention information 44z (2 seconds) in 5 seconds. It is displayed one by one in order.

As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the change display effect such as the volume without impairing the sameness of the content and the presentation method of the display effect in the first pattern and the second pattern.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment, in the first pattern, the predetermined ending information 44j (for example, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the insertion prevention information 44z) is displayed as a predetermined display. It is a pattern that is displayed in a predetermined order (one by one) in a time (for example, 25 seconds), and the second pattern is a shortened state in which the predetermined ending information 44j is kept in the predetermined order and the predetermined display time is shortened. (For example, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the insertion prevention information 44z are displayed in order in 5 seconds). As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the change display effect such as the volume without impairing the sameness of the content and the presentation method of the display effect in the first pattern and the second pattern. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F2).

In the 17th and 18th embodiments described above, the control by the second pattern has been executed in the jackpot ending display effect, but the control by the second pattern may be executed in another display effect, for example, the reach display effect. This point will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period during the reach display effect of the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating a display mode different from that of FIG. 76 during a specific operation period during the reach display effect.

First, refer to FIG. 76. The display control device 45 controls to display the display effect including displaying the reach display effect in a predetermined pattern on the third symbol display device 42. As shown in (a), the development reach display screen 43g is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and a confrontation-type reach development effect in which the own character PY and the enemy character TK confront each other is executed.

In the reach development effect of this embodiment, as shown in (b), a development reach suggestion image 43g2 suggesting that the reach may be a hit is displayed. The development reach suggestion image 43g2 displays a frame in which four characters are hidden, and reveals the characters one by one, for example, at the timing when the last character is revealed (or the timing before that). It is an effect that suggests the possibility of winning in a predetermined manner. In a predetermined mode, for example, a color suggesting a hit is displayed around a character (for example, if the expectation of a hit is low, the same color as other characters, if the expectation of a hit is high, the color is displayed in red, and if the expectation of a hit is high, a rainbow is displayed. It is an aspect of displaying in color). In order to suggest this, the development reach suggestion image 43g2 is displayed with the text information "If the rainbow pattern appears, the victory is rich?". Since the development reach suggestion image 43g2 is an effect of clarifying one character every 2 seconds, the effect time is usually 8 seconds.

The display control device 45 controls to display an operation request image requesting the player to operate the frame button 80 during the reach development effect. The operation request image is the information 44a during the specific operation period displayed at the same time as the display of the development reach suggestion image 43g2. Information 44a during the specific operation period displays text information such as "This effect takes 8 seconds. If you want to know quickly, press the button." It is suggested that by operating the frame button 80, the development reach suggestion effect that takes 8 seconds can be shortened and the result can be known. The operation of the frame button 80 has an effective period of 8 seconds when the development reach suggestion image 43g2 changes. The elapsed time of the valid period of the frame button 80 is displayed by displaying the information 44a during the specific operation period and at the same time displaying the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period.

The display control device 45 controls to display the operation display effect (fast-forward display effect) using the frame button 80 during the reach display effect, triggered by the operation of the frame button 80 by the player with respect to the operation request image. As a result, the player can shorten the development reach suggestion effect that takes 8 seconds and know the result.

This development reach suggestion effect is displayed in a predetermined pattern. The predetermined patterns are the first pattern displayed when the operation request image is displayed and the player does not perform an operation on the operation request image, and the operation request image is displayed and the operation request image is displayed. It has a second pattern when the player performs the operation.

The first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined display time and in a predetermined display mode. Specifically, the first pattern is the first development reach suggestion information g2a, the second development reach suggestion information g2b, the third development reach suggestion information g2c, and the fourth development, which are four characters constituting the development reach suggestion image 43g2. This is a pattern in which reach suggestion information g2d is revealed one by one at 2-second intervals (for a total of 8 seconds).

The second pattern is a fast-forward display effect in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a display mode different from that of the first pattern with a shorter display time than the first pattern, and is produced after the display of the predetermined display information is completed. This is the pattern in which the result display is displayed. Specifically, in the second pattern, the first development reach suggestion information g2a to the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d, which are four characters constituting the development reach suggestion image 43g2, are sequentially arranged one by one at 1-second intervals (total). It is displayed (in 4 seconds), and the result display of the fast-forward display effect is displayed at the timing when the display content of the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is found.

The first pattern and the second pattern will be described in a little more detail.
In the first pattern, it is clarified that the first development reach suggestion information g2a of the first character is "ge" at the timing of the remaining 6 seconds shown in (c), and the timing of the remaining 4 seconds shown in (d). Then, it was clarified that the second development reach suggestion information g2b of the second character was "ki", and at the timing of the remaining 2 seconds shown in (e), the third development reach suggestion information g2c of the third character became "ki". It is a pattern in which it is clarified that it is "a", and the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d of the fourth character is clarified as "tsu" at the timing of 0 seconds remaining shown in (f), and the pattern ends. As shown in (f), if the pattern around the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is rainbow-colored, it is suggested that the reach is highly expected to be a hit.

After the rainbow color appears, as shown in (g), in the confrontation type reach development production, the attack image 43g4 emitted by the own character PY against the enemy character TK is displayed in the rainbow color suggesting victory. As shown in (h), the own character PY wins, and the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the reach development effect. On the other hand, as shown in (i), if the pattern around the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is the same as the other characters, it is suggested that the expectation that the reach will be a hit is not so high. In this case, as shown in (j), the attack image 43g4 is displayed in a normal color, and as shown in (k), the own character PY loses to the enemy character TK, and the off-design stops in the reach development effect. It is often displayed.

The second pattern refers to FIG. 77. The second pattern is a pattern in which the suggestion effect of the first pattern is fast-forwarded in 4 seconds. In the specific operation period end proximity information 44e, when the frame button 80 is pressed while the specific operation period end proximity information 44a is displayed, for example, "remaining 8 seconds" indicating the specific operation period end proximity information 44e selects the fast-forward effect. It changes to "3 seconds remaining during fast forward" indicating that it has been done.

The first development reach suggestion information g2a "ge" of the first character is clarified at the timing of the remaining 3 seconds shown in (b), and the second development of the second character is revealed at the timing of the remaining 2 seconds shown in (c). The reach suggestion information g2b "ki" is clarified, and the third development reach suggestion information g2c "a" of the third character is clarified at the timing of the remaining 1 second shown in (d), and the remaining 0 shown in (e). At the timing of seconds, the 4th development reach suggestion information g2d "tsu" of the 4th character is clarified and the process ends. In the suggestion effect of the second pattern, since the result is displayed earlier than the suggestion effect of the first pattern, a privilege image using this surplus time is inserted in the confrontation type reach development effect after the suggestion effect is completed.

As shown in (f), the privilege image is a defense image 43g5 in which the own character PY defends against an attack emitted by the enemy character TK. When the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is in rainbow color, the defense image 43g5 is displayed in rainbow color, which suggests that the reach is certain. In this case, the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is displayed in red, and the defense image 43g5 is displayed in rainbow color for the first time, so that the player's surprise timing is matched with the display timing of this privilege image. May be good. After that, as shown in (g), the attack image 43g4 (rainbow color) is displayed, and as shown in (h), the hit symbol in the reach development effect is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, as shown in (i), if the pattern around the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is the same as the other characters, it is suggested that the expectation that the reach will be a hit is not so high. In this case, as shown in (j), the defense image 43g5 is also displayed in the normal color in the privilege image, and as shown in (k), the attack image 43g4 is displayed in the normal color, and in (l). As shown, there are many cases where the own character PY loses to the enemy character TK and the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed in the reach development effect.

As a result, the fast-forward display effect can be enjoyed without significantly impairing the enjoyment of the reach display effect depending on whether the frame button 80 is effectively operated for the operation request image or the frame button 80 is not operated. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the reach display production.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 that displays the display effect related to the game including the reach display effect, and the frame button that the player can operate according to the display effect. The display control device 45 includes an 80 and a display control device 45 that controls the display of the display effect including displaying the reach display effect in a predetermined pattern on the display means, and the display control device 45 allows the player to operate the frame button 80. The operation request execution function that controls the display of the operation request image (information 44a during the specific operation period) during the reach display effect, and the operation display using the frame button 80 triggered by the player's operation on the operation request image. It is equipped with an operation display effect execution function that controls the display of the effect (fast-forward display effect) during the reach display effect, and the predetermined pattern is displayed with an operation request image and operated by the player with respect to the operation request image. When the above is not performed, the predetermined display information (for example, the development reach suggestion image 43g2) has a predetermined display time (for example, 8 seconds) and the predetermined display mode (for example, the first development reach suggestion information g2a to the fourth development reach suggestion). When the first pattern in which the information g2d is displayed one by one at 2-second intervals) and the operation request image are displayed and the player performs an operation on the operation request image, a predetermined development reach is achieved. The suggestion image 43g2 has a shorter display time than the first pattern (for example, 4 seconds) and has a display mode different from that of the first pattern (for example, the first development reach suggestion information g2a to the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d are at 1-second intervals. It has a second pattern in which the images are displayed one by one (in order), and the result display of the fast-forward display effect is executed after the display of the predetermined development reach suggestion image 43g2 is completed. As a result, when the frame button 80 is effectively operated with respect to the operation request image, the enjoyment of the reach display effect is improved by enjoying the fast-forward display effect without significantly impairing the interest of the reach display effect. can do. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F1).

Further, in the first pattern, the predetermined development reach suggestion image 43g2 is displayed in a predetermined order (for example, the first development reach suggestion information g2a to the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d are every 2 seconds) in a predetermined display time (for example, 8 seconds). The second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined development reach suggestion image 43g2 is displayed in a shortened state in which the predetermined display time is shortened while maintaining the predetermined order (for example, in 4 seconds at 1-second intervals). It is a pattern to be done. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the fast-forward display effect without impairing the same content and presentation of the reach display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F2).

Further, the predetermined development reach suggestion image 43g2 is suggestion effect information (first development reach suggestion information g2a to fourth development reach suggestion image g2d) displayed during the reach development production. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the fast-forward display effect performed during the suggestion effect displayed during the reach development effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F6).

In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot ending display effect is not connected to the reach display effect that led to the jackpot ending display effect, but in this embodiment, the reach display effect and the jackpot ending display effect are produced. The difference is that they are related in the content. This point will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81.

In FIG. 78, (a) is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table in Example 20, and (b) is a special figure 2 big hit lottery table. FIG. 79 is a table for selecting a special figure 1 main decorative symbol variation pattern according to a twenty embodiment. FIG. 80 is a table for determining the ending effect pattern of Example 20.

The display control device 45 can control the display of information related to the specific effect executed during the display effect in the ending effect. As a result, the ending effect and the display effect up to the ending effect are associated with each other by the specific effect, and the fun of the display effect continues to the ending effect through the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved. ..

The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a variable display effect of the identification information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the result of the lottery is a specific result, for example, a variable display effect of the main decorative symbol SZ or the developed symbol HZ. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect as well as the variable display effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a reach display effect of the identification information, for example, a reach display effect of the main decorative symbol SZ or the developed symbol HZ. As a result, it becomes easier to remember the specific effect as well as the reach display effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

The specific effect is a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the possibility of producing a specific result is higher than that in the case where the specific effect is not executed. The specific suggestion effect is, for example, a confrontation effect between the own character PY and the enemy character TK or a mission clear effect by the own character PY. As a result, the meaning of the suggestion (the appearance rate is lower than normal reach A, B and super reach A, B, and when it appears, it is easier to hit than normal reach A, B and super reach A, B. ) Can be easily remembered by the player who understands the specific suggestion effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 78, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the probability variation continuation and the number of times of support continue until the next jackpot in both the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table and the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table. different. That is, in this embodiment, the probability variation continuation and the number of times of support obtained by the 16R probability variation jackpot are distinguished so as to be larger than the other probability variation jackpots (100 times).

As shown in FIG. 79, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot (big hit symbol counter C2 is 0 to 9), the jackpot super reach E (120 seconds) is selected for the special figure 1 main decorative symbol variation pattern selection table. Is set to. The production system of Super Reach E is a battle system. In the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot (big hit symbol counter C2 is 10 to 49), the jackpot super reach C and D are all set to be selected. The production system of Super Reach C and D is a battle system. In the case of 8R normal jackpot (big hit symbol counter C2 is 50 to 99), jackpot normal reach A and B or jackpot super reach A and B are set to be selected. That is, in this embodiment, the reach production that may be a 16R probability variation jackpot, the reach production that may be an 8R probability variation jackpot, or the reach production that may be an 8R normal jackpot is the reach production. It is distinguished by type. The same applies to the special figure 2 main decorative pattern variation pattern selection table.

As shown in FIG. 80, the ending effect pattern determination table corresponds to the above-mentioned main decorative symbol variation pattern selection table. The ending effect pattern of the 16R probability variation (special 1) is that after the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the light emission gaze prevention information 44o are displayed in order, the ending effect pattern is displayed. This is a pattern in which EF victory rush rush information 44α1 is displayed as a specific effect. The EF victory rush rush information 44α1 indicates that this jackpot round game state occurred after passing through Super Reach E and F (defeating the enemy characters TKE and TKF described later), and the probability change continuation and the number of support times will be the next jackpot. This is information that suggests to the player that the rush effect that continues until is started. Similarly, in the 16R probability change (special 2), the next game state suggestion information 44w, the combined information of the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y and the light emission gaze prevention information 44o are displayed in order, and then the EF victory rush entry information 44α1 is displayed. Will be done. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the relationship between the reach display effect that generated the ending display effect and what kind of advantageous gaming state will occur in the future.

In the ending effect pattern of the 8R probability variation (special 1), the composite information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and the manufacturer information 44x and the manufacturer information 44x are displayed in order, and then the CD rush entry information 44α2 is displayed. It is a pattern. The CD rush rush information 44α2 indicates that this jackpot round game state occurred after passing through Super Reach C and D (defeating the enemy characters TKC and TKD described later), and that the probability change continuation and the number of support times are 100 times from now on. This is information that suggests to the player that the rush effect will start. Similarly, in the 8R probability change (special 2), the CD rush rush information 44α2 is displayed after the composite information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and the manufacturer information 44x is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the relationship between the reach display effect that generated the ending display effect and what kind of advantageous gaming state will occur in the future.

The ending effect pattern of 8R normal (special 1) based on normal reach A and B is a chance after the combined information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y and the manufacturer information 44x are displayed in order. This is a pattern in which the mode entry information 44α3 is displayed. The ending effect pattern of 8R normal (special 1) based on super reach A and B is after the combined information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y and the manufacturer information 44x are displayed in order. This is a pattern in which the chance mode entry information 44α3 is displayed. The chance mode entry information 44α3 is information that suggests to the player that the chance production with 100 support times will start from now on. In the ending effect pattern of 8R normal (special 1) based on super reach A and B, mission clear mode entry information indicating that the mission effect in super reach A and B is cleared instead of the chance mode entry information 44α3. May be displayed.

Next, a display mode in the third symbol display device 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 81.
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a display mode from the reach display effect to the jackpot round display effect.

The display control device 45 performs a specific effect during the reach development effect, for example, a confrontation effect between the own character PY and the enemy character TKC in the case of Super Reach C, and a confrontation effect between the own character PY and the enemy character TKD in the case of Super Reach D. , If it is Super Reach E, the confrontation effect between the own character PY and the enemy character TKE is executed, and if it is Super Reach F, the confrontation effect between the own character PY and the enemy character TKF is executed. Here, it is assumed that the jackpot super reach E is determined as the reach development effect, and as a specific effect, the effect in which the own character PY wins as a result of the confrontation between the own character PY and the enemy character TKE is executed.

As shown in (a), the display control device 45 controls to display a selection request image that requests the player to make a predetermined selection (selection of the own character PY) during the reach development effect. The own character PY has three types, the first character PY1, the second character PY2, and the third character PY3, as in the case of the thirteenth embodiment described above. The selection request image is information 44a (“long press to change player”) during the specific operation period. The selection of the own character PY is determined as the first character PY1 without operating the frame button 80 as it is (the first character PY1 remains), or the second character PY2 or the third character PY2 or the third character PY2 is selected by operating the frame button 80. It is a choice to change to the character PY3.

As shown in (b), it is assumed that the first character PY1 is selected as a result of selecting the own character PY. The confrontation effect between the own character PY and the enemy character TKE is executed when the own character PY requested by the selection request image is selected. As a result, it becomes easier to remember the specific effect as well as the predetermined selection required by the operation request image, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

As a result of the confrontation effect, as shown in (c), the own character PY (first character PY1) wins the enemy character TKE, and the development symbol HZ is stopped and displayed with the jackpot combination of "777". Then, as shown in (d), after the 16R jackpot round game is completed, the jackpot ending effect is started.

The display control device 45 can control the display of information related to the specific effect executed during the reach development effect in the ending effect. The information related to the specific effect is EF victory rush rush information 44α1 if it is either jackpot super reach E or F, and CD victory rush rush information 44α2 if it is any of jackpot super reach C or D. As a result, the ending effect and the display effect up to the ending effect are associated with each other by the specific effect, and the fun of the display effect continues to the ending effect through the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved. ..

The jackpot ending effect is a combination of the next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (e), the manufacturer information 44x shown in (f), the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y shown in (g), and the light emission gaze prevention information 44o. Is displayed in order, and then the EF victory rush rush information 44α1 shown in (h) is displayed. The EF victory rush rush information 44α1 is displayed as, for example, character information such as "the rush rush after the own character A defeats the enemy character E!". When the display of the EF victory rush rush information 44α1 is completed as shown in (i), the high probability state screen 43k is displayed as shown in (j), and the high probability / support state continues until the next big hit. After A defeats the enemy character E, it shifts to the "rush" state. The own character A is the first character PY1.

The information related to the specific effect (EF victory rush rush information 44α1) is information that points to the component of the specific effect, for example, "the own character A is the enemy character E" that points to the component of the confrontation effect between the own character PY1 and the enemy character TKE. "Rush rushes after defeating!", But information indicating the player's selected own character "Rush rushes after winning own character A!" And information indicating the enemy character selected as the opponent of the own character. It may be "Rush rush after subduing enemy character E!" Or information indicating that it has passed through the confrontation reach "Rush rush after EF confrontation zone breakthrough!". Even with these, it becomes easier to remember the display effect by displaying the components of the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 20th embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the display effect triggered by the lottery based on the establishment of the starting condition and the third symbol display device 42 for displaying the display effect. The display control device 45 includes a display control device 45 that controls the display on the screen, and the display control device 45 has a specific effect execution function that controls the execution of the specific effect during the display effect, and the result of the lottery is a specific result. Based on this, the variable winning device 32 is executed a predetermined number of times from the open state in which the game ball can enter to the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, and the next game starts from the end of the round game. It is equipped with an ending effect execution function that controls the display of the ending effect that displays predetermined information during the ending period up to the time, and the ending effect execution function is a specific effect executed during the display effect (for example, reach development effect). It is possible to control to display information (EF victory rush rush information 44α1, CD victory rush rush information 44α2) related to (for example, confrontation production between own character PY and specific enemy characters TKC, TKD, TKE, TKF) in the ending production. Is. As a result, the ending effect and the display effect up to the ending effect are associated with each other by the specific effect, and the fun of the display effect continues to the ending effect through the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved. ..

In addition, the information related to the specific effect is information that points to a component of the specific effect (for example, "Rush rushes after the own character A defeats the enemy character E" that points to the component of the confrontation effect between the own character PY and the enemy character TKE. Information such as "!"). As a result, it becomes easier to remember the display effect by displaying the components of the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G2).

The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a variable display effect of identification information (for example, a variable display effect of the main decorative symbol SZ or the developed symbol HZ) that makes it possible to identify whether or not the result of the lottery is a specific result. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect as well as the variable display effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G4).

The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a reach display effect of the identification information (for example, a reach display effect of the main decorative symbol SZ or the developed symbol HZ). As a result, it becomes easier to remember the specific effect as well as the reach display effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G5).

In addition, the specific effect has a higher possibility of producing a specific result than the case where the specific effect is not executed (for example, the own character PY and the specific enemy characters TKC, TKD, TKE, TKF). Showdown production). As a result, the player who understands the meaning of the suggestion can easily remember the specific suggestion effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G7).

Further, the display control device 45 makes a predetermined selection for the player during the display effect (whether to select the current state without operating the frame button 80 or to select the changed one by operating the frame button 80). The selection request execution function for controlling the display of the selection request image (information 44a during the specific operation period) is provided, and the specific effect is executed when there is a predetermined selection requested by the selection request image. As a result, it becomes easier to remember the specific effect together with the predetermined selection requested by the operation request image, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G9).

The selection request image is displayed during the variable display effect of the identification information (during the reach development effect by the development symbol HZ) that makes it possible to identify whether or not the result of the lottery is a specific result. As a result, the impression of the specific effect is likely to remain strong along with the variable display effect, and the interest of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G10).

In the above-described 20th embodiment, a specific reach display effect is displayed as a specific effect executed during the display effect, which is reflected in the jackpot ending display effect (playback). However, the specific reach display is performed. You may look back on the production other than the production. This point will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating the auxiliary effect determination process by the display control device 45 of the twenty-first embodiment. FIG. 83 (a) is a flowchart for explaining the one-shot notification lottery process by the display control device 45, and FIG. 83 (b) is a flowchart for explaining the one-shot notification display process by the display control device 45. FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b) are diagrams for explaining an ending effect pattern determination table.

In this embodiment, the specific effect is a specific notification effect that notifies that the possibility of a specific result is higher than that in the case where the specific effect is not executed. The specific notification effect is, for example, one shot by driving the one-shot notification accessory IP arranged around the third symbol display device 42 and causing it to appear in front of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42. It is an announcement production. As a result, the player who sees, hears, or experiences the notification can easily remember the specific notification effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

If the specific notification effect is a specific notification effect that notifies that the specific result is more likely to be obtained than the case where the specific effect is not executed, the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 is strongly emitted. It may be a directing. Further, a predetermined symbol formed on the transparent light guide plate arranged on the front surface of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, which is difficult to see at normal times, is emitted by an LED arranged on the side surface of the transparent light guide plate. It may be an effect of displaying as a visible pattern. Further, an effect of causing a specific image to appear during the reach display effect, or an effect of changing the image displayed during the reach display effect to a specific mode may be used.

The auxiliary effect determination process will be described. As shown in FIG. 82, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a process of displaying various suggestion images in step S3401. The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the one-shot notification lottery process described later in step S3402, and performs the one-shot notification display process described later in step S3403.

The one-announcement lottery process will be explained. As shown in FIG. 83A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines in step S3411 whether or not the jackpot variation pattern command has been received. Specifically, if the display jackpot fluctuation pattern designation command is received from the sub control device 262, the process proceeds to step S3412, and if not, the present process ends. In step S3412, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 reads the value of the one-shot notification lottery counter for internally determining whether or not to execute one-shot notification when a big hit result is obtained, and in step S3413. , Judge whether or not the value is a win for the execution of the one-shot notification effect. If the execution of the one-shot notification effect is won, the process proceeds to step S3414, and the one-shot notification flag is set from 0 to 1. If it is not selected, this process ends with the one notification flag set to 0.

One notification display processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 83B, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines in step S3421 whether or not the one notification flag is 1. If the one notification flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S3422, otherwise the process ends. In step S3422, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is set to have one notification. If it is set to have one notification, the process proceeds to step S3423, the one notification effect is executed at a predetermined timing, and after the execution of the one notification effect, the one notification flag is set to 1 in step S3424. Return to 0 to end this process. On the other hand, if the setting is such that there is no one notification, the process proceeds to step S3424, the one notification flag is returned from 1 to 0, and this process ends. The setting with or without one notification may be selected by the player as described later, or may be selected inside the gaming machine. If the player can select it, the player's preference for one notification can be reflected. If it can be selected inside the gaming machine, the disadvantage of the player continuing to see the one-shot announcement (eye strain, indifference to the one-shot announcement), or the disadvantage of not continuing to see the one-shot announcement (one-shot). There is no feeling of excitement due to the notification).

The table for determining the ending effect pattern will be described. FIG. 84 (a) shows the contents corresponding to 16R probability variation (special 1) in the ending effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58, and FIG. 84 (b) shows 8R of the ending effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. This is the content corresponding to the probability change (Special 1). The following explanation also applies to others.

When the jackpot super reach A and B shown in (a) are executed and no one-shot notification is set, the jackpot ending display effect suggests the next game state as in the case shown in FIG. 58. The information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the privilege video 44n are displayed in order. When the jackpot super reach A and B are executed and one notification is set, the jackpot ending display effect is a composite information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one notification effect change suggestion information 44γ. , The combined information of the manufacturer information 44x, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the privilege video 44n are displayed in order. The one-shot notification effect change suggestion information 44γ is information suggesting a change operation of whether or not to change the setting of the presence / absence of the one-shot notification effect. The same applies when the jackpot super reach C to F is executed.

When the jackpot super reach A and B shown in (b) are executed and no one-shot notification is set, the jackpot ending display effect suggests the next game state as in the case shown in FIG. 58. Information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y are displayed in order. When Super Reach A and B are executed and one notification is set, the jackpot ending display effect is the combined information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one notification effect change suggestion information 44γ. , The composite information of the manufacturer information 44x, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the privilege video 44n are displayed in order. The same applies when normal reach A and B and jackpot super reach C and D are executed.

Next, the display mode in the third symbol display device 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a display mode from the reach display effect to the jackpot ending display effect.

As shown in (a), the display control device 45 is a selection that requires the player to make a predetermined selection (selection of presence / absence of one-shot notification effect) during the reach development effect (for example, a mission clear effect based on Super Reach A). Controls the display of the requested image. The selection request image is information 44a during the specific operation period (“hold down to change the presence / absence of the one-shot notification effect”). Along with the information 44a during the specific operation period, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is displayed, and the time (for example, 10 seconds) in which the presence or absence of the one-shot notification effect can be selected is counted. If 10 seconds have passed without operating the frame button 80, it is determined that there is a one-shot notification effect.

The selection of the presence or absence of the one-shot notification effect is as shown in (b), as described above, whether the selection is determined to have the one-shot notification effect without operating the frame button 80 as it is (with the one-shot notification effect). It is an option to operate the frame button 80 as described above to change without a one-shot notification effect. When the frame button 80 is operated, the change information display unit 44c is displayed, and by operating the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83, it is possible to select no one-shot notification effect. If the decision button 81 is pressed, the selected mode is determined.

As a result of the selection, it is assumed that the one-shot notification effect is selected. The mission clear effect is executed when there is a selection of the presence or absence of the one-shot notification effect requested by the selection request image. As a result, it becomes easier to remember the specific effect together with the predetermined selection requested by the operation request image, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

In the middle of the mission clearing effect, as shown in (d), the one-shot notification character IP falls from the upper part of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 and is arranged in front of the one-shot notification character IP. A one-shot notification effect is performed in which a large number of LEDs and light emitting devices arranged around the display screen 42a emit light. The one-shot notification effect may output a sound that impresses the one-shot notification in accordance with the light emission. Eventually, the light emission ends, and the one-shot notification accessory IP is stored above the display screen 42a. In the mission clearing effect in which the one-shot notification effect is performed, as shown in (e), the own character PY clears the mission, and the development symbol HZ is stopped and displayed in a hit combination of, for example, "666". Then, as shown in (f), after the 8R jackpot round game is completed, the jackpot ending effect is started.

When the jackpot ending effect is selected without one notification, the next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (g), the manufacturer information 44x shown in (h), and the prevention of forgetting to remove the card shown in (i). This is a pattern in which information 44y is displayed. When one notification is selected, the light emission gaze prevention information 44o (textual information "Please keep watching the strong light") and the one notification production change suggestion information 44γ ("" If you are easily tired of your eyes, you can choose without one notification. "), The next game status suggestion information 44w shown in (k), the manufacturer information 44x shown in (l), and the card removal prevention information 44y. Is the pattern that is displayed. In addition, the next game state proximity information 44l6 that displays the remaining time of the jackpot ending effect is also displayed.

As described above, the display control device 45 can control to display the information related to the specific effect (light emission gaze prevention information 44o described above) executed during the reach development effect in the ending effect. The information related to the specific effect is information indicating a component of the specific effect, for example, information indicating "Please be careful to keep watching the strong light" indicating the light emission constituting the one-shot notification effect in the light emission gaze prevention information 44o. In addition to this, the information related to the specific effect constitutes the one-shot notification effect when the one-shot notification accessory IP capable of emitting light of a plurality of colors suggests a jackpot confirmation when the specific light is emitted. It may be information that reminds the player of a specific color, such as "What color was the light of the one-shot notification effect?", Which indicates the emission color. As a result, it becomes easier to remember the display effect by displaying the components of the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved.

In addition, the information related to the specific effect is information indicating the influence of the specific effect on the player, for example, the above-mentioned one-shot notification effect change suggestion information 44γ "If you are easily tired of your eyes, you can choose without one-shot notification". be. This suggests to the player that if there is an opportunity to select the presence or absence of the one-shot notification production again for the reach development production from the next time onward, the player should select the one who did not select this time (no one-shot notification) next time. Information to be done. As a result, it is possible to appeal to the player who is affected by the strong light in the eyes by the specific effect to rest his eyes, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 21st embodiment, the information related to the specific effect is the information indicating the component of the specific effect (for example, the light emission gaze prevention information 44o "Please be careful to keep watching the strong light". "Strong light"). As a result, it becomes easier to remember the display effect by displaying the components of the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G2).

In addition, the information related to the specific effect is information indicating the influence of the specific effect on the player (for example, one-shot notification effect change suggestion information 44γ "If the eyes are easily tired, select B next"). .. As a result, it is possible to appeal to the player who has been influenced by the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G3).

Further, the specific effect is a specific notification effect (one-shot notification effect by the one-shot notification character IP) that notifies that the possibility of a specific result is higher than when the specific effect is not executed. As a result, the player who sees, hears, or experiences the notification can easily remember the specific notification effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G8).

Further, the display control device 45 controls to display a selection request image (change information display unit 44c) that requests the player to make a predetermined selection (selection with or without one notification) during the reach development effect. It has a function, and the specific effect (one-shot notification effect) is executed when there is a predetermined selection requested by the selection request image. As a result, it becomes easier to remember the specific effect together with the predetermined selection requested by the operation request image, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G9).

In the above-described 21st embodiment, it was possible to select whether or not to execute the one-shot notification effect during the reach display effect, but the selection of whether or not to execute the one-shot notification effect is in the process of other display effects. You may. This point will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating an ending effect pattern determination table in the 22nd embodiment. FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating another display mode of the jackpot ending display effect.

That is, the selection request image is displayed at the same time as the information related to the specific effect (for example, the light emission gaze prevention information 44o) during the ending effect. As a result, it becomes possible to reconsider whether or not to make a predetermined selection after seeing the information related to the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the ending effect.

The table for determining the ending effect pattern will be described. (A) is the content corresponding to the 16R probability variation (Special 1) shown in FIG. 84, and (b) is the content corresponding to the 8R probability variation (Special 1) shown in FIG. 84.

When the jackpot super reaches A and B shown in (a) are executed, and when one notification is set, one notification is made for the one notification effect change proposal information 44γ1, which will be described later. When the change operation with or without the effect is not performed, the jackpot ending display effect is the combined information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1, the manufacturer information 44x, and the next game state suggestion. The combined information of the information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y and the privilege video 44n are displayed in order. When the jackpot super reach A and B are executed, and when one notification is set, there is no one notification effect for the one notification effect change proposal information 44γ1, which will be described later. When the change operation is performed, the jackpot ending display effect includes the combined information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1, and the combined information of the manufacturer information 44x and the next game state suggestion information 44w. , The one-shot notification effect change operation information 44γ2 and the privilege video 44n are displayed in order. The same applies when the jackpot super reach C to F is executed.

The one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1 is information that proposes a change operation for changing the setting of the presence / absence of the one-shot notification effect in this jackpot ending display effect. The one-shot notification effect change operation information 44γ2 is a change operation that changes the presence or absence of the one-shot notification effect when the frame button 80 is operated to change the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1. Information indicating the content.

When the jackpot super reach A and B shown in (b) are executed, and when one notification is set, one notification production is performed for the one notification production change proposal information 44γ1. When the presence / absence change operation is not performed, the jackpot ending display effect is the combined information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1, the manufacturer information 44x, and the next game state suggestion information 44w. And the compound information of the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y are displayed in order. When the jackpot super reach A and B are executed, when the one-shot notification is set, and when the change operation is performed for the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1, the jackpot is hit. The ending display effect is a combination of light emission gaze prevention information 44o and one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1, manufacturer information 44x, next game state suggestion information 44w, and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y. Notification effect change operation information 44γ2 is displayed in order. The same applies when the jackpot normal reach A and B and the jackpot super reach C and D are executed.

Next, the display mode in the third symbol display device 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating display modes from the reach display effect to the jackpot ending display effect. Since the display mode from the reach display effect to the jackpot round display effect is the same as that in FIG. 85, the jackpot ending display effect will be described from the start.

When one notification is set and one notification is executed during the reach effect leading to this jackpot ending display effect, as shown in (a), the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and one Combined information with the notification effect change proposal information 44γ1 is displayed. The one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1 is text information that, when one-shot notification is set, "If you are easily tired of your eyes, press the button and select no one-shot notification". Further, during the display period of the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is displayed, indicating the time for accepting the change operation of the one-shot notification effect. Throughout the display period of the ending display effect, the next game state proximity information 44l6 is displayed, indicating the remaining time of the ending display effect.

When the change operation of pressing the frame button 80 is not performed while the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1 is being displayed (10 seconds from the start of the ending effect), that is, the player changes the presence or absence of the one-shot notification effect. If not desired, the jackpot ending display effect is a composite information of the manufacturer information 44x (5 seconds) shown in (b), the next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (c), and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y ( 10 seconds) are displayed in order.

If a change operation is performed while the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1 is being displayed, that is, if the player wishes to change the presence or absence of the one-shot notification effect, the jackpot ending display effect is shown in (d). As described above, the combined information (5 seconds) of the manufacturer information 44x and the next game state suggestion information 44w is displayed. Further, during the display of the composite information, the post-specific operation standby information 44a3 that informs the player that the player is waiting until the start of the change operation of the one-shot notification effect is displayed. The post-specific operation standby information 44a3 is character information that says, "Wait a moment until the operation for changing the one-shot notification effect."

After displaying the manufacturer information 44x and the next game state suggestion information 44w, as shown in (e), the one-shot notification effect change operation information 44γ2 (10 seconds) causes the player to perform the one-shot notification effect change operation. Is displayed. The one-shot notification effect change operation information 44γ2 displays a change information display unit 44c that displays the presence / absence of the one-shot notification effect and an operation method display unit 44d that indicates the method of the change operation with / without the one-shot notification effect. .. In addition, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period indicating the remaining time of this change operation is also displayed.

As shown in (f), when the player operates the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83 to select no one-shot notification effect and presses the enter button 81, one-shot notification is made in the next game state. No production is set.

If the one-shot notification is set and the one-shot notification effect is executed during the reach effect leading to the jackpot ending display effect, the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1 is described in (a). Only is displayed, and the text information "If you want to see the one-shot notification effect this time, press the button and select with one-shot notification" may be displayed. When the player presses the button, the one-shot notification effect change operation information 44γ2 is displayed in the same manner as in (e) to (f). After the change operation is completed, as shown in (g), the remaining ending information 44j is displayed, and the game shifts to the next gaming state. In this way, when the player selects the one-shot notification effect during the ending display effect, the one-shot notification effect can be displayed in the next game state. As a result, in the ending production, it is possible to motivate the player to want to see the one-shot announcement production, and to continue the motivation for the game.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd embodiment, the selection request image (one-shot notification effect change suggestion information 44γ) is displayed during the ending display effect. As a result, the impression of the specific effect (one-shot notification effect) is likely to remain strong along with the ending display effect, and the interest of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G11).

The pachinko machine 10 of the 23rd embodiment is configured so that the third illumination unit (top lamp) 303 can be replaced with another third illumination unit (separate top lamp) 604 having a different size and shape. Further, even when the third illumination unit 303 is replaced with another third illumination unit 604, the decoration effect can be optimized. Hereinafter, a specific configuration will be described.

FIG. 88 is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 23 in a state where an illumination cover having a size different from that of FIG. 1 is attached. FIG. 89 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 88, and is a view showing a state in which illumination covers of different sizes are attached in a CC cross section. FIG. 90 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 88, and is a view showing a state in which illumination covers of different sizes are attached in a DD cross section. FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b) are views for explaining the adjustment of the light emitting region when the illumination covers of different sizes are attached.

The third illumination unit 303 has a configuration of being fixed to the front frame set 14 and a configuration of being removable to the front frame set 14 side.

Specifically, the third illumination unit 303 is configured to be fixed to the front frame set 14, and is a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light and a control mechanism that controls the mode of light emitted from the light irradiation device 607. A third illumination cover 609 that covers the front side of the light irradiation device 607 is provided as a configuration that is removable from the front frame set 14 side. The third illumination cover 609 can be replaced with a third illumination cover 610 having a different size and shape from the third illumination cover 609.

The third illumination cover 609 is made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin. The third illuminated cover 609 may be colorless or colored, or may be subjected to a frosted glass-like surface treatment. The third illumination cover 609 is provided with a diffusing member (diffusing plate) having irregularities for diffusing the light from the light irradiating device 607, or has an uneven portion for diffusing the light from the light irradiating device 607. 3 It is applied to the inner surface of the illuminated cover 609. As a result, the third illumination cover 609 can make it difficult for the player to see the light irradiation device 607. In addition to the third illumination cover 609 (that is, the third illumination portion 303), another third illumination cover 610, the first illumination portion 301, and the second illumination portion 302 are similarly configured.

The third illumination cover 609 constitutes the cover of the third illumination portion 303, and is attached to a portion sandwiched between the sound output portions 24 of the front frame set 14, and the upper end is inside the upper side of the inner frame 12. It is formed horizontally along the line, and its front end projects slightly forward of the sound output unit 24. The third illumination cover 609 is formed as a first light emitting region 605 in which the left and right side surfaces, the upper surface, the lower surface, and the like emit light with the front surface as the center.

The separate third illumination cover 610 constitutes the cover of the separate third illumination portion 604, and is attached to a portion sandwiched between the sound output portions 24 of the front frame set 14, but the upper end is the upper side of the inner frame 12. It is formed above, and the front end protrudes slightly forward from the time when the third illumination cover 609 is attached. That is, the separate third illumination cover 610 can be attached to the same location as the third illumination cover 609, but is formed as a larger illumination cover than the third illumination cover 609. The third illumination cover 610 is formed as a second light emitting region 606 in which the left and right side surfaces, the upper surface, the lower surface, and the like are wider than the first light emitting region 605 with the front surface as the center. The second light emitting region 606 of the third illumination cover 610 changes according to its shape.

The third illumination cover 610 is attached to a portion sandwiched between the sound output portions 24 of the front frame set 14 by a slide mechanism 602 that slides the third illumination cover 610 in the front-rear direction. The slide mechanism 602 is composed of slide grooves 603 formed on the upper and lower sides of the inner side surface of the cover of the sound output unit 24.

The slide groove 603 is formed in the front-rear direction so that the third illumination cover 609 and another third illumination cover 610 are vertically attached to the front frame set 14, but the third illumination cover 603 is formed. The cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610 may be attached so as to be inserted diagonally downward with respect to the front frame set 14. Further, the slide groove 603 may be one in which the third illumination cover 609 and another third illumination cover 610 can be attached / detached to / from the front frame set 14 in the vertical direction.

In the control mechanism 608, when the third illumination cover 609 is attached (that is, when the front surface of the third illumination cover 609 is located in the first position), the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is emitted. The first control of causing the front surface of the third illumination cover 609 located at the first position to emit light as the first light emitting region 605 is executed. The first control is control of the inclination, position, light emission intensity, light emission area, etc. of the light irradiation device 607 so that the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 preferably emits the first light emitting region 605. In this embodiment, the first control is the attitude control that maintains or shifts to the vertical attitude of the light irradiation device 607.

The control mechanism 608 was irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 when the separate third illumination cover 610 was attached (that is, when the front surface of the separate third illumination cover 610 was located at the second position). A second control is executed in which the front surface of the third illumination cover 610 located at the second position is made to emit light as the second light emitting region 606. The second control is control of the inclination, position, light emission intensity, light emission area, etc. of the light irradiation device 607 so that the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 preferably emits the second light emitting region 606. In the present embodiment, the second control is the attitude control in which the light irradiation device 607 is maintained or changed to a posture in which the light irradiation device 607 is tilted slightly upward.

As a result, even when the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 emits the first light emitting region 605 (that is, the third illumination cover 609), the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is the second light emitting region. Even when the 606 (that is, the separate third illumination cover 610) is made to emit light, it can be dealt with by optimizing the irradiation of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607, so that the light emitting region can be suitably changed. Even when the third illumination cover 609 arranged on the front frame set 14 of the gaming machine main body is replaced with another third illumination cover 610, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. Even when the shape of the third illumination cover 610 is changed from the shape of the third illumination cover 609 before the change, the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

The control mechanism 608 controls the light irradiation device 607 from the state in which the first control can be executed to the second control in the process of attaching another third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609. (Or, the state in which the second control can be executed is changed to the state in which the first control can be executed. The same applies hereinafter). As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed in the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 arranged in the front frame set 14 of the gaming machine main body with another third illumination cover 610.

The third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610 are provided with a locking mechanism 622 that can be locked and replaced with the front frame set 14 without using a tool. The locking mechanism 622 is composed of, for example, a claw portion 623 provided on the front frame set plate 14a, and a claw hole portion 624 provided on the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610. Since the claw portion 623 of the locking mechanism 622 is firmly inserted into the claw hole portion 624, the locking mechanism 622 is prevented from being easily removed by a player, a cheating person, or the like during business.

The control mechanism 608 changes the light irradiation device 607 from the state in which the first control can be executed to the state in which the second control can be executed in accordance with the replacement work of the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610. Change. As a result, the replacement work for appropriately changing the light emitting region can be easily performed.

Next, the first control and the second control performed by the control mechanism 608 will be specifically described.

The light irradiation device 607 includes a light emitting substrate 611 on which the LED 612 is arranged, and a substrate support portion 613 that supports the light emitting substrate 611. The board support portion 613 is rotatably supported by the main body side fixing portion 620 fixed to the front frame set 14.

The light irradiation device 607 is configured so that the light emitting substrate 611 can be tilted by the substrate support portion 613 and the main body side fixing portion 620. The control mechanism 608 changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed by tilting the light emitting substrate 611. Thereby, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted.

The control mechanism 608 is an input unit 614 for inputting a force generated in the process of attaching another third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609 in order to configure the light emitting substrate 611 to be tiltable. And an output unit 615 that changes the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 based on the input force.

The input unit 614 is a mechanism for pushing the light irradiation device 607 into the separate third illumination cover 610 in the process of attaching the separate third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609. Specifically, the input unit 614 includes a push-in portion 616 provided in the separate third illumination cover 610 and a push-in receiving portion 617 provided in the light irradiation device 607.

The push-in portion 616 is a protruding portion arranged on the inner surface of the left end portion in the front view of the separate third illumination cover 610. The protrusion of the push-in portion 616 is a push-receiver provided at the upper left end portion of the board support portion 613 in front view before being attached to the mounting location in the process of attaching the separate third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14. It is formed so as to come into contact with the portion 617 and tilt the substrate support portion 613 to the back side.

The push-in portion 616 is difficult for the player to see due to the uneven portion formed inside the separate third illumination cover 610, but in order to make the push-in portion 616 more difficult to see, the separate third illumination It may be formed on the side surface of the cover 610. In this case, the push-in receiving portion 617 is also formed on the side surface of the light irradiation device 607.

The push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 may be arranged at different positions of the separate third illumination cover 610 and the light irradiation device 607, depending on the difference in the structure to which the separate third illumination cover 610 is attached. If the slide groove 603 described above is configured to attach the third illumination cover 609 and another third illumination cover 610 so as to be inserted diagonally downward with respect to the front frame set 14, the push-in receiving portion 617 is attached to the light irradiation device 607. Even if the pushing portion 616 is formed at a position where the pushing receiving portion 617 protruding toward the back side of the light irradiation device 607 can be pushed (inner surface of another third illumination cover 610). good. As a result, the push-in receiving portion 617 is hidden behind the light irradiation device 607 when the third illumination cover 609 is attached, and the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 are attached to the third illumination cover 310. Since both of them are hidden behind the light irradiating device 607, not only are they not visible to the player, but also the light emitting area of the light irradiating device 607 can be made wider.

The output unit 615 tilts the light emitting substrate 611 by tilting the light irradiation device 607 based on the force input from the input unit 614, so that the light irradiation device 607 can be subjected to the first control. It is a mechanism that changes to a state in which the second control can be executed. Specifically, the output section 615 includes a board support section 613, a main body side fixing section 620, a shaft 618, a coil spring 619 attached to the shaft 618, and a posture control section 621 that regulates the posture of the board support section 613. It is composed of and.

The shaft 618 connects the substrate support portion 613 and the main body side fixing portion 620 so that the substrate support portion 613 can tilt with respect to the main body side fixing portion 620. The coil spring 619 is attached to the shaft 618 and generates an urging force on the substrate support portion 613 and the main body side fixing portion 620. In the process of attaching the separate third illumination cover 610, the coil spring 619 increases the urging force as the pushing portion 616 comes into contact with the pushing receiving portion 617 and tilts the substrate support portion 613 to the back side, so that the pushing portion 616 The urging force is greatest at the position where the pushing ends.

The posture control unit 621 is a stopper provided on the substrate support unit 613. The urging force of the coil spring 619 is regulated by the posture regulating portion 621 in a posture in which the substrate supporting portion 613 is vertical with the third illumination cover 609 attached.

As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of attaching the third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 609. In the process of attaching another third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609, the force of the other third illumination cover 610 pushing the light irradiation device 607 is used to make the light emitting region suitable. Can be changed. The irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by using the force input in the process of attaching another third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 609.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 23rd embodiment, the third illumination unit 303 (third illumination cover 609) and the third illumination unit 303 arranged on the front side of the game machine main body. It is provided with a light irradiating device 607 that irradiates light toward the back surface side of the slingshot. Since the pachinko machine 10 can transfer a predetermined surface (for example, the front surface) of the third illumination unit 303 that receives the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 by the transfer mechanism 602 to a different position, the third electric machine 10 can be used. The impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the decorative portion 303. When the predetermined surface is located at the first position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 executes the first control of emitting the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region 605. When the predetermined surface is located at the second position, the control for executing the second control that the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 emits the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region 606. Since the mechanism 608 is provided, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the transition of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H1) described above.

Further, the third illumination unit 303 is a replaceable third illumination cover 609 arranged on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10, and the first light emitting region 605 is a predetermined portion of the third illumination cover 609. The second light emitting region 606 provided on the surface is provided on a predetermined surface of another third illumination cover 610 to be replaced with the third illumination cover 609, and is therefore arranged on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10. Even when the third illumination cover 609 is replaced with another third illumination cover 610, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H2) described above.

Further, the light irradiation device 607 is a light emitting substrate 611 mounted on the front frame set 14. As a result, when the third illumination cover 609 arranged on the front frame set 14 of the gaming machine main body is replaced with another third illumination cover 610, the light emitting board 611 is not on the third illumination cover 609 side. Even when the front frame set 14 is provided, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H3) described above.

Further, in the first control, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is set to a right angle (first irradiation angle) of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 with respect to the first light emitting region 605. The second control is to set the irradiation area of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to the first light emitting region 605 as the first irradiation area (front surface of the third illumination cover 609). , A second irradiation angle different from the first irradiation angle (inclined from the first irradiation angle) and a second irradiation area different from the first irradiation area (wider than the first irradiation area). The irradiation area of. Thereby, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by changing the irradiation angle and the irradiation area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H4) described above.

Further, the second light emitting region 606 of the separate third illumination cover 610 changes according to its shape. As a result, even when the shape of the separate third illumination cover 610 is changed from the shape of the third illumination cover 609 before the change, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H5) described above.

Further, the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610 can be replaced without using a tool. As a result, the replacement work for appropriately changing the light emitting region can be easily performed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H6) described above.

Further, the light irradiation device 607 can be tilted. As a result, the irradiation angle can be adjusted regardless of whether the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 emits the first light emitting region 605 or the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 emits the second light emitting region 606. It can be easily adjusted. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H7) described above.

Further, the control mechanism 608 is in a state in which the light irradiation device 607 can execute the second control from the state in which the first control can be executed in the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with another third illumination cover 610. Therefore, the light emitting region can be suitably changed in the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with another third illumination cover 610. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H9) described above.

Further, the control mechanism 608 provides an input unit 614 for inputting a force generated in the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with another third illumination cover 610, and a light irradiation device 607 based on the input force. Since it is provided with an output unit 615 that changes the state in which the first control can be executed to the state in which the second control can be executed, the force generated in the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with another third illumination cover 610 is generated. It can be utilized to suitably change the light emitting region. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H10) described above.

Further, the input unit 614 has a push-in portion 616 and a push-receiver 617 that push the light irradiation device 607 into the separate third illumination cover 610 in the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with another third illumination cover 610. Therefore, in the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with another third illumination cover 610, the light emitting region is suitably changed by utilizing the force that the other third illumination cover 610 pushes the light irradiation device 607. be able to. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H11) described above.

Further, the output unit 615 tilts the light irradiation device 607 based on the input force to change the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed. Let me. Thereby, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by utilizing the force input in the process of attaching the third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 609. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H12) described above.

Further, the main body of the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11 with one side portion of the outer frame 11 as an opening / closing shaft. A front frame set 14 that can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 with one side portion of the inner frame 12 as an opening / closing shaft is provided. The game board 30 is provided with a game board 30 having a game area 30a on which the attached game ball flows down, and the game board 30 occurs during the variation display of the third symbol and when the variation display of the third symbol results in a big hit. The front frame set 14 includes a symbol display device 42 having a display screen 42a for displaying a display effect during a jackpot game state and an opening for making the display screen 42a visible, and the front frame set 14 covers the game area 30a and the display screen 42a. A glass frame portion 23 surrounding the glass plate 137 to be made visible is provided, and the third illumination portion 303 is made visible from the front side of the front frame set 14 of the main body of the pachinko machine 10. This facilitates the transition of the light emitting portion on the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body, and optimizes the light irradiation direction according to the transition of the light emitting portion, thereby appropriately changing the light emitting region. Can be made to. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I2) described above.

Further, since the third illumination unit 303 is attached to the glass frame portion 23 of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body, it is easy to change the light emitting portion in the glass frame portion 23 of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body. By optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the light emitting portion in the glass frame portion 23, the light emitting region in the glass frame portion 23 can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I3) described above.

Further, since the third illumination unit 303 is a transparent resin member and is configured so that the control mechanism 608 is difficult to see, the control mechanism 608 can be made inconspicuous. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) described above.

Further, since the control mechanism 608 is arranged so as not to overlap the front surface of the light emitting unit mounting surface of the light irradiation device 607, the light emitting region can be suitably changed without blocking the light emitting unit mounting surface. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) described above.

In Example 23 described above, the control mechanism 608 changes the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 by tilting the light irradiation device 607, but the light irradiation device 607 is fixed and the light irradiation is performed. A configuration that changes the mode of the light emitted from the device 607 may be adopted. Hereinafter, a specific configuration will be described.

FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b) are views for explaining the adjustment of the light emitting region in the 24th embodiment.

In this embodiment, the light irradiation device 607 is fixed to the front frame set 14, and the light transmitted from the light irradiation device 607 is transmitted to the first light emitting region 605 or the second light emitting region 606. It has. The translucent portion 630 includes a translucent plate 631 that transmits light emitted from the light irradiating device 607 and outputs the light to the front side, a translucent plate support portion 632 that supports the translucent plate 631, and Example 23. A similar control mechanism 608 is provided. The light transmitting plate 631 may be colorless or colored transparent, or may have a property of diffusing light.

The configuration of the light transmitting plate support portion 332 is the same as the configuration of the substrate support portion 613 that tilts the light emitting substrate 611 of the 23rd embodiment. That is, when the third illumination cover 609 is attached by the control mechanism 608, the light transmitting plate support portion 632 transmits the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 while maintaining the vertical posture, and the first light transmitting plate support portion 632 transmits the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607. The light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is emitted from the light irradiation device 607 in a tilted posture when the third illumination cover 610 is replaced. Refracts diagonally upward where is located and transmits light.

Thereby, not only the light irradiation device 607 can be tilted but also the light transmitting portion 630 can be tilted, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted and the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 24th embodiment, the light irradiation device 607 is fixed to the front frame, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is emitted from the first light emitting region 605 or the second light emitting region 605. A translucent portion 630 that transmits light is provided in the region 606, and the translucent portion 630 can be tilted. Thereby, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted not only in the configuration in which the light irradiation device 607 can be tilted but also in the configuration in which the light transmitting portion 630 can be tilted. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H8) described above.

In Examples 23 and 24 described above, the input unit 614 and the output unit 615 of the control mechanism 608 tilt the light emitting substrate 313 by the force of the pushing unit 616 pushing the light emitting substrate 313, but the control mechanism 608 The input unit 614 and the output unit 615 may have different configurations. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the 23rd and 24th embodiments will be specifically described.

FIG. 93 is a front view of the pachinko machine of the 25th embodiment. FIG. 94 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 93, and is a view showing a state in which the illumination cover is attached in an EE cross section. FIG. 95 is a front view of a pachinko machine with different sized illumination covers attached. FIG. 96 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 95, and is a view showing a state in which illumination covers of different sizes are attached in an FF cross section. FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b) are views for explaining the adjustment of the light emitting region when the illumination covers of different sizes are attached. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a normal process by the sub control device.

The control mechanism 608 is based on the detection of the separate cover detection sensor 641 for detecting that the separate third illumination cover 610 is attached to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 609, and the detection of the separate cover detection sensor 641. It is provided with a tilting motor 642 that changes the mode of light emitted from the light irradiation device 607. Thereby, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by detecting that another third illumination cover 610 is attached to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 609.

The separate cover detection sensor 641 is attached to a portion facing the inner surface of the third illumination cover 609, for example, at the upper left of the main body side fixing portion 620 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The separate cover detection sensor 641 is, for example, a limit switch. The separate cover detection sensor 641 detects that the separate third illumination cover 610 is not attached because the hinge does not push the contact when the third illumination cover 609 is attached. When the separate cover detection sensor 641 is replaced with the separate third illumination cover 610, its hinge is pushed into a part of the separate third illumination cover 610 (for example, the separate cover detection protrusion 643 described later) to switch the switch. It is detected that another third illumination cover 610 is attached by being pushed.

The separate third illuminated cover 610 is provided with a separate cover detection protrusion 643 at a position corresponding to the separate cover detection sensor 641 on the inner surface on the right side thereof when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The separate cover detection protrusion 643 reliably contacts the separate cover detection sensor 641 when the separate third illuminated cover 610 is attached to the front frame set 14. The configuration of the separate cover detection sensor 641 is not limited to the above configuration, and may be, for example, a non-contact sensor.

When the third illumination cover 609 is attached in place of the other third illumination cover 610, the alternative cover detection sensor 641 separates the hinge from the switch when the other third illumination cover 610 is removed. 3 Detects that the illumination cover 610 has been removed. Thereby, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by detecting that the third illumination cover 609 is attached to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 610.

The separate cover detection sensor 641 and the tilting motor 642 are electrically connected to the sub control device 262. When it is detected by the separate cover detection sensor 641 that the separate third illumination cover 610 is attached, the sub control device 262 rotates the tilting motor 642 until it reaches a predetermined angle, and the light irradiation device 607 causes the light irradiation device 607 to rotate. The substrate support portion 613 is tilted so as to change from the vertical posture to the tilted posture. When it is detected by the separate cover detection sensor 641 that the separate third illumination cover 610 has been removed, the sub control device 262 reversely rotates the tilting motor 642 until it reaches a predetermined angle, and the light irradiation device 607. The substrate support portion 613 is erected so that the posture changes from the tilted posture to the vertical posture. The tilting motor 642 may be controlled by detecting the rotation angle by a potentiometer or an encoder, or by applying a pulse voltage corresponding to a predetermined rotation angle by using a stepping motor.

Next, the normal processing performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 will be described as being different from the above-described embodiment. In step S2103A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adjusts the light emitting region after notifying the power-on of step S2103. Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives the ON signal from the separate cover detection sensor 641 (the detection signal that the separate third illumination cover 610 is attached), the tilting motor 642 is specified. The light emitting region is adjusted by rotating the light irradiation device 607 until it reaches an angle and tilting the substrate support portion 613 so that the light irradiation device 607 changes from the vertical posture to the tilted posture. After adjusting the light emitting area, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the customer waiting effect in step S2104. The steps of power-on notification, light emitting area adjustment, and customer waiting effect may be performed in different orders or at the same time. As a result, when the third illumination cover 610 is attached, it is possible to confirm the change in the light emitting region before the game is started, so that defects during the game are reduced and the light emitting region is preferably set. Can change.

In step S2107, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 edits the lamp lighting pattern corresponding to (synchronized with) the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 of the model. As the lamp lighting pattern, different lighting patterns may be adopted depending on whether the third illumination cover 609 is attached or another third illumination cover 610 is attached. The opportunity for adopting a different lighting pattern is not limited to the replacement of the separate third illumination cover 610, but may be the replacement of the main control device 261 and the sub control device 262 accompanying the installation of the separate third illumination cover 610. .. As a result, when the separate third illumination cover 610 is attached, it is possible to show a lamp lighting pattern different from that when the third illumination cover 609 is attached.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 25th embodiment, the third illumination unit 303 (third illumination cover 609) and the third illumination unit arranged on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 The light irradiation device 607 that irradiates the 303 with light is provided. The pachinko machine 10 can use the transfer mechanism 602 to transfer a predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 that emits light by the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to the first position and the second position. Therefore, the impression of the front side of the gaming machine can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303. Since the pachinko machine 10 includes a separate cover detection sensor 614 capable of detecting the transition of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303, the transition of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 can be recognized. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the predetermined surface has changed to the first position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 emits light with the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region 605. When the predetermined surface is transferred to the second position by executing the first control for causing the light to be generated, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 emits light with the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region. Since the control mechanism 608 for executing the second control for causing the light to be generated is provided, the light emitting region is recognized by recognizing the transition of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 and optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the predetermined surface. Can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J1) described above.

Further, the control mechanism 608 is based on the input unit 614 in which the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 from the first position to the second position is input and the input force. 3 A contact-type separate cover detection sensor 641 capable of detecting that the predetermined surface of the illumination unit 303 has changed from the first position to the second position, and the predetermined surface from the first position to the second position. When it is detected that the transition has occurred, the light irradiation device 607 includes an output unit 615 that changes from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed. The light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the above position from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J2) described above.

Further, the input unit 614 receives the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 from the first position to the second position, and pushes the contact type separate cover detection sensor 641 into the separate cover detection. Since the projection 643 is used, the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 from the first position to the second position is received and the force of pushing the contact type separate cover detection sensor 614 is used. Therefore, the light emitting region can be preferably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J3) described above.

Further, since the third illumination unit 303 is a transparent resin member and is configured so that the control mechanism 608 is difficult to see, the control mechanism 608 can be made inconspicuous. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) described above.

Further, since the control mechanism 608 is arranged so as not to overlap the front surface of the light emitting unit mounting surface of the light irradiation device 607, the light emitting region can be suitably changed without blocking the light emitting unit mounting surface. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J5) described above.

Further, since the control mechanism 608 is provided on the back side of the light irradiation device 607, the light emitting region is sufficiently secured on the front side of the control mechanism 608 without blocking the light emitting region to be transferred. Can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J8) described above.

In Examples 23 to 25 described above, when the illumination cover is replaced with an illumination cover of a different size, the angle of the light emitting substrate 613 or the translucent plate 631 is adjusted. May adjust different elements. The configuration different from the above-described embodiment will be specifically described below.

FIG. 99 is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 26. FIG. 100 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 99, and is a view showing a state in which the illumination cover is attached in a GG cross section. FIG. 101 is a front view of a pachinko machine in a state where illumination covers having different light emitting regions are attached. FIG. 102 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 101, and is a view showing a state in which illumination covers of different sizes are attached in an HH cross section. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a normal process by the sub control device.

Another third illumination cover 650 of Examples 23 to 25 includes a second illumination region 606A having the same width as the first emission region 605 of the third illumination cover 609 and having a higher height. However, the second light emitting region 606A of the third illumination cover 650 of the present embodiment is a partial light emitting region 651 in which a part of the light is emitted in the region corresponding to the first light emitting region 605. It is provided with a non-emission region 652 in which the remaining portion does not emit light. For example, the partial light emitting region 651 is formed of a light-transmitting resin, while the non-light emitting region 652 is formed of a light-shielding resin. As a result, the separate third illumination cover 650 is decorated so as to illuminate the partial light emitting area 651 that imaged the treasure in the center of the non-light emitting area 652 that imaged the sea, or in the center of the non-light emitting area 652 that imaged the night sky. It is possible to realize a decoration that illuminates the partial light emitting area 651 that imaged the moon.

The control mechanism 608 includes a separate cover detection sensor 641 and a mechanism for changing the irradiation area of the light irradiation device 607 based on the detection of the separate cover detection sensor 641. When the third illumination cover 609 is attached, the light irradiation device 607 causes the entire region of the light emitting substrate 611 corresponding to the first light emitting region 605 to emit light. Further, when the separate third illumination cover 650 is attached, the control mechanism 608 causes the region of the light emitting substrate 611 corresponding only to the partial light emitting region 651 to emit light as the second light emitting region 606A.

As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed even when the irradiation area is changed by detecting whether or not another third illumination cover 650 is attached to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 609. can. The object to be changed is not limited to the irradiation area, but may be the emission intensity and the emission color. By such a difference in the illumination effect between the third illumination cover 609 and another third illumination cover 650, it is possible to express the difference in the type of the gaming machine such as the high or low probability of jackpot and the presence or absence of the setting. ..

Next, in the normal processing performed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 has a light emitting region / non-light emitting area corresponding to the attachment of the separate third illumination cover 650, as in FIG. 98 described above. The light emitting region is adjusted (step S2103B). For example, when the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an OFF signal, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines that the third illumination cover 609 is attached, so that the first light emitting region 605 All LEDs 612 of the light emitting board 611 corresponding to the above are set as light emitting targets. Further, when the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an ON signal, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines that the separate third illumination cover 650 is attached, so that the second light emitting region The LED 612 in the central portion of the light emitting substrate 611 corresponding to 606A is set as the light emitting target. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the LED 612 to be set to emit light in a predetermined pattern when the power is turned on. As a result, when the separate third illumination cover 650 is attached, the lighting status of the light emitting area / non-light emitting area corresponding to the attachment of the separate third illumination cover 650 is displayed before the game is started. Since it can be confirmed, the light emitting region can be preferably changed.

Further, in step S2107, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 corresponds (synchronizes) with the fluctuation pattern effect, and performs a process of editing the lamp lighting pattern according to the attachment of the separate third illumination cover 610. .. For example, when the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an OFF signal, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the third illumination cover 609 is attached, so that the first light emitting region 605 The lamp lighting pattern when all the LEDs 612 of the light emitting board 611 corresponding to the above are set as light emitting targets is edited. Further, when the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an ON signal, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines that the separate third illumination cover 650 is attached, so that the second light emitting region The lamp lighting pattern when the LED 612 in the central portion of the light emitting board 611 corresponding to 606A is set as the light emitting target is edited. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the LED 612 to be set to emit light in the edited lamp lighting pattern in response to the variation pattern effect. As a result, wasteful power consumption due to continuous light emission to unnecessary parts even after the separate third illumination cover 650 is attached can be suppressed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 26th embodiment, the control mechanism 608 detects that another third lighting cover 610 is attached to the front frame set 14 instead of the third lighting cover 609. A separate cover detection sensor 641 is provided, and means for changing the irradiation area, light emission intensity, and light emission color of the light irradiation device 607 based on the detection of the separate cover detection sensor 641. As a result, even when the irradiation area, emission intensity, and emission color are changed by detecting whether or not another third illumination cover 650 is attached to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 609, the emission area can be changed. It can be changed suitably.

In the above-mentioned Examples 23 to 26, the illumination unit (third illumination unit 303) for controlling the mode of light is provided in the glass frame portion 23, but in this embodiment, the light It is different from the above-described Examples 23 to 26 in that the illuminated portion for which the aspect is controlled is arranged on the game board 30. The pachinko machine 10 of the 27th embodiment includes, for example, a movable illumination unit 703 as an illumination unit arranged on the game board 30. The movable illumination unit 703 is configured so that when the movable illumination unit 703 operates, the decoration effect at the position before and after the operation can be optimized. Hereinafter, a specific configuration will be described.

FIG. 104 is a front view of the game board of the 27th embodiment. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II of the game board shown in FIG. 104, showing the adjustment of the light emitting region of the movable illumination portion. FIG. 106 is a front view of the game board in a state where the movable illumination portion is projected. FIG. 107 is a JJ cross-sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 106, and is a diagram showing adjustment of the light emitting region of the movable illumination unit.

The movable illumination unit 703 includes a configuration that passively moves in the center frame 47A and a configuration that actively moves in the center frame 47A.

Specifically, the movable illumination unit 703 includes a light irradiation device 707 that irradiates light and a control mechanism 708 that controls the mode of light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 as a configuration that moves passively. As a configuration that actively moves, a movable illumination portion cover 709 that covers the front side of the movable illumination portion 703 and a drive mechanism 710 that operates the movable illumination portion cover 709 are provided.

The movable illumination portion cover 709 is made of a light-transmitting resin. In the illustration, the movable illumination portion cover 709 has a flat plate shape, but it may be a three-dimensional model imitating a predetermined person, animal, or tool. The movable illumination portion cover 709 receives light from the back surface side and emits light so as to emphasize the person, animal, or tool on the front surface side.

The movable illumination portion cover 709 is made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin. The movable illuminated portion cover 709 may be colorless or colored, or may be subjected to a frosted glass-like surface treatment. The movable lighting portion cover 709 is provided with a diffusing member (diffusing plate) having irregularities for diffusing the light from the light irradiating device 707 located behind, or for diffusing the light from the light irradiating device 707. The uneven portion is provided on the inner surface of the movable illuminated portion cover 709. As a result, the movable illumination unit cover 709 can make it difficult for the player to see the light irradiation device 707.

The drive mechanism 710 is a transfer mechanism that transfers a predetermined surface (for example, the front surface) of the movable illuminated portion cover 709 that emits light by the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707. Specifically, the drive mechanism 710 may be a solenoid as long as it is a mechanism for operating the front surface of the movable illuminated portion cover 709 in a linear direction, or a mechanism for converting the rotational motion of the motor into a linear motion using a ball screw. It may be present or it may be another mechanism.

The front surface of the movable illumination unit cover 709 is located at a position behind, for example, the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A (that is, the first position) when the drive mechanism 710 is not operating in the front view of the gaming machine. When the drive mechanism 710 is operated, it is operated at a portion exposed from the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A (that is, a second position). The right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A is also made of a transparent resin like the movable illumination portion 703. The shape of the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A and the movable illumination portion cover 709 may be unified to form one illumination accessory. For example, such an illumination accessory is hidden behind the right edge of the center frame 47A when not in operation, but is operated so as to appear while being strongly emitted from behind the right edge of the center frame 47A in operation. You may. As a result, the movable illumination unit 703 can be shown as a light emitting decoration having a different impression depending on the intensity of light emission between when it is not operating and when it is operating.

In the above configuration, the front surface (or the right side of the movable illumination cover 709 and the opening of the center frame 47A) of the movable illumination cover 709 located behind the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A (first position). The edge portion) is defined as the first light emitting region 705, and the front surface of the movable illumination portion cover 709 located at the portion (second position) exposed from the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A is the second light emitting portion. Region 706.

The right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A may be made of a resin having no light transmission. In this case, the movable illumination portion cover 709 may be operated so as to be located at a position that is invisible or difficult to see from the player when not operating, and located at a position that is easily visible to the player during operation. With this as well, the movable illumination unit 703 can show different light emission decorations depending on whether or not light emission is different between when it is not operating and when it is operating.

In the control mechanism 708, when the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is transferred to the first position by the drive mechanism 710, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is located in the first position. When the first control for causing the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 to emit light as the first light emitting region 705 is executed and the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is moved to the second position by the drive mechanism 710, it is irradiated from the light irradiation device 707. A second control is executed in which the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 located at the second position is made to emit light as the second light emitting region 706.

As a result, whether the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 emits the first light emitting region 705 or the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 emits the second light emitting region 706, the light emitting portion of the light emitting portion. The light emitting region can be suitably changed by facilitating the transition and optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the light emitting portion.

Next, the control of the mode of light performed by the control mechanism 708 will be specifically described.

The light irradiation device 707 includes a light emitting substrate 711 on which the LED 712 is arranged, and a substrate supporting portion 713 that supports the light emitting substrate 711. The substrate support portion 713 supports the light emitting substrate 711 so as to be rotatable in a state where one end is fixed to the center frame 47A.

The light irradiation device 707 is configured so that the light emitting substrate 711 can be rotated by the substrate support portion 713. The control mechanism 708 controls the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 from the first aspect to the second aspect by rotating the light emitting substrate 711. Thereby, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted.

In the control mechanism 708, the movable illumination portion 703 is exposed from the back side portion (first position) of the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A, and the movable illumination portion 703 is exposed from the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A. The light irradiation device 707 is changed from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed by the operation of moving to the moved portion (second position). As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by the operation of moving the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position.

The control mechanism 708 changes the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 based on the input unit 714 for inputting the force generated by the movement of the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position and the input force. It is provided with an output unit 715 to be operated. As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated by the operation of the movable illumination unit 703 moving to the second position.

The input unit 714 causes the movable illumination unit cover 709 to push the light irradiation device 707 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position (that is, rotation) by the operation of moving the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position. It is a mechanism to make it. Specifically, the input unit 714 includes a push-in part 716 provided in the movable illumination part cover 709 and a push-in receiving part 717 provided in the light irradiation device 707.

The push-in portion 716 is a portion that is arranged on the upper surface of the movable illumination portion cover 709 and projects toward the back surface side of the movable illumination portion cover 709. In the process of moving the movable illumination portion cover 709 to the second position, the push-in portion 716 comes into contact with the push-receive portion 717 arranged on the upper surface of the substrate support portion 713, and the substrate support portion 713 makes a second rotation. It is formed so as to rotate so as to face a position. For example, the push-in receiving portion 717 is provided with a rotating body (roller), and the push-in portion 716 is provided with an inclined surface that rolls the rotating body in accordance with the rotation of the substrate support portion 713. As a result, the movable illumination unit cover 709 pushes the light irradiation device 707 (that is, rotates it to the second rotation position) by the operation of moving the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position, and emits light. The region can be suitably changed.

The output unit 715 rotates the light emitting substrate 711 by rotating the light irradiation device 707 based on the force input from the input unit 714, thereby changing the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707. It is a mechanism to make it. Specifically, the output unit 715 is composed of a substrate support unit 713, a shaft 718, a coil spring 719 attached to the shaft 718, and a posture regulation unit 721 that regulates the posture of the substrate support unit 713. As a result, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by utilizing the force generated by the movement of the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position.

The input unit 714 (push-in portion 716 and push-in receiving portion 717) are arranged on the upper surfaces of the movable illumination portion cover 709 and the substrate support portion 713, respectively, and the output portion 715 is around the shaft 718 of the substrate support portion 713. Since none of them overlap the front surface of the light emitting unit mounting surface of the light irradiation device 707, the light emitting region can be suitably changed without blocking the light emitting unit mounting surface.

The shaft 718 connects the substrate support portion 713 and the center frame 47A so that the substrate support portion 713 can rotate. The coil spring 719 is attached to the shaft 718 to generate an urging force on the substrate support portion 713. In the process of moving the movable illumination portion cover 709 to the second position, the coil spring 719 rotates so that the push-in portion 716 contacts the push-in receiving portion 717 and the substrate support portion 713 faces the second rotation position. As a result, the urging force is increased, and the urging force becomes the largest at the position where the pushing of the pushing portion 716 ends. When the movable illumination portion cover 709 returns from the second position to the first position, the substrate support portion 713 returns from the second rotation position to the original first rotation position by this urging force.

The posture control unit 721 is a stopper provided on the substrate support unit 713. The urging force of the coil spring 719 is such that the movable illumination portion 703 is located on the back surface of the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A, and the attitude regulating portion 721 causes the substrate support portion 713 to be in front of the movable illumination portion 703. It is regulated in a face-to-face posture.

As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated by the operation of the movable illumination unit 703 moving to the second position. The light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force of the movable illumination unit cover 709 pushing the light irradiation device 707 by the operation of moving the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position. The irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by utilizing the force generated by the movement of the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position.

Next, the drive of the movable illumination unit 703 will be described. The movable illumination unit 703 can be driven by pressing the frame button 80 (for example, the decision button 81) in response to an operation request image for requesting the operation of the frame button 80 displayed on the third symbol display device 42. .. The display timing of the operation request image is, for example, during the customer waiting effect (standby display) in the third symbol display device 42. The display content of the operation request image is, for example, an image such as "Make character A stand out? (Press the frame button to make it stand out.)". Here, the character A is a decoration indicating the character applied to the movable illumination unit 703. When the frame button 80 is pressed with respect to the operation request image, the movable illumination unit 703 imitating the character A starts from an inconspicuous position (first position) on the back side of the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A. It is transferred from the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A to an exposed and conspicuous position (second position).

As a result, the irradiation area can be suitably changed in response to the transition of the movable illumination unit 703 based on the operation of the player, so that the decoration on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 main body can be made according to the player's preference. It will be easier.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 27th embodiment, light is irradiated toward the movable illumination unit 703 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 main body and the back surface side of the movable illumination unit 703. The light irradiation device 707 is provided. Since the pachinko machine 10 can shift the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 that receives the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 to a different position, the pachinko machine 10 responds to the change in the position of the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703. The impression on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. When the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is located at the first position, the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is located at the first position is designated as the first light emitting region 705. When the first control for emitting light is executed and the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is located at the second position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is located at the second position. Since the control mechanism 708 that executes the second control for emitting light with the front surface of the movable illumination unit 706 as the second light emitting region 706 is provided, the light emission direction is optimized according to the transition of the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 to emit light. The region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H1) described above.

Further, as described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 27th embodiment, the movable illumination unit 703 and the movable illumination unit 703 disposed on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 are irradiated with light. The device 707 and the like are provided. Since the pachinko machine 10 includes a drive mechanism 710 capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 that emits light by the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 to a first position and a second position. The light emitting part of the movable illumination unit 703 is not uniform, and the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 can be easily changed. When the predetermined surface is transferred to the first position by the drive mechanism 710, the pachinko machine 10 uses the predetermined surface where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is located at the first position as the first light emitting region 705. When the first control for emitting light is executed and the predetermined surface is transferred to the second position by the drive mechanism 710, the predetermined surface where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is located at the second position is second. Since the control mechanism 708 that executes the second control of emitting light as the light emitting region 706 of the light emitting region is provided, the transition of the light emitting portion is facilitated, and the irradiation direction of the light is optimized according to the transition of the light emitting portion to emit light. The region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I1) described above.

Further, the main body of the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11 with one side portion of the outer frame 11 as an opening / closing shaft. A front frame set 14 that can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 with one side portion of the inner frame 12 as an opening / closing shaft is provided. A game board 30 having a game area 30a through which the attached game ball flows down is provided, and the game board 30 is a big hit game that occurs during the variable display of the third symbol and when the variable display of the third symbol results in a big hit. The front frame set 14 includes a third symbol display device 42 having a display screen 42a on which the display effect in the state is displayed and an opening that makes the display screen 42a visible, and the front frame set 14 has a gaming area 30a when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The movable illumination unit 703 is provided with a glass frame portion 23 to which a glass plate 137 that makes the display screen 42a visible is attached to the back side, and the movable illumination unit 703 is made visible from the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body. It is a thing. This facilitates the transition of the light emitting portion on the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body, and optimizes the light irradiation direction according to the transition of the light emitting portion, thereby appropriately changing the light emitting region. Can be made to. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I2) described above.

Further, since the movable lighting unit 703 is attached behind the glass plate 137 of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body and is visible through the glass plate 137, the glass plate 137 of the pachinko machine 10 main body is visible. By facilitating the transition of the light emitting portion behind the glass plate 137 and optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the transition of the light emitting portion behind the glass plate 137, the light emitting region behind the glass plate 137 is suitably changed. be able to. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I4) described above.

Further, since the movable illumination unit 703 is arranged on the right side in the game area 30a of the game board 30, the light emitting region can be suitably changed also on the right side in the game area 30a of the game board 30. .. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I5) described above.

Further, since the movable illumination unit 703 is arranged on the right side in the opening of the game board 30, the light emitting region can be suitably changed even on the right side in the opening of the game board 30. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I6) described above.

Further, since the light irradiation device 707 includes a light emitting substrate 711 and a drive mechanism 710 that changes the posture of the light emitting substrate 711 with respect to a predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703, the light emitting region is suitably changed at each position. be able to. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I7) described above.

Further, the first control is to set the irradiation angle of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 to the first light emitting region 705 to the first irradiation angle, and the second control is the second light emitting region. The irradiation angle of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 to the 706 is set to a second irradiation angle different from the first irradiation angle. As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by changing the irradiation angle in the configuration in which the movable illumination unit 703 operates. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I8) described above.

Further, since the movable illumination unit 703 is provided with a frame button 80 (for example, a decision button 81) that receives an operation of the player and operates in response to the operation of the frame button 80, the movable illumination unit 703 operates the frame button 80. Even when operating according to the above, the light emitting region can be suitably changed at each position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I9) described above.

Further, since the movable illumination unit 703 operates in response to the operation of the frame button 80 during the display of the display effect on the third symbol display device 42, the movable illumination unit 703 operates the display effect on the third symbol display device 42. Even when the operation is performed during the display of, the light emitting region can be suitably changed at each position according to the operation. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I11) described above.

Further, since the light irradiation device 707 rotates according to the operation of the movable illumination unit 703, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 corresponds to the operation of the movable illumination unit 703 in the first light emitting region 705. The irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by rotating the light irradiation device 707, regardless of whether the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 emits light in the second light emitting region. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I12) described above.

Further, the control mechanism 708 controls the light irradiation device 707 from the state in which the first control can be executed to the second control in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 from the first position to the second position. In the process of changing the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 from the first position to the second position, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I13) described above.

Further, the control mechanism 708 irradiates light based on the input unit 714 for inputting the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 from the first position to the second position, and the input force. Since the device 707 includes an output unit 715 that changes from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed, a predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is positioned from the first position to the second position. The light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of shifting to. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I14) described above.

Further, the input unit 714 is a pushing unit 716 that gives a force for rotating the light irradiation device 707 in the process of changing the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 from the first position to the second position. Since it is the push-in receiving portion 717, the light emitting region is preferably set by utilizing the force applied to the light irradiation device 707 in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the movable illumination portion 703 from the first position to the second position. Can be changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I15) described above.

Further, the output unit 715 rotates the light irradiation device 707 based on the input force to change the light irradiation device 707 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed. Since it changes, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by utilizing the force input in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I16) described above.

Further, since the movable illumination unit 703 is a transparent resin member and is configured so that the control mechanism 708 is difficult to see, the movable illumination unit 703 is a transparent resin member. Since the control mechanism 708 is configured so as to be difficult to see, the control mechanism 708 can be made inconspicuous. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) described above.

Further, since the control mechanism 708 is arranged so as not to overlap the front surface of the light emitting unit mounting surface of the light irradiation device 707, the light emitting region can be suitably changed without blocking the light emitting unit mounting surface. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J5) described above.

Further, since the input unit 714 is provided on the upper side surface (upper surface) side of the light irradiation device 707 when the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is changed to the left direction or the right direction in the front view of the game machine. , It is difficult to block the light emitting region that is transferred in the left-right direction, and the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J7) described above.

In the above-described 27th embodiment, the control mechanism 708 changes the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 by tilting the light irradiation device 707. However, as in the 24th embodiment, the light irradiation device 707 is changed. A configuration may be adopted in which the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is changed while the light irradiation device 707 is fixed.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing adjustment of the light emitting region of the movable illumination portion of Example 28.

In this embodiment, the light irradiation device 707 is fixed to the front side of the variable display device unit 35 attached to the back surface of the game board 30 on the back surface side of the center frame 47A, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is first. A light-transmitting unit 730 that transmits light to the light-emitting region 705 or the second light-emitting region 706 is provided. The translucent portion 730 includes a translucent plate 731 that transmits the light emitted from the light irradiating device 707 and outputs the light to the front side, a translucent plate support portion 732 that supports the translucent plate 731, and the 27th embodiment. A similar control mechanism 708 is provided.

The configuration of the light transmitting plate support portion 432 is the same as the configuration of the substrate support portion 713 that tilts the light emitting substrate 711 of the 23rd embodiment. That is, when the movable illumination portion cover 709 is located at the first position by the control mechanism 708, the light transmissive plate support portion 732 remains in a posture corresponding to the back surface of the right side surface of the opening of the center frame 47A, and the light is emitted. The light emitted from the irradiation device 707 is transmitted and output to the front side where the first light emitting region 705 is located. However, when the movable illumination portion cover 709 is moved to the second position, the opening of the center frame 47A is opened. The light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is refracted and transmitted in the oblique direction in which the second light emitting region 706 is located, in a posture facing the portion exposed from the right side surface.

As a result, not only the light irradiation device 707 can be rotated, but also the light transmitting portion 730 can be rotated, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted and the light emitting region can be suitably changed. can.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 28th embodiment, the light irradiation device 707 is fixed to the variable display device unit 35, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is emitted from the first light emitting region 705 or the first light emitting region 705 or the first light emitting device 707. A translucent portion 730 that transmits light is provided in the light emitting region 706 of 2, and the translucent portion 730 is rotatable. Thereby, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted not only in the configuration in which the light irradiation device 707 is rotatable but also in the configuration in which the light transmitting portion 730 is rotatable. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H8) described above.

In the 27th and 28th embodiments described above, the input unit 714 and the output unit 715 of the control mechanism 708 rotate the light irradiation device 707 by the force of the pushing unit 716 pushing the light irradiation device 707. The input unit 714 and the output unit 715 of the mechanism 708 may have different configurations. Hereinafter, a specific configuration will be described.

FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board of the 29th embodiment. FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK of the game board shown in FIG. 109, showing the adjustment of the light emitting region of the movable illumination unit. FIG. 111 is a KK cross-sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 109, and is a diagram showing adjustment of a light emitting region in a state where the movable illumination portion is projected.

In the control mechanism 708, the movable illumination portion 703 is exposed from the back side portion (first position) of the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A, and the movable illumination portion 703 is exposed from the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A. The displacement detection sensor 741 that detects the movement to the specified location (second position) and the rotation motor 742 that changes the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 based on the detection of the displacement detection sensor 741. Be prepared. As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by detecting that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the first position to the second position.

The displacement detection sensor 741 is attached to the upper side of the back surface of the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The displacement detection sensor 741 is, for example, a limit switch. In the displacement detection sensor 741, when the movable illumination unit 703 (movable illumination unit cover 709) is located at the first position, the hinge is not pushed in (the switch is not pushed). It is detected that the movable illumination unit 703 has not moved to the second position. In the displacement detection sensor 741, when the movable illumination unit 703 moves to the second position, the hinge is pushed into the movable illumination unit 703 and the switch is pressed in the process, so that the movable illumination unit 703 becomes the second position. Detects that it has moved to a position. The configuration of the displacement detection sensor 741 is not limited to the above configuration, and may be, for example, a non-contact sensor.

When the movable illumination unit 703 moves from the second position to the first position, the displacement detection sensor 741 moves the movable illumination unit 703 because the hinge is separated from the switch in the process of returning the movable illumination unit 703 to the first position. It is detected that the decoration portion 703 has moved to the first position. As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by detecting that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the second position to the first position.

The displacement detection sensor 741 and the rotation motor 742 are electrically connected to the sub control device 262. When the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the first position to the second position, the sub-control device 262 rotates the rotation motor 742 until it reaches a predetermined angle. The substrate support portion 713 is rotated so that the light irradiation device 707 changes from the front-facing posture of the first position to the front-facing posture of the second position. When the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the second position to the first position, the sub-control device 262 reversely rotates the rotation motor 742 until it reaches a predetermined angle. Then, the substrate support portion 713 is rotated in the reverse direction so that the light irradiation device 707 changes from the posture facing the second position to the posture facing the front of the first position. The rotation motor 742 may be controlled by detecting the rotation angle by a potentiometer or an encoder, or by applying a pulse voltage corresponding to a predetermined rotation angle by using a stepping motor.

The hinge of the movable illumination unit cover 709 and the transition detection sensor 741 in contact with the cover 709 corresponds to the input unit 714 in the above-described embodiment. Further, the rotation motor 742 corresponds to the output unit 715 in the above-described embodiment.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 29th embodiment, the movable illumination unit 703 (for example, the movable illumination unit 703) and the movable illumination unit 703 arranged on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 It includes a light irradiation device 707 that irradiates light. Since the pachinko machine 10 can shift the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 that emits light by the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 to the first position and the second position, the movable illumination unit 10 can be used. The impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the portion 703. Since the pachinko machine 10 includes a displacement detection sensor 741 capable of detecting the displacement of the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703, the displacement of the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 can be recognized. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the predetermined surface has changed to the first position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 emits light with the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region 705. When the predetermined surface is transferred to the second position by executing the first control for causing the light to be generated, the predetermined surface where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is located at the second position is designated as the second light emitting region 706. Since the control mechanism 708 that executes the second control for emitting light is provided, the light emitting region is recognized by recognizing the transition of the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 and optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the predetermined surface. Can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J1) described above.

Further, the control mechanism 708 is based on the input unit 714 to which the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 from the first position to the second position is input and the input force, and the movable electric power. The contact-type displacement detection sensor 741 that can detect that the predetermined surface of the decorative portion 703 has changed from the first position to the second position, and the fact that the predetermined surface has changed from the first position to the second position. When detected, the light irradiation device 707 includes an output unit 715 that changes from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed. The light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of shifting from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J2) described above.

Further, the input unit 714 receives the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 from the first position to the second position, and pushes the contact type displacement detection sensor 741 into the movable illumination unit cover. 709, Since it is a hinge of the displacement detection sensor 741, a force that accepts the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 from the first position to the second position and pushes the contact type displacement detection sensor 741. Can be used to suitably change the light emitting region. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J3) described above.

In Examples 27 to 29 described above, the output 715 of the control mechanism 708 adjusts the irradiation angle of the light irradiation device 707, but adjusts different elements related to the irradiation of the light irradiation device 707. You may. This will be described in detail below.

FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board of the thirtieth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL of the game board shown in FIG. 112, showing the adjustment of the light emitting region of the movable illumination portion. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in a state where the movable illumination portion is projected. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the MM of the game board shown in FIG. 114, showing the adjustment of the light emitting region of the movable illumination portion.

The movable illumination unit 750 of this embodiment is a light guide plate processed so as to emit a predetermined pattern or character on a transparent resin acrylic panel, and the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 is provided on the side surface of the light guide plate. There is. The light emitting region of the movable illumination unit 750 includes a partial light emitting region 751 in which a part thereof emits light and a non-light emitting region 752 in which the remaining portion does not emit light. The light emitting area of the movable illumination unit 750 is divided into, for example, six parts, each of which is configured to emit light (“ge”, “ki”, “a”, “tsu”, “i”, “!”). ing. The light guide plate light emitting unit 753 is also divided into six parts according to this, and is controlled so that a part thereof is made to emit light as a partial light emitting part 754 and the remaining part is not made to emit light as a non-light emitting part 755. ..

The control mechanism 708 includes a displacement detection sensor 741 and a mechanism for changing the irradiation area of the light irradiation device 707 based on the detection of the displacement detection sensor 741. Specifically, in the control mechanism 708, when the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 750 is located at the first position, the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 does not emit all six characters. The non-light emitting unit 755 is used.

Further, when the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 750 is located at the second position, the control mechanism 708 causes the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 to perform four characters according to the operation of the player. ("A" "tsu" "i" "!"), The part corresponding to 5 characters ("ge" "ki" "a" "tsu" "!") Is made to emit light as a partial light emitting part 754, and the light emitting part Characters other than are referred to as non-light emitting unit 755.

As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed even when the irradiation area is changed by detecting whether or not the movable illumination unit 750 has moved to the second position. The object to be changed is not limited to the irradiation area, but may be the emission intensity and the emission color. By such a difference in the illumination effect between the first position and the second position, it is possible to express the difference in the degree of expectation of the result of the jackpot lottery.

Next, the drive of the movable illumination unit 703 will be described. The movable illumination unit 703 presses the frame button 80 (for example, the enter button 81, the left selection button 82, and the right selection button 83) in response to an operation request image for requesting the operation of the frame button 80 displayed on the third symbol display device 42. It can be driven by pressing it. The display timing of the operation request image is, for example, in the display effect related to the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 42. The display content of the operation request image is an image having an option to promote the prediction of the result of the variable display such as "Is this reach hot or hot?" During the predetermined reach effect. In addition to this, there may be an option that asks the player's preference, such as "Is your favorite character A or B?". When the player presses the right selection button 83 to select "Gekiatsu" and presses the enter button 81 to determine the operation request image, the movable illumination unit 750 is second from the first position. When it is detected that the movable illumination unit 750 is located in the second position, the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 has five characters ("ge", "ki", "a", "tsu". A portion corresponding to "!") Is made to emit light as a partial light emitting portion 754, and characters other than the light emitting portion are designated as a non-light emitting portion 755. Further, when the player presses the left selection button 82 to select "hot" and presses the decision button 81 to determine the operation request image, the movable illumination unit 750 is the first from the first position. When the position is changed to 2 and it is detected that the movable illumination unit 750 is located at the 2nd position, the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 has 4 characters ("a", "tsu", "i", "i", " A portion corresponding to (! ") Is made to emit light as a partial light emitting portion 754, and characters other than the light emitting portion are designated as a non-light emitting portion 755.

As a result, the irradiation area can be suitably changed in response to the transition of the movable illumination unit 703 based on the operation of the player, so that the decoration on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 main body according to the player's preference can be made. It will be easier.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 30th embodiment, the control mechanism 708 includes a displacement detection sensor 741 for detecting that the movable illumination unit 750 has moved to the second position, and a displacement detection sensor 741. It is provided with a mechanism for changing the irradiation area of the light irradiation device 707 based on the detection. As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed even when the irradiation area is changed by detecting whether or not the movable illumination unit 750 has moved to the second position.

In Examples 23 to 26 described above, the third illumination unit 303 and the third illumination unit 604 are attached and detached in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, but in the oblique direction of the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured to be attached to and detached from. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIG. 116.

FIGS. 116 (a) and 116 (b) are views for explaining the mounting directions of the illumination cover 609 and the separate illumination cover 610 of the thirty-first embodiment.

The illumination cover 609 and the separate illumination cover 610 of this embodiment have substantially the same shape as the illumination cover 609 and the separate illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26 in the front view of the pachinko machine 10. The illumination cover 609 and the separate illumination cover 610 of this embodiment are different from the illumination cover 609 and the separate illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26 in the attachment / detachment structure.

The third illuminated portion 603 and the separate third illuminated portion 604 are attached by a slide mechanism 602 that slides the third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610 in an oblique direction. The slide mechanism 602 is formed in a slide groove 603 formed on the main body side of the pachinko machine 10 and inclined upward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, a third illumination cover 609, and another third illumination cover 610. It is composed of a portion that fits into the slide groove 603. In the figure, the shape of each part constituting the slide mechanism 602 is omitted.

The illumination cover 609 and the separate illumination cover 610 of this embodiment also differ in the structure of the control mechanism 608 from the illumination cover 609 and the separate illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26. That is, the point that the input portion 614 is composed of the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 is the same, but the mounting location and shape of the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 are different.

The protrusion of the push-in portion 616 is arranged on the inner surface of the upper surface inclined in the oblique direction on the tip side in the insertion direction of the separate illumination cover 610. The shape of the protrusion of the push-in portion 616 may be a small piece or a flat plate extending in the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 10. The point that the push-in receiving portion 617 extends from the back surface of the light irradiation device 607 to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is significantly different from that of the 23rd to 26th embodiments. Since the shape of the push-in receiving portion 617 may correspond to the shape of the push-in portion 616, it may be in the shape of a rod or in the shape of a flat plate.

When the third illumination portion 303 is attached to the glass frame portion 23, the peripheral wall portion of the opening of the third illumination cover 609 is guided by the slide mechanism 602 formed in the oblique direction, and is between the sound output portions 24. It is attached to. Since the push-in portion 616 is not formed on the third illumination cover 609, the first light emitting region 605 is formed while the light irradiation device 607 is in a vertical posture. When the other third illumination portion 604 is attached to the glass frame portion 23, the base portion is guided to the periphery of the opening side of the other third illumination cover 610 by a slide mechanism 602 formed in an oblique direction, and the sound output portion is provided. It is mounted between 24. Since the push-in portion 616 is formed in the third illumination cover 610, the light-irradiation device 607 is tilted toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in contact with the push-in receiving portion 617 on the back surface of the light irradiation device 607. Therefore, a second light emitting region 606 is formed above the first light emitting region 605.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 31st embodiment, the third illuminated portion 303 arranged on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 and the light toward the back surface side of the third illuminated portion 303. It is provided with a light irradiation device 607 for irradiating the light. Since the pachinko machine 10 can shift the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 that receives the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to a different position, the position of the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is changed. The impression on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed accordingly. When the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is located at the first position, the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is located at the first position is the first light emitting region. When the first control for emitting light as 605 is executed and the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is located at the second position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is located at the second position. Since the control mechanism 608 that executes the second control for causing the front surface of the illumination unit 303 to emit light as the second light emitting region 606 is provided, the light irradiation direction is optimized according to the transition of the front surface of the third illumination unit 303. By doing so, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H1) described above.

Further, since the input unit 614 is provided on either the left or right side surface side of the light irradiation device 607 when the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is changed in the vertical direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 10, the input unit 614 is provided up and down. It is difficult to block the light emitting region that is changed in the direction, and the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J6) described above.

Further, the input unit 614 is the back side of the light irradiation device 607 and is the third side when the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is transferred in an oblique direction in which the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is inclined upward and inclined toward the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10. Since the front surface of the illumination unit 303 is provided at a position where the force generated in the process of shifting in the oblique direction can be input, it does not interfere with the transition of the third illumination unit 303 and blocks the light emitting region to be transferred. However, the light emitting region can be preferably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J9) described above.

In Examples 23 to 26 described above, the light emitting region is changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of exchanging the third illumination unit 303 for another third illumination unit 604. The light emitting region of the third illumination unit 303 may be changed while the decoration unit 303 remains. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIG. 117.

FIGS. 117A and 117B are diagrams illustrating before and after the change in the light emitting region of the illumination cover 609 of Example 32. The front view of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is the same as that of FIG. 1, so FIG. 1 is referred to. In this embodiment, the third illuminated portion 303 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the third illuminated cover 609 before the change of the movable illuminated portion 305 shown in FIG. 117 (a), and the third illuminated portion 303 in FIG. In this embodiment, the illuminated portion 604 corresponds to the third illuminated cover 609 after the change of the movable illuminated portion 305 shown in FIG. 117 (b).

The third illumination unit 303 of this embodiment has substantially the same shape as the third illumination unit 303 of Examples 23 to 26 in the front view of the pachinko machine 10, but the third illumination unit 303 of this embodiment has the same shape. Examples 23 to 303 are configured as a movable illumination unit 305 capable of operating a part of the illumination without requiring replacement with another third illumination unit 604. It is different from the third illumination unit 303 of 26.

In the third illumination portion 303 (movable illumination portion 305), the third illumination cover 609 is divided into a tip portion 658 and a base end portion 659, and the tip portion 658 projects obliquely from the base end portion 659. It also includes a sliding drive mechanism 660 that is retracted. As the slide mechanism, as in the 31st embodiment, the slide groove 603 is formed in the base end portion 659 of the third illumination cover 609, and the slide groove 603 is inclined upward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A portion that fits into the slide groove 603 is formed in the tip portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609, and the tip portion 658 of the third illumination portion 303 is formed in the base end portion 659 of the third illumination portion 303. Is installed.

As the drive mechanism 660, a rack 661 is formed at the tip end portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609, and a pinion (circular gear) 662 is formed at the base end portion 659 of the third illumination cover 609. A motor 663 fixed at a predetermined position of the base end portion 659 is connected to the pinion 662. By driving the motor 663, the tip portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609 is configured to protrude and retract. The position when the tip portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609 protrudes to the uppermost position is set as the second position, and the position when the tip portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609 protrudes to the lowermost side is set as the second position. It is the first position.

The structure of the control mechanism 608 of the illumination cover 609 of this embodiment is also different from that of the illumination cover 609 and the separate illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26. That is, the input unit 614 is the same in that it is composed of the push-in portion 616 and the push-receiver 617, but the structures of the push-in portion 616 and the push-receiver 617 are different.

The push-in portion 616 has a protrusion (shaft) 664 protruding from the inner surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609 (the inner surface of the left side surface when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10), and the shaft 664 is rotatable to one end side. It is composed of a fitted slide member (slider) 665. An elongated hole 666 is formed on the other end side of the slider 665, and a protrusion (shaft) 667 protruding from the left side surface of the light irradiation device 607 is slidably connected to the elongated hole 666. The push-in receiving portion 617 corresponds to a shaft 667 protruding from the left side surface of the light irradiation device 607.

When the tip portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609 is projected to the second position, the motor 663 is set in a predetermined direction (for example, if the motor 663 is connected coaxially with the pinion 662, it is counterclockwise on the paper). When rotated, the slider 665 pushes the light irradiation device 607 as the tip portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609 rises to the second position, and the light irradiation device 607 tilts to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. A second light emitting region 606 is formed on the front surface of the tip end portion 658 and the base end portion 659. When retracting the tip portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609 to the first position, the motor 663 is rotated in the opposite direction (for example, clockwise on the paper surface), and the tip portion 659 of the third illumination cover 609 Along with the descent to the first position, the slider 665 lifted the light irradiator 607, and the light irradiator 607 stood up on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the front surface of the tip 658 (which overlapped the front side). A first light emitting region 605 is formed on the front end portion 659).

The control mechanism 608 includes a displacement detection sensor 668 that detects that the tip end portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609 has moved from the first position to the second position. The displacement detection sensor 668 may be a limit switch that detects that the tip portion 658 is located at the first position or the second position, or when the tip portion 658 is located at the first position or the second position. It may be a potentiometer or an encoder that detects the rotation angle of the motor 663. As a result, the light emitting region is set by detecting that the tip portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609 has moved from the first position to the second position and has moved from the second position to the first position. It can be changed suitably.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd embodiment, the third illuminated portion 303 (divided into a tip portion 658 and a base end portion 659) arranged on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 main body. It includes a drive-type movable illumination unit 305) and a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates the third illumination unit 303 with light. The pachinko machine 10 is a drive mechanism capable of shifting the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303 that emits light by the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to the first position and the second position. Since the 660 is provided, the light emitting portion of the third illuminated portion 303 is not uniform, and the light emitting portion of the third illuminated portion 303 can be easily changed. When the front surface of the tip portion 658 is transferred to the first position by the drive mechanism 660, the gaming machine first sets the front surface of the tip portion 658 where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is located at the first position. When the first control for emitting light as the light emitting region 605 of the above is executed and the front surface of the tip portion 658 is transferred to the second position by the drive mechanism 660, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is in the second position. Since the control mechanism 608 for executing the second control of emitting light with the front surface of the tip end portion 658 and the base end portion 659 located at the base end portion 659 as the second light emitting region 606 is provided, the transition of the light emitting portion is facilitated, and the light emitting portion of the light emitting portion can be easily changed. By optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the transition, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I1) described above.

Further, as described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of a third illumination portion 303 (a tip portion 658 and a base end portion 659) arranged on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 main body. It is provided with a split drive type movable illumination unit 305) and a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates the third illumination unit 303 with light. Since the pachinko machine 10 can shift the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303 that emits light by the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to the first position and the second position. , The impression of the front side of the gaming machine can be changed according to the change in the position of the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303. Since the pachinko machine 10 includes a displacement detection sensor 668 capable of detecting the displacement of the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303, the pachinko machine 10 recognizes the displacement of the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303. can. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the front surface of the tip portion 658 has changed to the first position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 first sets the front surface of the tip portion 658 located at the first position. When the first control for emitting light as the light emitting region 605 of the above is executed and the front surface of the tip portion 658 is transferred to the second position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is the tip located at the second position. Since the control mechanism 608 for executing the second control for emitting light with the front surface of the portion 658 and the base end portion 659 as the second light emitting region 606 is provided, the transition of the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303 is recognized. By optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the transition of the front surface of the tip portion 658, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J1) described above.

In Examples 23 to 26 described above, the light emitting region was changed in the process of replacing the third illumination unit 303 with another third illumination unit 604, but the third illumination unit 303 or another third illumination unit 303 or another. 3 The light emitting region may be changed without replacing the illumination unit 604. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIG. 118. In the following, another third illumination unit 604 will be described as an example.

FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b) are diagrams for explaining before and after the change of the light emitting region of the third illumination cover 610 according to the thirty-third embodiment.

The separate third illumination cover 610 has the same shape as the separate illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26, but is on the front surface of the separate third illumination cover 610 that receives the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607. It is different from the separate illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26 in that the light emitting region on the front surface of the separate third illumination cover 610 can be changed by changing the predetermined region (light receiving region). There is.

The structure of the control mechanism 608 of the third illumination cover 610 is different from that of the third illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26. Specifically, the structures of the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 are different, and in particular, the push-in portion 616 can adjust the push-in amount.

The protrusion 616a of the push-in portion 616 is divided into a tip portion 671 and a base end portion 672, and the base end portion 672 can move in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 along the inner surface of the separate third illumination cover 610. It is attached to. The tip portion 671 is configured to be slidable in the vertical direction from the base end portion 672. Specifically, the base end portion 672 of the push-in portion 616 is attached to the front-rear slide rail 673 formed on the inner side surface of the separate third illumination cover 610, and is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction. Further, the tip portion 671 of the push-in portion 616 is attached to the vertical slide rail 674 formed on the outer surface of the base end portion 672, and is configured to be slidable in the vertical direction. As a result, the protrusion 616a of the push-in portion 616 can change (adjust) its protrusion amount (height) and its position in the front-rear direction by an operator such as a hole before attaching the separate third illumination cover 610.

The push-in portion 617 is also formed so that the push-in portion 616 can be pushed in a wider range than in the 23rd embodiment according to the protrusion amount of the protrusion 616a of the changeable push-in portion 616 and the position in the front-rear direction. ing. As a result, as the protrusion amount of the protrusion 616a of the push-in portion 616 is increased and the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted to the rear side, the tilt angle of the light irradiation device 607 becomes larger and the position of the second light emitting region 606 becomes higher. It is configured to be.

As a result, when using the separate third illumination cover 610, if it is desired that the light is emitted mainly from a higher portion on the front side of the separate third illumination cover 610 in a certain hall, the separate third illumination cover 610 is used. By increasing the amount of protrusion of the push-in portion 616 or adjusting the position in the front-rear direction to the rear side, the tilt angle of the light irradiation device 607 is increased and the position of the second light emitting region 606 is raised. Therefore, it is possible to meet the detailed requests of each hall.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 33rd embodiment, the third illuminated portion 604 arranged on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 and the third illuminated portion 604 are directed toward the back side. It is provided with a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light. Since the pachinko machine 10 can shift a predetermined region (light receiving region) of the third illumination unit 604 that receives the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to a different position, the third illumination unit 10 can be changed to a different position. The impression on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined region of the 604. When the predetermined region is located at the first position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 executes the first control of emitting the predetermined region located at the first position as the first light emitting region 605. When the predetermined region is located at the second position, the control for executing the second control that the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 emits the predetermined region located at the second position as the second light emitting region 606. Since the mechanism 608 is provided, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the transition of the predetermined region (light receiving region) of the third illumination unit 604. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H00) described above.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be another configuration that exhibits the same effect, and can be modified and implemented as follows, for example.

[1] In the above-described first embodiment, the ending countdown information 44v is descriptively displayed as "ending time: after ○ seconds", but the present invention is not limited to this. Another example of the ending countdown information 44v is a timer image showing numerical information. Since the player can recognize that the ending period has entered by looking at the ending screen 44j, it can recognize that the ending time is being counted down just by displaying the timer image. As a result, the ending screen 44j can be displayed in a cohesive manner. In another example, the ending time may be represented by a band graph and replaced with a seek bar that visually indicates the remaining time of the ending time by indicating the current position on the band graph-shaped bar.

Further, in the first embodiment, the countdown information 44v counts down the ending time, but the time in the jackpot round gaming state including the ending period may be counted down. That is, the countdown may be performed from the start time of the jackpot round game or the middle time thereof to the end timing of the ending period.

[2] In Example 1 described above, as an example of the "non-arrival suggestion information" of the present invention, a configuration in which the ending right-handed information 44k, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v are all displayed is given as an example. As described above, each of them may be displayed as "non-arrival suggestion information" alone, or may be displayed as "non-arrival suggestion information" in combination of the two.

[3] In the above-described first embodiment, the "predetermined gaming state" of the present invention is defined as the jackpot round gaming state, and the "next gaming state" is defined as the high probability / support state after the jackpot round gaming state. "Game state" and "next game state" may be other game states. For example, the "predetermined gaming state" may be set as an advantageous gaming state such as a high probability / support state of cutting the number of times, and the "next gaming state" may be set as a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) after the end of the advantageous gaming state. ..

[4] In the above-described first embodiment, the "specific operation" of the present invention is the volume control operation, but the "specific operation" may be another operation. For example, if the player can select a character image to appear in the display effect, and the selectable period is set during high-speed fluctuation or a jackpot round game state, the character image selection operation is also the present invention. It is included in the "specific operation" of.

[5] In the above-described first embodiment, the information 44a during the specific operation period is displayed during the period when the "specific operation" of the present invention is permitted, but the information 44a during the specific operation period is not displayed and is predetermined. When the timing of is reached, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period may be displayed.

[6] In the first embodiment described above, these screens are displayed by pressing the enter button 81 on the normal screen 43a, the demo screen 43b, the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c, the opening screen 43h, the round screen 43i, the ending screen 43j, or the like. Although the screen has been switched to the specific operation screen 44b, these screens may be switched to the specific operation screen 44b by pressing the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83, which are different from the decision button 81. In this case, the player is informed in advance that the specific operation can be executed by pressing any of the frame buttons 80 while the information 44a (“volume can be changed”) is displayed during the specific operation period. As a result, it is intuitive and easy to understand, and it is possible to reduce the failure to perform a specific operation.

Further, by bringing the hand close to the predetermined area of the display screen 42a at the timing when the information 44a (“volume changeable”) is displayed on the display screen 42a during the specific operation period, these screens are switched to the specific operation screen 44b. It may be. For example, information such as "When changing the volume, bring your hand close to the screen" is displayed on the display screen 42a. As a result, it is more intuitive and easy to understand, and it is possible to reduce the failure to perform a specific operation.

[7] In the above-described embodiment, for example, as in the ending effect pattern shown in FIG. 58, each ending information (next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, immersive prevention information 44z) The display time of was the same time such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds, but may be different times. For example, the next game state suggestion information 44w is 6 seconds, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is 8 seconds, and the immersive prevention information 44z is 10 seconds. Further, even if the ending information is of the same type, the display time of the ending information may be changed according to a predetermined condition. For example, the display time of the ending information is changed according to the length of the fluctuation time.

[8] In the above-described embodiment, for example, as in the ending effect pattern shown in FIG. 58, each ending information is in a certain order (generally, next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information). It was displayed in the order of 44y, immersive prevention information 44z), but the ending of the same display time, for example, the next game state suggestion information 44w is displayed last, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is displayed first, and so on. A pattern may be provided in which the display order of information is changed.

The ending information of the same display time is not limited to the information whose display time is exactly the same, and may be similar to the display time as long as the display time is within the allowable range. In this case, the display order of the ending information can be changed by extending the display time of the shortage or reducing the display time of the excess within the range permitted in the production.

[9] In Examples 23 to 26 described above, a top lamp such as the third illuminated portion 304 has been described as an example as a light emitting region of the decorative cover arranged on the front side of the gaming machine main body. However, it may be a side lamp such as the first illumination unit 301 or the second illumination unit 302. Further, it may be another lamp constituting the front frame set 14.

[10] In Examples 27 to 30 described above, as the light emitting region of the decorative cover of the movable illumination portion 305, the movable illumination portion 305 arranged on the back side of the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 37 is an example. As described above, the movable illumination portion 305 arranged on the back side of the left edge portion of the opening of the center frame 37 and the movable illumination portion 305 arranged on the upper edge portion of the opening of the center frame 37. There may be. Further, the movable illumination portion 305 may be one in which all or part of the opening of the center frame 37 is always exposed at the right edge portion, the left edge portion, or the upper edge portion.

[11] In Examples 27 to 30 described above, the movable illumination unit 305 was arranged on the center frame 37, but the movable illumination unit 305 is located at a location other than the center frame 37 of the game board 30. It may be visually recognized in the arranged state, or may be visually recognized from the opening of the center frame 37 in the state of being arranged in the inner frame 12 or the movable display device unit 35.

[12] In Examples 27 to 30 described above, the light irradiation device 707 that irradiates the movable illumination unit 305 with light is a light emitting substrate, but a device other than the light emitting substrate that irradiates light is used. You may. For example, the decorative cover of the movable illumination unit 305 may be made to emit light by using the light emitted from the third symbol display device 42.

[13] In Examples 23 to 26 described above, the control for the light irradiation device 607 is posture control for setting the irradiation angle of the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 611 to the first irradiation angle, or emits light. Although it was an irradiation area control for setting the irradiation area of the light emitted from the substrate 611 to the first irradiation area, a predetermined point (for example, a center point) of the first light emitting region 605 and the second light emitting region 606). The irradiation distance control may change the irradiation distance between the light emitting substrate 611 and a predetermined point (for example, the center point) of the light emitting substrate 611.

[14] In Examples 23 to 33 described above, the irradiation means rotates (rotates), tilts, and moves in the left-right direction, but bends, bends, expands and contracts, and moves in the front-rear direction. At least one of the movements may be possible. In addition, the irradiation area can be easily adjusted by bending it if it has a structure that can be bent with a hinge or the like, bending it if it is a flexible substrate, or expanding or contracting it if it has a structure that can be expanded or contracted by a slide mechanism or the like. can do. The irradiation distance may be easily adjusted by moving in the front-back direction.

[15] In Examples 23 to 26 described above, the push-in portion 616 is a protrusion and the push-in receiving portion 617 is a surface that receives the input portion of the control means. The push-in portion 616 may be a surface, and the push-in receiving portion 617 may be a protrusion that contacts the surface.

[16] In Examples 24 and 28 described above, as a configuration in which the mode of light is controlled by a device other than the light irradiation means, the light transmitting plates 631 and 731 have been described as an example, but reflection that reflects light has been described. The member may be tilted or rotated to control the mode of light.
[17] The present invention may be implemented on various types of gaming machines (for example, first-class, third-class, etc.), or on pachinko machines of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as.). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be put into a special gaming state on condition that the ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special gaming state when the ball enters a predetermined winning opening. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines that use game balls such as an arrange ball type pachinko machine and a sparrow ball.

[18] Unless the means for carrying out the invention, the invention described in the examples, and the invention described in each of the above-mentioned modifications are contradictory to each other, the constitution of the invention is appropriately changed, replaced, or deleted. It is also possible to make a configuration such as or a combination.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

30 ... Game board 30a Game area 70 Main control device (main control device)
30 Game board 32 Variable winning device 32a Large winning opening 33a Starting winning device for special figure 1 33b Starting winning device for special drawing 2 34 Starting opening for normal symbol 35 Variable display device unit 36 Out port 40 1st symbol display device 41 2nd Symbol display device 42 3rd symbol display device 43a Normal screen 43b Demo screen 43c High-speed fluctuation screen 43d Left symbol stop screen 43e All symbol stop screen 43f Normal reach display screen 43g Development reach display screen 43g-1 Strong light flashing screen 43h Opening screen 43i Round screen 43j Ending screen 43k High probability state screen 43l High probability state medium reach display screen 44a Specific operation period information 44b Specific operation screen 44c Change information display unit 44d Operation method display unit 44e Specific operation period end proximity information 44e1 First specific operation Period end proximity information 44e2 2nd specific operation period end proximity information 44f opening information 44g opening right-handed explanation information 44h round right-handed information 44i round number information 44j ending information 44k ending right-handed information 44l next game state proximity information 44l1 1st next game state proximity information 44l2 2nd next game state proximity information 44l3 3rd next game state proximity information 44l4 4th next game state proximity information 44l5 5th next game state proximity information 44m High probability / support state Right-handed information 44n Bonus video 44o Luminations gaze prevention information 44p Bonus information 44q Information with setting suggestion 44v Ending countdown information 44w Next game status suggestion information 44x Manufacturer information 44y Card removal forgetting prevention information 44z Illuminations prevention information 44z1 First sunk prevention information 44z2 2nd Illumination Prevention Information 300 Illuminations 301 1st Illuminations 302 2nd Illuminations 303 3rd Illuminations 305 Movable Illuminations 602 Transition Mechanism 603 Slide Groove 604 Separate 3rd Illuminations 605 1st Light Emitting Region (first light emitting region)
606 Second light emitting region (second light emitting region)
607 Light irradiation device (irradiation means)
608 Control mechanism (control means)
609 3rd Illuminations cover (decorative cover)
610 Separate 3rd Illuminations Cover (Separate Decorative Cover)
611 Light emitting board (light emitting board)
612 LED
613 Board support 614 Input section (input means)
615 Output unit (output means)
616 Pushing part 617 Pushing receiving part 618 Shaft 619 Coil spring 620 Main body side fixing part 621 Posture regulation part 630 Translucent part (translucent means)
631 Translucent plate 632 Translucent plate support 641 Separate cover detection sensor (detection means)
642 Tilt motor 643 Separate cover detection protrusion 650 Separate third illuminated cover 651 Partial light emitting area 642 Non-light emitting area 703 Movable lighting unit 705 First light emitting area (first light emitting area)
706 Second light emitting region (second light emitting region)
707 Light irradiation device (irradiation means)
708 Control mechanism (control means)
709 Movable Illuminations cover (decorative cover)
710 Drive mechanism 711 Light emitting board 712 LED
713 Board support 714 Input section (input means)
715 output unit (output means)
716 Pushing part 717 Pushing receiving part 718 Shaft 719 Coil spring 721 Posture regulation part 730 Translucent part (translucent means)
731 Translucent plate 732 Translucent plate support 741 Displacement detection sensor (detection means)
742 Rotating motor 750 Movable illumination part (light guide plate)
751 Partial light emitting area 752 Non-light emitting area 753 Light guide plate light emitting part 754 Partial light emitting part 755 Non-light emitting part

Claims (1)

Decorative members arranged on the front side of the game machine body,
In a gaming machine provided with an irradiation means for irradiating light toward the back surface side of the decorative member.
The gaming machine can shift a predetermined surface of the decorative member that receives the light emitted from the irradiation means to a different position.
When the predetermined surface is located at the first position, the light emitted from the irradiation means executes the first control of emitting the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region. When the predetermined surface is located at the second position, a second control is executed in which the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a control means for performing.

Images